Military Studies
This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA
Overview
Download & View Military Studies as PDF for free.
More details
- Words: 46,908
- Pages: 287
Sergeants Distance Education Program
8013A
MILITARY STUDIES (8013A) Course Introduction
Scope
An outstanding Marine NCO must have the ability to train and advise Marines on many different subjects. You must be technically and tactically proficient in these subjects to accomplish this task. This course discusses a variety of subjects that will enhance your ability to assist junior Marines in their quest to be better Marine leaders. Though the subjects are considerably larger than this course can handle, this is merely a starting point in responding to inquiries from your junior Marines who are striving to become Marine leaders.
References
The following references were used in the writing of this course: · · · · · · ·
Manual for Courts-Martial, United States (2000) Edition. JAG Instruction 5800.7C, Manual of the Judge Advocate General. MCRP 5-12.1A, Law of Land Warfare. MCRP 4-11.8A, Food Services Reference. Army Pamphlet 27-10, Military Justice. Marine Corps University Archives Simmons, Edwin Howard, The United States Marines, A History, 3rd Edition · Department of the Navy, Naval Historical Center. · www.marinemedals.com · www.usmc.mil/historical.nsf · www.history.navy.mil · MCO P5060.20 Pt 1/Pt 2, Marines Corps Drill and Ceremonies Manual. · MCO P10520.3B, Marine Corps Flag Manual. · MCO P1020.34F, Marine Corps Uniform Regulations. · TM 10120-15/1, Marine Corps Fitting and Alterations Manual. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
i
Course Introduction
Course Introduction, Continued
Table of Contents
This course contains the following study units: Study Unit -1 2 3 4 5 --
Title Course Introduction Non-Judicial Punishment (NJP) The Law of Land Warfare History and Contributions of Marine Noncommissioned Officers (NCOs) Drill Uniforms and Inspections Review Lesson Exercise
Page i 1-1 2-1 3-1 4-1 5-1 R-1
Estimated Study Time
You will spend about 12 hours and 30 minutes completing this course. This includes the time to study the text, complete the exercises, and take the final exam.
Reserve Retirement Credits
You will earn four retirement credits after you complete this course. You can earn reserve retirement credits at the rate of one credit for each 3 hours of estimated study time. Note: If you are awarded credits for drill attendance during drill periods, reserve retirement credits are not awarded for MCI study time.
Summary
The all-important gateways to successfully complete this course are summarized in the table below: Step 1 2 3
After you… Enroll in the program Complete the self-paced text Pass the final examination
Then you will… Receive your program material. Arrange to take the final examination. Receive a course completion certificate.
Note: For more information, refer to the Program Guide.
MCI Course 8013A
ii
Course Introduction
STUDY UNIT 1 NON-JUDICIAL PUNISHMENT (NJP) Overview
Estimated Study Time
2 hour, 45 minutes
Unit Scope
This unit addresses the use of information required in the professional development of a senior NCO. This unit of study will enhance knowledge, benefit training, and help maintain discipline within a unit. The premise of this unit is every Marine should have a basic understanding of the Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ) and non-judicial punishment (NJP).
Learning Objectives
After completing this study unit, you should be able to
Unit Content
·
Explain the rights of the accused to an accused suspect.
·
Identify proper documenting of a charge sheet.
This study unit contains the following lessons: Topic Lesson 1 Fundamentals Lesson 2 Article 31 Lesson 3 Documenting the Offense
MCI Course 8013A
1-1
See Page 1-3 1-9 1-25
Study Unit 1
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
1-2
Study Unit 1
LESSON 1 FUNDAMENTALS Introduction
Estimated Study Time
20 minutes
Lesson Scope
This lesson will provide background information critical to understanding non-judicial punishment (NJP) and will identify the two basic elements of Article 31 under the Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ).
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to
In This Lesson
·
Describe the references for NJP.
·
Identify the source authority for self-incrimination protection.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction References Self-Incrimination Protection Lesson 1 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
1-3
See Page 1-3 1-4 1-6 1-7
Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
References
Multiple Sources
The system of military justice gets its authority from many sources. Just as a Marine must follow his or her chain of command, you must also research information from all the military justice sources.
References of Information
The table below lists various sources of information for military justice: Source Constitution of the · United States of America
Information Basic source that authorizes a separate system of criminal law in the military
·
·
Authority from Article I, section stating that Congress shall have the power …to make rules for the government and regulation of the land and naval forces… Congress enacted in 1950
·
Military Justice Act of 1968 revised
·
Provides a separate system of military criminal law for the armed forces
·
Referred to as the code
·
Contains 140 articles that form a basis for administering justice for the Armed Forces of the United States
Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ)
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-4
Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
References, Continued
References of Information, continued
Source Manual for Courts-Martial · (MCM)
Manual of the Judge Advocate General (JAGMAN)
MCI Course 8013A
1-5
Information A regulatory supplement that explains UCMJ provisions
·
An executive order of the president
·
Article 36 authorizes the president to issue regulations prescribing the procedure to follow before military tribunals, including the rules of evidence
·
Article 56 authorizes the president to establish limits of punishment for most offenses
·
Provides the force and effect of law
· ·
Must be complied with Published by JAG of the Navy
·
Contains additional provisions
·
Explains how to carry out and supplement the MCM relative to Navy and Marine Corps service members
Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
Self-Incrimination Protection
Source Authority
The Fifth Amendment of the Constitution of the United States grants the privilege against self-incrimination.
Military Application
The Fifth Amendment protection applies procedurally to military personnel through the provisions of Article 31, UCMJ. To be admissible in a courtmartial, the accused makes a pretrial statement, which must meet the requirements of Article 31, UCMJ. These requirements are described in detail in the next lesson. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-6
Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete the exercise items 1 through 3 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
Congress enacted which of the NJP references listed below in 1950? a. b. c. d.
Item 2
Which of the following is a major reference source that explains NJP? a. b. c. d.
Item 3
Manual of the Judge Advocate General Constitution of the United States of America Uniform Code of Military Justice Manual for Courts-Martial
Battle Skills Guidebook Warfighting Handbook Manual for Courts-Martial Commanding Officers Leadership Book
The privilege of self-incrimination is granted by the _____ Amendment of the Constitution of the United States. a. b. c. d.
Third Fourth Fifth Sixth Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-7
Study Unit 1, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3
MCI Course 8013A
Answer c c c
1-8
Reference 1-4 1-5 1-6
Study Unit 1, Lesson 1 Exercise
LESSON 2 ARTICLE 31 Introduction
Estimated Study Time
25 minutes
Lesson Scope
This lesson explains Article 31 of the UCMJ in detail. This article ensures that protection from self-incrimination is provided to military members suspected of committing a crime.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to ·
Identify the contents of Article 31 by paragraph.
·
Identify the two parts of Article 31 rights.
·
Describe the proper procedure for advising accused suspects of rights.
·
Identify who can give Article 31 warning.
·
Identify when Article 31 warning should be given.
·
State the importance of properly advising accused suspects of rights.
·
Identify specific situations where Article 31 warning and waiver are required or not required. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-9
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Introduction, Continued
In This Lesson
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Contents The Suspect’s Rights Advising the Suspect The Importance of Properly Advising the Suspect Specific Issues on Article 31 Rights Lesson 2 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
1-10
See page 1-9 1-11 1-13 1-15 1-17 1-18 1-20
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Contents
Protection From Incriminating Yourself
The contents of Article 31, UCMJ by paragraph are quoted in the table below:
Paragraph a
b
Contents No person subject to this chapter may compel any person to incriminate himself, or to answer any question that may tend to incriminate him. No person subject to the chapter may interrogate, or request any statement from an accused or a person suspected of an offense without first informing him of the nature of the accusation and advising him that he does not have to make any statement regarding the offense of which he is accused or suspected and any statement made by him may be used as evidence against him in a trial by court-martial.
Remarks Paragraph (a) of Article 31, UCMJ is a paraphrase of that portion of the Fifth Amendment that protects a citizen from being a witness against himself. Paragraph (b) of Article 31, UCMJ is the equivalent to the Miranda Rights that civilians must be advised of before they can be questioned pertaining to an offense that they are believed to have committed.
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-11
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Contents, Continued
Protection From Incriminating Yourself, continued
MCI Course 8013A
Paragraph c
Contents No person subject to this chapter may compel any person to make a statement or to produce evidence before any military tribunal if the statement or evidence is not material to the issue and may tend to degrade him.
d
No statement obtained from any person in violation of this article, or obtained through the use of coercion, unlawful influence, or unlawful inducement may be received in evidence against him in a trial by court-martial.
1-12
Remarks Paragraph (c) of Article 31 protects military personnel from having to testify to immaterial and degrading matters. This kind of testimony would have a tendency to disgrace the witnesses or to bring them into disrepute even if they would not be subject to any real danger of prosecution. Paragraph (d) forbids the introduction of evidence obtained in violation of Article 31 into a courtmartial (evidence obtained without a proper warning or through coercion or unlawful influence). Statements, confessions, and admissions must be voluntary if they are to be admissible in a courtmartial.
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
The Suspect’s Rights
Elements
There are two basic elements of Article 31: · ·
Warning
Warning Waiver
A warning is given so the accused suspect is informed and advised in compliance with Article 31, UCMJ. Before asking the suspect a question, he or she must be warned and advised of their rights: ·
(Suspect’s name), you are suspected of the offense(s) of (a general description or the offense, such as larceny or assault).
·
You have the right to remain silent.
·
Any statement you make can be used as evidence against you in a trial by court-martial.
·
You have the right to consult with a lawyer, to have a lawyer with you during all questioning, and to seek the lawyer's advice before you answer any questions.
·
If you desire, you may obtain a civilian lawyer at your own expense.
·
If you cannot afford or do not desire a civilian lawyer, a military lawyer can be appointed to you without cost.
·
If you decide to answer questions now without a lawyer present, you will have the right to stop answering at any time. You also have the right to stop answering questions at any time in order to obtain a lawyer. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-13
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
The Suspect’s Rights, Continued
Waiver
After the warning has been given, make sure the suspect or accused understands his or her rights by asking the three questions listed below: ·
(Suspect’s name), do you want a lawyer? (Suspect replies.)
·
Do you understand that if you should decide to answer questions, you may stop answering questions at any time? (Suspect replies.)
·
Do you want to answer questions and make a statement? (Suspect replies.)
Once the suspect understands their rights, then he or she can freely, knowingly, and intelligently waive them if so desired.
MCI Course 8013A
1-14
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Advising the Suspect
Who Warns Suspects
Article 31(b), UCMJ imposes the duty to warn on only those persons subject to this code. However, by necessary implication, the duty is also imposed on any person acting as an agent of the military authorities for the purpose of furthering a military investigation.
When to Warn Suspects
Give the accused suspect Article 31 rights before any interrogation begins or whenever an act constitutes a statement of admission.
Verbatim Reading
A verbatim (word for word) reading of Article 31 rights is the method to use to advise the suspect of his or her rights. The two elements (warning and waiver) of Article 31 should be stated exactly as published in Article 31 without error to the suspect or accused.
Procedural Recommendations
The manner in which to advise suspects of their rights is as follows: ·
Identify yourself to the suspect.
·
Read the Article 31 Warning Card verbatim without error to the suspect.
·
Ask the suspect three questions:
·
·
Do you want a lawyer?
·
Do you understand that if you should decide to answer questions, you may stop answering questions at any time?
·
Do you want to answer questions and make a statement?
Terminate the reading if the suspect: ·
Does not understand his or her rights
·
Declines to answer questions or make a statement
·
Requests a lawyer Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-15
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Advising the Suspect, Continued
Procedural Recommendations, continued
·
Document the suspect’s Article 31 advisement on the Suspects Rights and Acknowledgement/Statement Form.
·
Instruct the suspect to read and sign the Suspects Rights and Acknowledgement/Statement Form.
Note: Intoxication either by alcohol or drugs (illegal or prescribed) can prevent a suspect or an accused from understanding the warning. Delay interrogation until the effects of the intoxicants are reduced and the accused or suspect can understand the warning. Otherwise, the warning would be ineffective and improper.
MCI Course 8013A
1-16
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
The Importance of Properly Advising Suspects
Understanding the Warning
At trial, the admissibility of a confession or admission of guilt depends on his or her signing of the Suspects Rights and Acknowledgement/Statement Form, which is in compliance with Article 31. Of course, no one can know what the accused did or did not understand. If the defense contends the accused did not understand his or her rights, that burden of proof rests with the defense and not the trial counsel.
Written Advice and Waiver
If a written advice and waiver of the suspect's rights is available, it may be introduced to show what the accused saw, possibly read, and signed. This evidence does no more than show the circumstances from which the court could conclude the pretrial statement of the accused was in compliance with Article 31 and was voluntary. However, the defense counsel may introduce testimony of the accused to show that he or she did not understand their rights. The court decides whether any statement is admissible.
MCI Course 8013A
1-17
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Specific Issues on Article 31 Rights
Statements
Visual Inspection
Article 31(b) prohibits the interrogation of an individual or the requesting of a statement from an accused person or suspect without first giving him or her the prescribed warning. The key word is statement—verbal statements include ·
An interrogation, which is any attempt to induce an accused or a suspect to make a verbal statement. In other words, an interrogation is a question or group of questions.
·
Some physical acts that a suspect performs at the interrogator's request may be considered verbal statements in court.
Visual inspection of the person of an accused or suspect does not violate any right provided by the Constitution or by any provision of the UCMJ. An accused or suspect can be compelled to submit to · · · · ·
Problem
Fingerprinting Be photographed Write or speak for identification Assume a stance Make a particular gesture
The problem is deciding when a situation requires the Article 31 rights to be read, understood, and waived, and when it is not required. A problem arises when the accused or suspect is not asked to make a statement, but asked simple questions to provide the investigators with physical evidence or to assist them in getting it. Note: Whenever an act may constitute a statement of admission, an Article 31 warning and waiver is required. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-18
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Specific Issues on Article 31 Rights, Continued
Examples
The impact of Article 31 rights on admissibility in court for specific situations is cited in the table below: Example Situation A The person who is accused or suspected of an offense is asked to identify his clothing among clothing belonging to others. The action of the accused in complying with this particular request has been determined to be an acknowledgement of ownership and is considered a statement. B A Marine’s superior suspects the accused of having marijuana and informs him, “I think that you know what I want; give it to me.” So the Marine points to his shirt where the marijuana is then discovered. Since the Marine handed over the marijuana without receiving an Article 31 warning, the marijuana is not admissible at trial. C Examining the hands of a larceny suspect to determine the presence of a stain caused by stolen money, which had been dusted with a fluorescent powder.
MCI Course 8013A
1-19
Article 31 Discussion An Article 31 warning is needed before the request is made so the clothes can be admitted in a court-martial.
Handing over a package of marijuana cigarettes by the suspect to the superior was inadmissible at trial because an Article 31 warning of rights did not precede the act.
This falls under the category of visual inspection and need not be prefaced by an Article 31 warning.
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete the exercise items 1 through 9 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
Which paragraph under Article 31 states: No statement obtained from any person in violation of this article or obtained through the use of coercion, unlawful influence, or unlawful inducement, may be received in evidence against him in a trial by court-martial? a. b. c. d.
Item 2
Paragraph a Paragraph b Paragraph c Paragraph d
What are the two basic elements of Article 31 rights? (1) _________________________________________________________ (2) _________________________________________________________
Item 3
How many questions are in the waiver element of Article 31? a. b. c. d.
Item 4
Three Four Five Six
When must Article 31 warning and waiver be administered to the accused suspect? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-20
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 5
Who is responsible for advising an accused suspect of the Article 31 rights? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
Item 6
How must the Article 31 rights be read to the accused suspect? a. b. c. d.
Item 7
Verbatim Slowly Whether or not the individual understands, he or she is guilty. Suspects are not required to have their rights read.
In the case of an intoxicated or drug-induced (prescribed or illegally) suspect, what is the proper procedure you should carry out? a. Read the Article 31 rights immediately because of the regulations. b. Ask the suspect if he or she wants to drink some coffee. c. Allow time to pass before reading the warning, but proceed with the interrogation. d. Delay interrogation until the effects of the intoxicants are reduced and the accused or suspect can understand the warning.
Item 8
The admissibility of a confession from a suspect depends on his or her a. b. c. d.
willingness to give you the truth. understanding the rights under the Article 31 warning. having a lawyer present. signing of the Suspects Rights and Acknowledgement/Statement Form, which is in compliance with Article 31. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-21
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 9
Which of the following situations requires Article 31 warning and waiver to be administered? a. Visual inspection b. Asking simple questions c. Examining the hands of a suspect for residue from an item handled during a crime d. Requiring a suspect to write or speak for identification, to assume a stance, or to make a particular gesture Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-22
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4
5
6 7 8 9
MCI Course 8013A
Answer d (1) Warning (2) Waiver a · Before any interrogation begins · Whenever an act constitutes a statement of admission Any person acting as an agent of the military authorities for the purpose of furthering a military investigation a d d b
1-23
Reference 1-12 1-13 1-14 1-15
1-15
1-15 1-16 1-17 1-18
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
1-24
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise
LESSON 3 DOCUMENTING THE OFFENSE Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope
This lesson provides the information you will need to charge someone of an UCMJ violation. As a Marine sergeant, you will be required to document an offense of the UCMJ. Once you have identified the violation, you will be able to submit a charge sheet for processing.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to
In This Lesson
·
State the punitive articles of the UCMJ.
·
Identify the components of a punitive article.
·
Identify who can submit a charge sheet.
·
State the basic information required on a charge sheet.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Punitive Articles Narrowing the Charges Example Article Submit a Charge Sheet. Lesson 3 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
1-25
See Page 1-25 1-26 1-28 1-29 1-32 1-35
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Punitive Articles
Reference
The offenses are listed in the Manual for Courts-Martial (MCM) as punitive articles 77 through 134. The MCM contains the UCMJ (Appendix 2) and explanatory material needed to implement the code. Of particular importance is Part IV, which contains a discussion of military offenses and a listing of their elements. Note: The Manual for Courts-Martial (MCM), (19xx edition) is available through the Government Printing Office, Washington, DC.
Components
The six components of a punitive article are discussed in the MCM in the following sequence: · · · · · ·
Example
Text of the article Elements of the offense or offenses Explanation Lesser included offenses Maximum punishment Sample specifications
Article 86, unauthorized absence consists of five offenses that in turn are composed of separate elements. The offenses are ·
Failure to go to appointed place of duty consisting of three elements.
·
Going from appointed place of duty consisting of three elements.
·
Absence from unit, organization, or place of duty consisting of four elements.
·
Abandoning watch or guard.
·
Absence from unit, organization, or place of duty with intent to avoid maneuvers or field exercises consisting of five elements. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-26
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Punitive Articles, Continued
Determining Article Violated
From any given set of facts, which crime has been committed, you will determine the nature of the offense the accused has allegedly committed. It is critical that you avoid erroneous determination. Follow the four steps listed in the table below: Step 1
Action Get all the facts about the incident: · · ·
An informal investigation A formal investigation A report from an investigative agency · Criminal Investigation Division (CID) · Naval Criminal Investigation Service (NCIS) · Local civilian law enforcement agencies · Witnessing the events yourself
2
3
4
Note: The MCM requires a commanding officer to start a preliminary inquiry of an offense that may be tried by court-martial. Check the list of offenses for the one(s) that fit the facts (see Contents, Part IV, Punitive Articles of the MCM. Read the list and select any possible offenses. Note: Each offense is assigned a number such as Article 85, Desertion; Article 86, Unauthorized Absence, etc. Turn to the offense(s) you selected. Each offense is discussed separately within Part IV, MCM. After the text, a paragraph entitled ELEMENTS sets forth the essential conditions that must exist to convict an accused of the offense. These essential conditions are called the elements of an offense. To be found guilty of an offense, · ·
The essential elements must match the facts of the case. All the elements must be proven beyond a reasonable doubt.
If one or more elements are absent, the Marine did not commit that offense.
MCI Course 8013A
1-27
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Narrowing the Charges
Reference
An individual may be charged with more than one offense, but each offense must have its own specification. Part IV, MCM references the language for almost every charge and specification. The Rules for Court-Martial (R.C.M.) 307(c) of the MCM discusses in detail how to prepare the charge and specification once the offense has been identified. The information that follows is an example of an article’s structure and considerations you must make when applying that charge to a suspect taken directly from the MCM.
MCI Course 8013A
1-28
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Example Article
Article 86
Article 86, Unauthorized Absence (UA) ·
Contains five separate UA offenses (see Punitive Articles, Example in this lesson).
·
Covers every case not provided for elsewhere in which any member of the Armed Forces is, through the member's own fault, not at the place where the member is required to be at a prescribed time. It is not necessary that the person be absent entirely from military jurisdiction and control.
For purposes of this course, only the first offense will be discussed in detail. In actual practice, you would have to read through all five offenses of Article 86 to determine which offenses were violated. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-29
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Example Article, Continued
Offense
The first offense of Article 86 is Failure to Go to Appointed Place of Duty. To charge someone with the first offense, you must be able to prove all three essential elements of proof. The table below lists what the elements mean to you as a leader: Element Discussion (a) That a certain The ultimate offense. An oral or written order is authority appointed sufficient to appoint a time and place of duty. a certain time and · Violations of written orders that appoint a time and place of duty for place of duty can be charged; however, the accused the accused. will only be punished for his unauthorized absence (for which a lesser punishment is permitted). The ultimate offense is not the violation of the order, but the absence that violated the order. · (b) That the accused knew of that time and place…
Generally, violation of an oral order that appoints a time and place of duty can only be prosecuted as UA. Knowledge of the order. The accused knew or should have known of that time and place of duty. This element may be proven by either ·
·
Direct Evidence ·
A witness testifies that at 1410 he heard the accused say, “Oh, oh – I’m in trouble now. The Gunny told me to report to the CO at 1400.”
·
Evidence that tends to prove or disprove a fact in issue. In this example, the fact in issue is knowledge of the order.
Circumstantial Evidence ·
Evidence such as the Plan of the Day (POD) was properly posted and included an announcement stating the time and place of duty.
·
Tends to prove knowledge; does not absolutely prove knowledge unless the accused read the POD or heard the announcement. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-30
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Example Article, Continued
Offense, continued
MCI Course 8013A
Element (c) That the · accused, without authority, failed to go to the appointed place of duty at the time prescribed.
Discussion Completion of the Offense. The accused failed to go to his or her appointed place of duty. The offense is complete at the moment the accused fails to appear at the appointed place of duty at the prescribed time. The fact that the accused later went to his or her appointed place of duty is not a defense. That the accused finally made an appearance may lessen the severity of the sentence that may be awarded. However, the Marine is still in violation of this article by failing to appear at the prescribed time.
·
Without Authority. The key words in all absence offenses are without authority. Absence is not an offense. It must be coupled with the fact that the absence was without authority to constitute an offense under the UCMJ. A Marine may be absent with authority from his or her unit or place of duty as on liberty, leave, temporary additional duty (TAD), etc. Therefore, the allegation must be that a particular absence was without authority before that absence becomes an offense under the UCMJ.
·
Use of Documents. Failure to go to an appointed place of duty at a prescribed time in violation of Article 86 is generally proven by official records, a copy of orders directing the time and place for reporting, etc. This offense is easily proven through the introduction of documentary evidence created by the particular order; e.g., a restriction muster, or a log sheet. This order directed a specific accused to be at a specific place at a particular time. His or her absence at that time may be proven by a master sheet or log entry made by the personnel in charge.
1-31
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Submit a Charge Sheet
Who Can Charge the Offense?
Before an NJP may be imposed, the offense must be identified and a charge and specification(s) determined. Once that is done, anyone may initially prepare a charge sheet. This sheet is to be forwarded to a unit’s local legal support section or law center.
DD Form 458
When the offense has been identified, a Charge Sheet, DD Form 458 is prepared. This form must be prepared before any punitive action can be taken.
Elements
There are two elements of a charge sheet: ·
Charge: a one-sentence statement that lists the number and title of the alleged offense.
·
Specification: always included with the charge; it details who committed the offense, when, where, against whom, and under what circumstances. In other words, it specifies all the elements of the particular offense.
A single charge sheet can have multiple charges and specifications on it. The charge and the specification's purpose is to inform the accused of the offenses alleged against him or her so that he or she will have an opportunity to plan a defense against those charges. Example of a Charge
The charge would be as follows: · ·
Example of a Specification
Desertion: Charge I, Violation of the UCMJ, Article 85. Larceny: Charge I, Violation of the UCMJ, Article 121.
In a case of larceny, the specification would be as follows: In that Lance Corporal John Doe, United States Marine Corps did, at Marine Corps Base, Quantico, Virginia, on or about 20 November 1999 stole one wristwatch, of a value of about $95.00, the property of Larry Smith. (See paragraph 46(f)(1), Part IV, MCM, 1984). Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-32
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Submit a Charge Sheet, Continued
The Front View of DD Form 458
The front view of the Charge Sheet, DD Form 458 is identified in the diagram below:
Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
1-33
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Submit a Charge Sheet, Continued
The Back View of DD Form 458
MCI Course 8013A
The back view of Charge Sheet, DD Form 458 is identified in the diagram below:
1-34
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Lesson 3 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete the exercise items 1 through 7 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
What are the numbered punitive articles found in the Manual for Courts-Martial (MCM)? a. b. c. d.
Item 2
17 through 34 31 through 76 77 through 134 177 through 234
What are the six components of a punitive article? (1) _________________________________________________________ (2) _________________________________________________________ (3) _________________________________________________________ (4) _________________________________________________________ (5) _________________________________________________________ (6) _________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-35
Study Unit 1 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 3
Who can prepare a charge sheet and forward it to the unit’s local legal support section or law center? a. b. c. d.
Item 4
The commanding general Anyone The legal counsel of the accused The Marine accused of the offense
What basic information is required on the charge sheet? a. b. c. d.
Who and what happened Rights of the accused and request for counsel The commands authority and regulations The charge and specification Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-36
Study Unit 1 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
3 4
MCI Course 8013A
1-37
Answer c Text of the article Elements of the offense or offenses Explanation Lesser included offenses Maximum punishment Sample specifications b d
Reference 1-26 1-26
1-32 1-32
Study Unit 1 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
1-38
Study Unit 1 Exercise
STUDY UNIT 2 THE LAW OF LAND WARFARE Overview Estimated Study Time
1 hour, 15 minutes
Unit Scope
Ancient wars were characterized by total and unrestrained violence. Defeated forces and civilians were subjected to wholesale extermination, torture, and slavery. During the Middle Ages, war was studied from both a philosophical and technical perspective, military and political leaders recognized that unlimited war was counterproductive to their objectives. Today, the Laws of War regulates combat.
Learning Objectives
After completing this study unit, you should be able to
In This Study Unit
·
Identify the law of land warfare fundamentals.
·
Identify the rules of engagement
This study unit contains the following lessons: Topic Lesson 1 Law of Land Warfare Fundamentals Lesson 2 Rules of Engagement (ROE)
MCI Course 8013A
2-1
See Page 2-3 2-21
Study Unit 2
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
2-2
Study Unit 2
LESSON 1 LAW OF LAND WARFARE FUNDAMENTALS Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope
Following World War II, the Nuremburg Tribunal, which tried the major German war criminals, declared: International Law is not the product of an international legislature. The law of warfare is to be found not only in treaties, but in the customs and practices of states which gradually obtain universal recognition from the general principles of justice.
This lesson will discuss the purpose for the laws of war. The key to understanding the laws of war is to know the overall objective of war as viewed by the United States. This lesson will show how the laws of war benefit the overall accomplishment of the military mission assigned to achieve that objective. Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to ·
Identify the two main sources for the laws of war.
·
Identify the objective of war.
·
State the purpose for the laws of war.
·
Identify the four basic concepts underlying the laws of war.
·
Identify the nine Marine Corps principles for the laws of war.
·
Identify what constitutes a war crime.
·
Identify methods to prevent war crimes.
·
Identify how to report a war crime. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-3
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Introduction, Continued
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Sources of Land Warfare War Concepts Underlying the Laws of War Basic Principles of the Laws of War War Crimes Preventing War Crimes Reporting War Crimes Lesson 1 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
2-4
See Page 2-3 2-5 2-7 2-9 2-10 2-12 2-13 2-15 2-16
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Sources of Land Warfare
Main Sources
There are two main sources for the laws of war: · ·
Customary International Law
The customary international law is a body of rules that civilized nations recognize as binding them in their conduct towards one another. This body of rules is established by the custom and practice of a country: · ·
International Custom
Customary International Law Ratified Treaties
International Custom Codified International Laws
International custom, as evidence of a general practice accepted as law, consists of ·
A practice by a number of nations regarding situations falling within the domain of international relations
·
Continuous practice over a long period of time
·
Conception that the practice is required by or is consistent with prevailing international law
·
General acquiescence by other nations
Many customary practices are eventually codified, such as most of the contents of the Geneva Convention. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-5
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Sources of Land Warfare, Continued
Codified International Laws
The codified international laws (Geneva Convention) can become so widely accepted that it is considered customary, even for nations that are not yet a party to a particular international agreement. Customary acts that have become internationally accepted practices are listed below: · · · ·
Ratified Treaties
Formal declarations of war Prisoner exchanges Protection of civilians and non-combatants Communication through neutral third parties
Treaties are formal agreements that are made between two or more countries. Sources for the laws of war are in treaties and international customs, which have been practiced over a long period of time by a large number of countries in the belief that it is required by law. Treaties that establish laws of war and have been ratified by the U.S. Senate are part of the U.S. law. The two main treaties that deal with laws of war are · · · · · ·
The Hague Rules of 1907 The Geneva Convention of 1949 Treatment of prisoners of war Protection of the sick and wounded on land Protection of the sick, wounded, and shipwrecked at sea Protection of civilians during times of war
A Marine in violation of the laws of war would be punished under the UCMJ. Other References
There are numerous references for the law of land warfare. A few of them are listed below: · · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Handbook, On The Law of War For Armed Forces, written by Frederic De Mulinen Army Pamphlet 27-10, The Law of Land Warfare FM 27-10 MCRP 4-11.8B MCRP 5-12.1A
2-6
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
War
Objective of War
The objective of war is to destroy the enemy’s will to resist or change their will until it agrees with the objective set forth by higher authorities. Obeying the laws of war will help accomplish this objective with the least amount of suffering and destruction of personnel and property.
Purposes for Laws of War
There are three purposes for laws of war: · · · · · · ·
Prevent unnecessary suffering of combatants and non-combatants. Safeguard certain fundamental human rights of persons: Prisoners of war Sick and wounded Shipwrecked people Civilians Encourage the restoration of peace.
Constitutional Obligations
The Nation’s law requires that we afford certain rights to persons captured on the battlefield. Every disciplined Marine needs to be aware of this basic philosophy. As the defenders of our Constitution, we have an obligation to enforce its provisions. However, affording this legal protection to captured persons also is of military value.
Prisoner Treatment Effects Military Objective
Warriors developed the general rules on how to treat enemy prisoners of war (EPWs). Lawyers only wrote down what the commanders practiced. We also comply with these rules because it helps us on the battlefield. If the enemy knows that we will treat him with dignity and respect and not harm him, he is more likely to surrender. We also hope these basic rights will be afforded to our Marines if they become prisoners of war. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-7
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
War, Continued
Handling Prisoners
Once a person has surrendered or comes into your custody, it is your duty to ensure they are treated humanely. You must account for each and every EPW from capture until you turn him over to higher headquarters. Initially, treat a captured person as a prisoner of war¾always. Process them according to the five Ss: · · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Search Silence Segregate Safeguard Speed to the rear
2-8
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Concepts Underlying the Laws of War
Four Basic Concepts
The four basic concepts underlying the laws of war are listed below: · · · ·
Military Necessity
Military necessity Proportionality Unnecessary suffering Discrimination
The principle of military necessity justifies the employment of that degree or kind of violence, not forbidden by international law, required to secure the timely submission of the enemy. Military necessity is never accepted as a justification for committing a war crime.
Proportionality
In combat operations, Marines are required to strike a balance between infliction of suffering and the use of force. Marines must apply only the amount of force needed to accomplish the mission.
Unnecessary Suffering
Although suffering cannot be eliminated in war, you must exercise a degree of restraint in combat. Destruction must be limited to that which is necessary, relevant, and proportionate to the accomplishment of legitimate military missions.
Discrimination
Attacks must be directed against a specific military target.
MCI Course 8013A
2-9
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Basic Principles of the Laws of War
Source of Reference
The list of acts covered under various treaties and conventions are extensive. Every leader must review FM 27-10, The Law of Land Warfare, to enhance their knowledge on this subject. The time to teach the Marines in your unit the laws of war is now, not when you are in harms way. The nine basic principles of the laws of war are listed in the table below: Number Principle 1 Marines fight only enemy combatants. While it is perfectly lawful to kill an enemy combatant, it is not legal to intentionally target a civilian who is not taking part in the hostilities. 2 Marines do not harm enemies who surrender. They must disarm them and turn them over to their superior. Giving good treatment of EPWs will encourage more enemies to surrender and shorten the time to achieve victory. It will also encourage the enemy to give better treatment to U.S. prisoners. 3 Marines do not kill or torture prisoners. Killing or torturing an enemy prisoner is a violation of the UCMJ and will be punished harshly. 4 Marines collect and care for the wounded whether friend or foe. Wounded enemy troops will not be left on the battlefield after the engagement is over to suffer a slow and lingering death. 5 Marines do not attack medical personnel, facilities, or equipment. Both friendly and enemy medical personnel are to be encouraged to come to the battlefield in safety to care for the wounded combatants. 6 Marines destroy no more than the mission requires. While it is legal to destroy properties to accomplish the military mission, unnecessary destruction of civilian property wastes resources and detracts from mission accomplishment. 7 Marines treat all civilians humanely. Civilians who are not taking part in the hostilities are to be treated with respect. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-10
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Basic Principles of the Laws of War, Continued
Source of Reference, continued
Number Principle 8 Marines do not steal. Marines respect private property and possessions. A thief is a thief whether in peace or war and will be prosecuted under the UCMJ. 9 Marines should do their best to prevent violations. They must report all violations of the laws of war to their superior. It is not sufficient for the individual Marine to only obey the laws of war, but Marines must use their authority to prevent others from violating the law. Where they cannot prevent a violation, they must report the offense up their chain of command. If the Marine believes his superior is partially responsible for the violation, this report may be made to any other officer in a position of authority. It may also be made to the provost marshal, judge advocate, or even the chaplain.
MCI Course 8013A
2-11
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
War Crimes
Definition
A war crime is the intentional harming of civilians not taking part in the hostilities, enemy prisoners of war, medical personnel, or other noncombatants. While any violation of the laws of war may be considered a war crime, the violations that are directed at these particular protected persons are most likely to be prosecuted harshly.
Examples
In all cases of armed conflict (whether or not there is a declaration of war) acts that violate the Geneva Convention are war crimes. Some examples of war crimes are · · · · · · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Torture Rape Murder Reprisals against EPWs or civilians Mutilation Unnecessary destruction of cultural sites Attacks on medical facilities Faking surrender only to attack Attacking while dressed in enemy uniforms
2-12
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Preventing War Crimes
Morale Courage
Marines must step forward and use moral courage to halt atrocities. The bottom line is if you know in your gut that what is happening is wrong, tell the perpetrators to cease their actions immediately.
Correct Pattern
A review of war crime cases reveals that a pattern of lack of training, boredom, and poor leadership usually occurs just before acts of misconduct toward EPWs, the sick and wounded, and civilians. You should look for this pattern and take affirmative steps to prevent war crimes: · · ·
Conduct Tactical Training
Conduct tactical training. Stress normal military behavior. Provide good leadership.
In all tactical training before deploying, teach the procedures for dealing with situations that can easily become laws of war violations, such as how to · · ·
Handle troublesome EPWs properly. Select a lawful military target in the middle of the civilian community. Respond properly when a white flag is shown, using careful tactical responses.
Under the stress of combat, Marines will respond the way they were trained. Remind Marines that they are authorized to use deadly force and to destroy property only because of military necessity. Tactical situations will dictate confrontation with the enemy. Criminal conduct during a deployment is intolerable, distracts from accomplishment of the military mission, and will be dealt with swiftly. Properly treated, the civilian populace may be a prime source of intelligence information. Reinforce the basic laws of war instruction by emphasizing the nine basic principles of the laws of war. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-13
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Preventing War Crimes, Continued
Stress Normal Military Behavior
Most laws of war violations result from the constant change of combat stress and then long periods of boredom. Good leadership should emphasize normal behavior and positive activity. Constantly remind Marines of normal military behavior standards: ·
· · Provide Good Leadership
Be watchful for signs of · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Maintain high standards of military: · Courtesy · Discipline · Hygiene · Moral conduct Keep your Marines informed. Prevent personal wars or vendettas within the unit and with local civilians.
Personality disorders Stress-related actions Antisocial conduct A breakdown in military discipline and courtesy
2-14
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Reporting War Crimes
Identify Illegal Orders
Orders are presumed to be legal. Remember training is aimed at preventing the issuance of illegal orders. Illegal orders are regarded as a war crime violation. Examples of illegal orders are to · ·
Report the Order
Kill the prisoners. Mutilate the bodies.
The first way you should report the order is by following the chain of command, bypassing the superior who issued the order. The commanding officer has the responsibility and the authority to immediately correct and discipline any misconduct. A second option is to report the order to the military police, if a report cannot be made up the chain of command. If neither the chain of command nor military police are available, report the order to a judge advocate or chaplain.
Procedure
To report an illegal order, follow the steps listed in the table below: Step 1
2 3
MCI Course 8013A
Action Clarify the order.
Example The order is, “Take care of those useless prisoners. You know what to do with them.” Your response should be, “Sir, are you ordering me to kill the helpless enemy prisoners?” Refuse the order. “Sir, I will not shoot the prisoner.” Report the order using the “Colonel, on this date, I was ordered chain of command, but to shoot a prisoner.” bypassing the superior who issued the order.
2-15
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete exercise items 1 through 9 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
List the two main sources for the laws of war. (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________
Item 2
Which two treaties deal specifically with laws of war issues? (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________
Item 3
What is the objective of war? (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________
Item 4
What are the three purposes for the laws of war? (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________ (3) ________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-16
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 5
List the four basic concepts underlying the laws of war. (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________ (3) ________________________________________________________ (4) ________________________________________________________
Item 6
Following the basic principles of the laws of war, what are the proper procedures for handling a wounded foe discovered on the battlefield? ___________________________________________________________
Item 7
Define war crime. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________
Item 8
What three procedures are included in tactical training for preventing war crimes? (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________ (3) ________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-17
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 9
What are the three steps to report an illegal order? (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________ (3) ________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-18
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3
4
5
6 7
8
9
Answer (1) Customary International Law (2) Ratified Treaties (1) The Hague Rules of 1907 (2) The Geneva Convention of 1949 (1) Destroy the enemy’s will to resist. (2) Change their will until it agrees with the objective set forth by higher authorities. (1) Prevent unnecessary suffering of combatants and non-combatants. (2) Safeguard certain fundamental human rights to people such as EPWs, the sick and wounded, civilians, etc. (3) Encourage the restoration of peace. (1) Military necessity (2) Proportionality (3) Unnecessary suffering (4) Discrimination Collect and care for the wounded. The intentional harming of civilians not taking part in the hostilities, enemy prisoners of war, medical personnel, or other non-combatants (1) Handle troublesome enemy prisoners of war properly. (2) Select a lawful military target in the middle of civilian community. (3) Respond properly when a white flag is shown. (1) Clarify the order. (2) Refuse the order. (3) Report the order.
Reference 2-5 2-6 2-7
2-7
2-9
2-10 2-12
2-13
2-15
Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
2-19
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
2-20
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise
LESSON 2 RULES OF ENGAGEMENT (ROE) Introduction
Estimated Study Time
25 minutes
Lesson Scope
Although the laws of war provide the basic foundation for all military operations, individual Marines should receive detailed rules of engagement (ROE) for each particular exercise. This lesson explains the general principles that apply to rules of engagement.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to
In This Lesson
·
Define the term rules of engagement.
·
Identify the three main purposes of ROE.
·
Name the three classes of persons who are entitled to self-defense.
·
Name the three types of actions that will justify self-defense.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction General Information Self-Defense Lesson 2 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
2-21
See Page 2-21 2-22 2-24 2-27
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
General Information
Rules of Engagement Definition
The Joint Pub 1-02, DOD Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms defines rules of engagement (ROE) as…directives issued by competent military authority which delineate the circumstances and limitations under which United States forces will initiate and/or continue combat engagement with other forces encountered. Higher authorities should establish the ROE to explain proper conduct in detail.
Purposes for ROE
Standing ROE
The three main purposes for ROE are listed below: ·
Provides implementation guidance on the application of force for mission accomplishment
·
Serves as a fire control method of military operations by the civilian and military chain of command
·
Implements the inherent right of self-defense
The Chairman of the Joint Chiefs Instruction 3121.01A dated 15 January 2000 provides the standing rules of engagement (Standing ROE) for U.S. forces. In the absence of superseding guidance, the Standing ROE (SROE) establishes fundamental policies and procedures governing the actions to be taken by U.S. force commanders. The SROE will apply in the event of a military attack against the United States and during all military operations, contingencies, terrorist attacks, or prolonged conflicts outside the territorial jurisdiction of the United States. The SROE was established far in advance of any current deployment. The Chairman’s instruction recognizes that each particular mission will have different levels of threat, different objectives, and different weapons mix. Competent military authorities draft more specific ROE to accomplish a particular mission. The SROE provides guidelines for incorporating ROE development into the crisis action planning and deliberate planning processes by commanders and staffs at all levels. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-22
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
General Information, Continued
Mission ROE
The responsibility of the mission specific ROE is listed below: · ·
G-3—when engaged in operations or crisis action planning G-5—when engaged in deliberate planning
Generally, the staff judge advocate provides assistance in developing specific mission ROE. Restraints and Constraints
ROE are prepared based upon the following: · · · ·
Laws of war (LOW) Political policy Public opinion Military operational constraints
ROE are more restrictive than what the LOW allows. Targeting rules are usually incorporated within the ROE.
MCI Course 8013A
2-23
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
Self-Defense
Of Whom
Marines are authorized by ROE to use deadly force to defend three classes of persons. Those three classes are identified in the table below: Class of Persons Individuals and Self Units
National Interests
Explanation Marines have the inherent right to defend themselves. Marines have the right and obligation to defend U.S. forces, including elements or personnel thereof, and other U.S. forces in the vicinity against a hostile act or hostile intent. Example: In 1983, the Marine Barracks in Beirut, Lebanon was the victim of a suicide bombing. In the investigation, the young Marine sentry explained that he hesitated to chamber a round into his weapon upon the approach of the truck for fear that under his vaguely worded ROE card, he would be committing a war crime. The Marine sentry should have been instructed that he had the right to exercise unit self-defense. Marines have the right to defend U.S. citizens and their property from hostile acts or hostile intent. Note: The SROE do not automatically authorize Marines to defend designated non-U.S. forces, foreign nationals, and their property. Authority to exercise this collective selfdefense is normally retained by the National Command Authority (the President, Secretary of Defense, and National Security Advisor). Therefore, the correct level of authorization to defend non-U.S. forces and nationals should be obtained prior to entering into foreign territory. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-24
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
Self-Defense, Continued
Against What
U.S. forces need not be attacked before they can respond in self-defense. The use of force in peacekeeping, and even in peace enforcement, is normally a measure of last resort. Under those circumstances, attempts should be made to control the situation without the use of force. If force is necessary, the nature, duration, and scope of the force should not exceed the amount required to decisively counter the hostile act or intent. Self-defense force used against a hostile situation is identified in the table below: Situation Act
Intent
Force
Explanation An attack or use of force against U.S. forces and, when national and or collective self-defense has been implemented, against those persons and assets protected by those definitions. The threat of imminent use of force, including the threat of force used to impede or preclude the mission or duties of U.S. forces. Hostile intent is fact specific. Note: Although the classified portions of the SROE contain guidance throughout to the factors that may constitute evidence of hostile intent in various situations, the ultimate decision rests with the commander against whom the potential hostile intent is being demonstrated. Any force (civilian, terrorist, paramilitary, or military) that has committed a hostile act or demonstrated hostile intent, and is considered a continuing hostile threat. Once declared hostile by appropriate authority, U.S. forces need not observe a hostile act or demonstration of hostile intent before engaging. The basis of the engagement shifts from conduct of the potential threat to merely status of the force. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-25
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
Self-Defense, Continued
Request for Changes
The SROE expects the threat assessment will likely change throughout the course of a single mission and the mission specific ROE will have to change to stay current. During any deployment, you should expect routine changes to the mission specific ROE based upon better intelligence on the threat assessment and or the scope of the mission changes. If your unit is requesting a change for supplemental mission specific ROE, it should always include the justification for the request. Your unit should serialize all requests sent up the chain of command and all approvals, especially the Joint Task Force and higher headquarters that are promulgating and or approving the ROE. Example: A unit that has received CINC ROE approval serial 005 should ensure that they possess approval serials 001 through 004, unless the latest message is a total restatement of all previously approved ROE.
Training
During the stress of combat, Marines will react the way they are trained. In developing tactical unit training, ROE should be written for unit commanders and individual Marines to practice making judgment calls with regard to a possible threat. ROE will seldom, if ever, state in explicit detail when force may be utilized. Such a decision is subject to many factors that the person responsible for facing the threat must determine. Therefore, ROE should not be regarded as a comprehensive checklist of events that must occur before force can be used.
MCI Course 8013A
2-26
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete exercise items 1 through 4 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
Define rules of engagement. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________
Item 2
The three main purposes for ROE are (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________ (3) ________________________________________________________
Item 3
What three classes of persons does ROE authorize the use of deadly force to defend? (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________ (3) ________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-27
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 4
List the three types of hostile situations that justify self-defense. (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________ (3) ________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-28
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1
2
3 4
MCI Course 8013A
Answer …directives issued by competent military authority which delineate the circumstances and limitations under which United States forces will initiate and/or continue combat engagement with other forces encountered. (1) Provides implementation guidance on the application of force for mission accomplishment (2) Serves as a fire control method of military operations by the civilian and military chain of command (3) Implements the inherent right of self-defense (1) Individuals and self (2) Units (3) National interests (1) Act (2) Intent (3) Force
2-29
Reference 2-22
2-22
2-24 2-25
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
2-30
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise
STUDY UNIT 3 HISTORY AND CONTRIBUTIONS OF MARINE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS (NCOs) Overview
Estimated Study Time
1 hour, 55 minutes
Unit Scope
This study unit will discuss the historic development of the noncommissioned officer (NCO), significant NCOs, and battles in Marine Corps history. As an NCO, you should realize the enormous burden of your responsibilities as well as the joys and success that come from those responsibilities.
Learning Objectives
After completing this study unit, you should be able to
Unit Content
·
Identify the origins of the noncommissioned officer (NCO).
·
State the purpose of the Medal of Honor (MOH).
·
Identify historic individuals and battles.
This study unit contains the following lessons: Topic Lesson 1 Origins of the Noncommissioned Officer Lesson 2 Medal of Honor (MOH) Lesson 3 Historic Individuals and Battles
MCI Course 8013A
3-1
See Page 3-3 3-15 3-21
Study Unit 3
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
3-2
Study Unit 3
LESSON 1 ORIGINS OF THE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope
Try to imagine a Marine Corps without noncommissioned officers (NCOs). Boot camp would not exist because drill instructors would not exist. Think of the hundreds of platoons in a Marine division, a lieutenant just out of the basic school would head each platoon with no NCO standing in. The dignity of a command, which is essential to discipline, would be lost without NCOs.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to
In This Lesson
·
Identify the origins of the NCO.
·
List the responsibilities of the NCO.
·
Identify NCO obligations for self and to the unit.
·
Identify the roles the NCO fulfills.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction International Origins American NCO Development Marine Corps NCO Development NCO Purpose NCO Obligations NCO Roles Lesson 1 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
3-3
See Page 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-11
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
International Origins
Seventh Century, B.C.
As recorded in the book of Deuteronomy in the seventh century B.C., captains of fifties and captains over tens served among the forces of Moses. A Roman gunnery sergeant was called a centurion who commanded the smallest tactical units in the Roman Legion.
Middle Ages
During the Middle Ages after the fall of Rome, no organized armies, as the Romans knew them or as we know them today, existed. However, as soon as the first rudiments of modern military organization appeared during the fourteenth century, the NCO reappeared.
The 1400’s
The Condottieri, the first modern military units, consisted of mercenary French, Swiss, and Italian soldiers. They were professionals who served under the colors of any state that paid and fed them. The Condottieri units initiated the ranks of sergeants and corporals. Sergeant, dating from 1425, is the older rank.
MCI Course 8013A
3-4
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
American NCO Development
Baron von Steuben
In 1778 Baron von Steuben, a Prussian adviser, was forging the continental Army into a professional force and wrote the Regulations for the Order and Discipline of the Troops of the United States: The choice of noncommissioned officers is an object of the greatest importance: The order and discipline of a regiment depends so much on the behavior, that too much care cannot be taken for granted. Honesty, sobriety and a remarkable attention to every point of duty are absolute necessary.
The Blue Book
Baron von Steuben also aided the NCO’s growth as an instructor of soldiers by writing the Blue Book—name derived from the color of the first edition. This manual covered all aspects of infantry service and stressed NCO responsibilities for the care, discipline, and training of the men in garrison and in the field.
Attributes for an NCO
Von Steuben’s six attributes for an NCO are as valid today as they were at Valley Forge: · · · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Character Attention to duty Loyalty Command presence Professional skill Ability to instruct
3-5
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Marine Corps NCO Development
Shared Leadership
NCOs have always shared leadership responsibilities with their commissioned superiors. For more than 200 years, NCOs have served as leaders in the U.S. Marine Corps during peace and war. NCOs are key to unit morale and esprit de corps, as well as the mainstay of discipline and efficiency.
Role of Tactics
Because both the American and European armies generally fought standing in lines facing the enemy (linear tactics), the NCOs had to keep the long ranks steady to maintain volley fire discipline. A fundamental problem in the Civil War was that the linear tactics still being used were designed for men carrying smoothbore muskets. During the Civil War, soldiers were armed with rifled muskets, which had greater accuracy. Unless tactics were changed, casualties were certain to be horrendous with the increased killing power of even newer weapons introduced late in the war.
Technological Changes
Breech loading rifles, cavalry carbines, and the gatling guns underscored the need for more open tactical formations. Various unit commanders gradually introduced such formations to reduce the vulnerability of their men to the increased volume and accuracy of enemy fire.
Maintain Order The gradual elimination of linear tactics after the Civil War redefined the
NCO’s combat leadership role. The change in technological advances and tactics emphasized and increased the role of the small unit leaders, the NCOs, to maintain order on a more complex battlefield.
MCI Course 8013A
3-6
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
NCO Purpose
Essential Link in Command
The NCO provides the essential link between the unit’s commanders and enlisted Marines. To serve successfully as the link between commanders and unit members, the NCO has always had to perform several important functions simultaneously.
Responsibilities
The NCO’s responsibilities are listed below:
Major Tasks Summarized
·
Decentralize command authority in an orderly structure down to the smallest element in an organization.
·
Provide links between commanders (as well as officers in general) and the troops.
·
Provide a senior enlisted adviser, a platoon sergeant, a first sergeant, or a sergeant major for each commander.
·
Afford avenues for advancement whereby enlisted men and women may realize their full potential as leaders. (Not every Marine can become a general, but with application and attitude, every Marine can win chevrons and, in so doing, demonstrate that the road to the top is always open.)
·
Recognize and reward outstanding technical and military skills.
In other words, NCOs help the commander to · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Lead, train, and take care of enlisted Marines. Enable good Marines to get promoted. Maximize the Marines’ best skills and abilities.
3-7
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
NCO Obligations
To Yourself
As an NCO, you owe it to yourself to enjoy the burden of your leadership position. If you do not, your Marines will know it and you will be ineffective. Just as enthusiasm is contagious, so is lack of it. Providing your unit with positive leadership, you will reap the greatest returns from the Marines entrusted to your care: · · · · ·
To the Unit
Your primary obligations to the unit are to · · ·
Trust Among Marines
Greatest accomplishment of the mission Willing obedience Inspire confidence Loyalty Respect
Win on the battlefield. Accomplish all assigned tasks. Build and foster unit cohesion: · Provide training. · Set meaningful standards. · Hold yourself and your Marines accountable to high standards.
As an NCO, you must create trust among Marines from vastly different social backgrounds and cultural experiences: You can build on that trust by eliminating the ignorance of prejudice while at the same time, educating Marines on the value of diversity. This mutual trust is too easily destroyed if you tolerate racist overtures, sexual harassment, fraternization, or hazing. If you encourage or turn your head to any of these evils, you will immediately lose credibility and will destroy unit cohesion.
MCI Course 8013A
3-8
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
NCO Roles
Roles of the NCO
The NCO fulfills five major roles: · · · · ·
Unit Leader
Unit leader Trainer Guardian of standards Backbone of the Corps Disciplinarian
Successful leadership demands excellence. To be a good unit leader, practice the six traits listed below: · · · · · ·
Know yourself and your troops. Be both tactically and technically proficient. Understand mission requirements and communicate them clearly. Make sound and timely decisions. Always set a good example. Take responsibility for unit performance.
Trainer
You are a trainer ready to teach troops everything they must know, from the proper wearing of the uniform and the observance of military customs and traditions to marksmanship and physical training. Above all, you must fully understand military professionalism and be able to pass along to others whatever knowledge is required to accomplish the mission.
Guardian of Standards
Historically, the setting of standards has been the responsibility of officers. However, the teaching and enforcing of standards, both of soldier discipline and soldier skills, has been the NCO’s responsibility. Thus, you must enforce standards of conduct.
Backbone of the Corps
NCOs are the backbone of the Marine Corps. From the recruiting process, through recruit training, and into the operation forces, the Marine Corps holds the NCOs responsible for the care and development of the nation’s most precious resource, the individual Marine. No other service in the world fully entrusts its NCOs to the extent that the Marine Corps does. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-9
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
NCO Roles, Continued
Disciplinarian
MCI Course 8013A
Subordinates have always watched NCOs. Therefore, you must discipline yourself first to present a positive example at all times. You must remain thoroughly prepared in tactics and techniques of your field. If you present a negative example for any reason, you encourage your subordinates to violate accepted standards of conduct. Serious discipline problems will soon develop.
3-10
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete the exercise items 1 through 12 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Items 1 Through 4
Matching: For items 1 through 4, match the letter of the period of time in column 2 to the NCO development in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used only once. Column 1
Column 2
NCO Development
Period of Time
___ 1.
a. b. c. d. e.
___ 2. ___ 3. ___ 4.
Item 5
The Condottieri units initiated the ranks of sergeants and corporals. Centurions commanded the smallest tactical units in the Roman Legion Baron von Steuben listed six attributes for an NCO that are still valid. Technological advances and tactical changes increased NCO leadership role.
Seventh Century, B.C. Middle Ages 1400’s 1778 Civil War
What are the three major tasks that summarize the NCO’s responsibilities? (1) _______________________________________________________ (2) _______________________________________________________ (3) _______________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-11
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Items 6 Through 10
Matching: For items 6 through 10, match the letter of the type of obligation in column 2 to the action in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used more than once. Column 1
Column 2
Action
Obligation
___ 6. ___ 7.
Provide training. a. To yourself Build and foster unit b. To the unit cohesion. ___ 8. Provide positive leadership. ___ 9. Hold yourself and your Marines accountable to high standards. ___ 10. Inspire confidence. Item 11
As an NCO, what are four of the six tasks to be a good unit leader? (1) _______________________________________________________ (2) _______________________________________________________ (3) _______________________________________________________ (4) _______________________________________________________
Item 12
What are the major roles of the NCO? a. Soul of the unit, assistant to the commander, trainer, and disciplinarian b. Backbone of the Corps, intermediary between commanders and unit members, and trainers c. Unit leader, assistant to the commander, an example of standards, and trainer d. Unit leader, trainer, guardian of standards, backbone of the Corps, and disciplinarian
MCI Course 8013A
3-12
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise Solutions
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5
· · ·
6 7 8 9 10 11
· · ·
· · · 12
MCI Course 8013A
3-13
Answer c a d e Lead, train, and take care of enlisted Marines. Enable good Marines to get promoted. Maximize the Marines’ best skills and abilities. b b a b a Know yourself and your troops. Be both tactically and technically proficient. Understand mission requirements and communicate them clearly. Make sound and timely decisions. Always set a good example. Take responsibility for unit performance. d
Reference 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7
3-8 3-8 3-8 3-8 3-8 3-9
3-9
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
3-14
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise
LESSON 2 MEDAL OF HONOR (MOH) Introduction
Estimated Study Time
20 minutes
Lesson Scope
NCOs must combine history and tradition with skill and ability to prepare for combat. The Medal of Honor (MOH) is the highest award for valor in action against an enemy force that can be bestowed upon an individual serving in the armed services of the United States. Generally presented to its recipient by the President of the United States of America in the name of Congress, it is often called the Congressional Medal of Honor.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to
In This Lesson
·
State the purpose of the Medal of Honor (MOH).
·
List the criteria for receiving the MOH.
·
Identify the first Marine NCO to receive the MOH.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Background Information History Lesson 2 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
3-15
See Page 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18
Study Unit 3, Lesson 2
Background Information
Purpose
The purpose of the MOH is to recognize deeds of gallantry and heroism in times of war and of peace. It is given for conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his or her life above the call of duty. The act or execution of duty must be performed while ·
Engaged in an action against an enemy of the United States
·
Engaged in military operations involving conflict with an opposing foreign force
·
Serving with friendly foreign forces (such as the case with the United Nations’ forces in Korea) engaged in an armed conflict against an opposing armed force in which the United States is not a belligerent party
The MOH is the highest award given for bravery in the United States. MOH Criteria
MCI Course 8013A
The criteria of the MOH is as follows: ·
No margin of doubt or possibility of error in awarding this honor.
·
Service is rendered conspicuous above their comrades by an act so outstanding that it clearly distinguishes their gallantry beyond the call of duty from lesser forms of bravery.
·
The deed must be the type that if not done, it will not subject the individual to any justified criticism.
·
The deed must be without detriment to the mission of the command or to the command to which attached.
3-16
Study Unit 3, Lesson 2
History
Birth of the MOH
The idea for the MOH was born during the Civil War as men fought gallantly and often displayed great heroism: · · ·
Presentation
First Marine Recipient
MCI Course 8013A
Instituted only for the enlisted men of the Navy with officers being permitted to receive the award later Authorized by Congress Approved on 21 December 1861 by President Abraham Lincoln
On 20 September 1905, President Theodore Roosevelt signed an executive order: ·
Presentation of the award will always be formal and impressive.
·
The recipient will, when practical, be ordered to Washington, DC.
·
The President will make the presentation, as Commander in Chief or by such representative designated by the President.
·
When not practicable to have the presentation at Washington, the details of time, place, and ceremony will be prescribed by the Chief of Staff for each case.
·
On campaign, the division or higher commander will make the presentation.
In May 1862, Corporal John F. Mackie was the first Marine to receive the MOH. During the attack on Fort Darling at Drewry’s Bluff, Virginia, he fearlessly maintained his musket fire against the rifle pits on shore, and when ordered to fill vacancies at guns caused by men wounded and killed in action, manned the weapon with skill and courage. Currently, 294 Marines have received the MOH since 1862.
3-17
Study Unit 3, Lesson 2
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete the exercise items 1 through 6 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
What is the purpose of the Medal of Honor (MOH)? ____________________________________________________________
Items 2
List three of the four criteria for receiving the MOH. (1) _________________________________________________________ (2) _________________________________________________________ (3) _________________________________________________________
Item 3
The MOH is the highest award given in the United States for a. b. c. d.
Item 4
leadership. bravery. judgment. initiative.
Who was the first Marine recipient of the MOH? ____________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-18
Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 5
Marines have received the MOH since a. b. c. d.
Item 6
1775. 1862. 1881. 1941.
When did President Lincoln approve the MOH? a. b. c. d.
20 September 1805 21 December 1862 20 September 1841 21 December 1861 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-19
Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2
3 4 5 6
MCI Course 8013A
Answer To recognize deeds of gallantry and heroism in times of war and of peace · No margin of doubt or possibility of error in awarding this honor. · Service is rendered conspicuous above their comrades by an act so outstanding that it clearly distinguishes their gallantry beyond the call of duty from lesser forms of bravery. · The deed must be the type that if not done, it will not subject the individual to any justified criticism. · The deed must be without detriment to the mission of the command or to the command to which attached. b Corporal John F. Mackie b d
3-20
Reference 3-16 3-16
3-16 3-17 3-17 3-17
Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise
LESSON 3 HISTORIC INDIVIDUALS AND BATTLES Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope
The history of the Marine Corps is rife with tales of the Marine NCO. Today’s corporals and sergeants carry on one of the strongest and longest unbroken traditions of duty, honor, courage, and commitment within our Corps.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to
In This Lesson
·
State the NCO’s tasks throughout history.
·
Write the NCO creed.
·
Cite specific examples of NCO behavior that exemplified the NCO creed.
·
Identify the importance of specific incidents in Marine Corps history.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction NCO Tasks Through History NCO Creed NCOs in Action 1776 Through 1890s 1900 Through 1940s 1950s and 1960s 1980s Through 1990s Lesson 3 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
3-21
See Page 3-21 3-22 3-24 3-25 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-34
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
NCO Tasks Through History
Neatness and Sanitation
In the early days of American Revolution, little standardization of NCO duties or responsibilities existed. Sergeants and corporals were expected to instruct recruits in all matters of military training, especially with regard to their neatness and sanitation. However, the increase of technology that accompanied modernization greatly effected the NCO corps during the last half of the 19th century. The duties of the NCO were clearly defined during this period.
Weapons and Daytime Maneuvers
World War I required the first massive training of men that the United States had seen. NCOs trained hundreds of Marines who would be sent overseas. NCOs were the primary instructors during this period with lessons emphasizing weapons and daytime maneuvers.
Basic Training
With the attack on Pearl Harbor in 1941, the United States found itself at war. This attack forced basic training to be centered around hands-on experience instead of the classroom instruction. NCOs conducted all of the training. After basic training, Marines were sent to their units where training continued.
Battle Leaders, Integrated Squads
During the Korean War, NCOs emerged more prominently as battle leaders than they had in World War II. The deeply eroded hills, ridges, narrow valleys, and deep gorges forced many units to advance as squads. The Korean War was the first war the United States entered with an integrated force. Black and white Marines fought side by side on the battlefield against a common foe.
Junior Leaders, Decentralized Control
In 1965, the first American ground troops were committed to Vietnam. The American policy of containment of communism was severely challenged. The Vietnamese communists fought a long, drawn out war that eventually wore down the American forces. At times, there were no clear battle lines and often it was hard to tell friend from foe. This battle proved to be a junior leaders’ war with decentralized control. Much of the burden of combat leadership fell on the NCOs. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-22
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
NCO Tasks Through History, Continued
NCO Education In recent years, the emphasis on NCO education was stressed to all units in
the Marine Corps. In 1981, the NCO Basic Course was established. The basic course was designed to educate NCOs on subjects and skills needed to enhance their performance and abilities on and off the battlefield.
MCI Course 8013A
3-23
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
NCO Creed
Live by the NCO Creed
Memorize and try to live by the NCO creed as follows: I am an NCO dedicated to training new Marines and influencing the old. I am forever conscious of each Marine under my charge, and by example I will inspire him (or her) to the highest standards possible. I will strive to be patient, understanding, just and firm. I will commend the deserving and encourage the wayward. I will never forget that I am responsible to my commanding officer for the morale, discipline, and the efficiency of my men and their performance will reflect an image of me.
NCO Contributions
History has shown that proficient NCOs utilize the NCO creed as words to live by in all facets of life. During many of the battles in which the Marine Corps has participated, NCOs have exemplified the NCO creed. These NCOs were always winners on the battlefield and subsequently earned numerous prestigious awards for their distinguished and noteworthy contributions.
Summary
The Marine Corps owes its existence to the accomplishments of generations of NCOs who have served under its colors and have made history. That history is an integral part of the sense of pride and tradition that pervades the present day Marine Corps. Learning the NCO creed, you will · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Understand your responsibilities as an NCO. Have a ready tool to conduct your life. Continue the legacy and tradition for future NCOs.
3-24
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
NCOs in Action
Exemplify
From the halls of Montezuma to the shores of Tripoli, Marines continue to fight and die in war and peace to secure the liberties and freedom of democracy and humanitarianism worldwide.
Special Recognition
Special recognition is given to four NCOs and their actions on duty: · · · ·
Sergeant J.E. Johnson
Sergeant J.E. Johnson Sergeant J.I. Poynter Corporal R.E. O’Malley Sergeant Daniel P. Matthews
Sergeant Johnson was awarded the Medal of Honor for conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his life while serving in Korea as a squad leader for 3/7 1st Marine Division in December 1950. Sergeant Johnson and his squad were vastly outnumbered when a well-entrenched and cleverly concealed enemy force wearing the uniforms of friendly troops attacked the platoon’s open and unconcealed positions. Sergeant Johnson unhesitatingly took charge of his platoon in the absence of the leader and, exhibiting great personal valor in the face of a heavy barrage of hostile fire, coolly proceeded to move about among his men, shouting words of encouragement and inspiration and skillfully directing their fire. To help his platoon, Sergeant Johnson immediately placed himself in an extremely hazardous position to provide effective cover for his men. Fully aware that his voluntary action meant either certain death or capture to himself, he courageously continued to provide effective cover for his men and was last observed in a wounded condition single handedly engaging enemy troops in close hand-grenade and hand-to-hand fighting. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-25
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
NCOs in Action, Continued
Sergeant J.I. Poynter
Sergeant Poynter was awarded the MOH for conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his life above and beyond the call of duty while serving as a squad leader in a rifle platoon of Company A, 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st Marine Division. In action against enemy aggressor forces during the defense of Hill 532, south of Sudong, Korea on 4 November 1950. Sergeant Poynter gallantly gave his life for his country. When a vastly outnumbering, well-concealed hostile force launched a sudden vicious counterattack against his platoon’s hasty defense position, Sergeant Poynter displayed superb skill and courage in leading his squad and directing its fire against the onrushing enemy. With his ranks critically depleted by casualties and he himself critically wounded, the onslaught gained momentum. The hostile force surrounded his position. Sergeant Poynter seized his bayonet and engaged in bitter hand-tohand combat as the breakthrough continued. Observing three machineguns closing in at a distance of 25 yards, he dashed from his position, grasping hand grenades from his fallen Marines as he ran. He then charged the emplacements in rapid succession, killing the crews of two and putting the other out of action before he fell, mortally wounded. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-26
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
NCOs in Action, Continued
Corporal R.E. O’Malley
Corporal O’Malley was honored for conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity in action against the communist (Viet Cong) forces at the risk of his own life above and beyond the call of duty. While leading his squad in the assault against a strongly entrenched enemy force, his unit came under intense small arms fire. With complete disregard for his personal safety, Corporal O’Malley raced across an open rice paddy to a trench line where the enemy forces were located. Jumping into the trench, he attacked the Viet Cong with his rifle and grenades and single-handedly killed eight of the enemy. He then led his squad to the assistance of an adjacent Marine unit that was suffering heavy casualties. Continuing to press forward, he reloaded his weapon and fired, with telling effect, into the enemy emplacement. Corporal O’Malley personally assisted in the evacuation of several wounded Marines, and again regrouping the remnants of his squad, he returned to the point of the heaviest fighting. Ordered to an evacuation point by an officer, Corporal O’Malley gathered his besieged and badly wounded squad and led them under fire to a helicopter for withdrawal. Although three times wounded in his encounter, and facing imminent death from a fanatic and determined enemy, he steadfastly refused evacuation. He continued to cover his squad’s boarding of the helicopters while, from an exposed position, he delivered fire against the enemy until his wounded men were evacuated. Only then, with his last mission accomplished, did he permit himself to be removed from the battlefield. By his valor, leadership, and courageous efforts on behalf of his comrades, he served as an inspiration to all who observed him. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-27
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
NCOs in Action, Continued
Sergeant Daniel P. Matthews
During the Vietnam conflict, Sergeant Matthews was assigned to F Company, 2/7, 1st Marine Division as a squad leader. Sergeant Matthews was participating in a counterattack against a firmly entrenched and wellconcealed hostile force that had repelled six previous assaults on a vital enemy-held outpost far forward of the main line. During the attack, Sergeant Matthews observed the deadly fire preventing a corpsman from removing a wounded man lying in an open area. Without much thought for his own safety, Sergeant Matthews leaped into the machinegun nest, taking the enemy by complete surprise. He continued his one-man assault until he had succeeded in destroying the machinegun nest that enabled his comrades to evacuate the stricken Marine to safety.
MCI Course 8013A
3-28
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
1776 Through 1890s
Invasion of Bahamas
The first Marine landing took place during the Revolutionary War. Marines invaded New Providence Island in the Bahamas and seized guns and supplies. The uniform of the day had a stiff stock worn around the neck to protect from sword slashes, thus earning Marines the nickname Leather Neck.
Civil War
Despite the Marines’ readiness and prompt action at Harpers Ferry, the Marine Corps played only a small part during the Civil War. Even so, during this conflict, 16 Marines were awarded the MOH.
Foreign Duty in Korea
After the USS flagship Colorado was fired upon 10 June 1871 on the Han River in west Korea, Captain McLane Tilton led his squad in an assault against the Korean forts. After taking two of the forts without much difficulty, Captain Tilton then led his Marines against a heavily fortified Citadel. During the ensuing battle, which required hand-to-hand combat, Corporal Charles Brown and Private Hugh Purvis made their way to the flagstaff and tore down the enemy flag. As a result of this heroic act, both Marines were subsequently awarded the Medal of Honor.
Landing in Cuba
On 11 June 1881 after the Marines landed and established its first beachhead on Cuban soil, they attacked. On the morning of 15 June 1881, Lieutenant Magill was ordered to bypass the objective and cut off any enemy retreat. As Lieutenant Magill led his men to the crest, a nearby ship opened fire upon the squad. As the shells began falling, Lieutenant Magill realized he and his men were in the ship’s line of fire. Without hesitation, Sergeant John Quick stood up in plain sight of the enemy and began waving an improvised flag in a cease-fire fashion. With the enemy bullets whistling through the air, Sergeant Quick remained exposed and continued to signal until the firing stopped.
MCI Course 8013A
3-29
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
1900 Through 1940s
China’s Boxer Rebellion
During the summer of 1900, prior to the extensive Marine buildup in the Philippines, the Boxer Rebellion broke out in China. On the following day, the Boxers destroyed railways and shops. With violent mobs screaming for the death of all Westerners, an alarm had been sent for military assistance. Of course, the Marines responded.
Belleau Woods
During June of 1918, Marines attacked well-entrenched Germans at Belleau Woods and defeated them with tenacious, courageous, and gallant fighting styles. Due to the Marines’ dogged fighting style, the Germans gave the name Devil Dogs to the Marines.
French Fourragere
As a result of the Marines’ outstanding service in World War I, the French awarded the French Fourragere to the 5th and 6th Regiments for their outstanding service. The French Fourragere is a yellow braided cord that is worn around the arm of the dress uniform at the shoulder.
Pearl Harbor
On the morning of 7 December 1941, Japan launched a devastating attack on the American Pacific Fleet anchored at Pearl Harbor. As a result, Marines defended against attacks throughout the Pacific during the opening stages of the war. During the war, the Marine Corps was the principal ground force the Allies used in a strategy of island hopping campaign. This major role led to the strength of the Marine Corps reaching nearly 500,000 during the war.
MCI Course 8013A
3-30
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
1950s and 1960s
Provisional Brigade
Conflict in Korea tested the Marine Corps’ combat readiness. The Marines responded to the North Korean attack by quickly assembling the first Marine Provisional Brigade from the under-strength of 1st Marine Division. The 1st Marine Provisional Brigade acted as a fire brigade to defend the Pusan perimeter. The Marines fulfilled other roles in the Korean War: · ·
Vietnam
Amphibious landing forces over the seawalls at Inchon Aviators flying helicopters in battle for the first time
In February 1965, shortly after the celebration of Tet (a Vietnamese holiday), the Viet Cong attacked two U.S. military installations, injuring and killing a large number of U.S. Army advisors and maintenance personnel. As a result of these attacks, President Lyndon B. Johnson ordered military targets in North Vietnam be bombed. Marines landed in South Vietnam, committing the Marine Corps to its longest war in history.
MCI Course 8013A
3-31
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
1980s Through 1990s
Beirut, Lebanon
In the summer of 1982, at the request of the Lebanese government, the United States agreed to establish a U.S. military presence in that country to serve as a peacekeeping force. On 24 March 1983, the 24th Marine Amphibious Unit (MAU) left America in support of that mission. On 23 October 1983, a suicide-truck bomb attack on the headquarters building killed 241 Americans and wounded 70 others. On 24 March 1984, a tree was planted along Lejeune Boulevard in Jacksonville, N.C. for each of the lost service members. The last Marines withdrew in July 1984. On 23 October 1986, a memorial plaza was dedicated in memory of all the service members.
Operation Urgent Fury
In 1983 following the assassination of the Prime Minister and the overthrow of the government of Grenada, Marines participated in Operation Urgent Fury. It was a joint military operation in response to a request from neighboring Caribbean nations. The Marines’ rapid response secured the island and safeguarded hundreds of American citizens living on the island.
Operation Just Cause
During 1989 in response to increasing unrest in Panama, the President ordered the joint military Operation Just Cause. The United States forces, including the Marines, overthrew the military government of General Manuel Noriega and installed a civilian government. Under indictment in the United States for drug trafficking and racketeering, Noriega was arrested and sent to the United States for trial.
Operation Desert Shield
In 1990 following the Iraq invasion of Kuwait, Operation Desert Shield was launched. This military operation was designed to halt the advance of Iraqi forces and to position multinational forces assembled for possible offensive action to dispel the invading force. Operation Desert Shield validated the Marine Corps’ maritime prepositioning force (MPF) concept and enacted the plan of tailoring units to accomplish a mission as part of a Marine air-ground task force (MAGTF). Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-32
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
1980s Through 1990s, Continued
Operation Desert Storm
During 1991, Operation Desert Storm was launched after the Iraqi government refused to comply with the United Nations’ resolutions. Marine aviation conducted combat operations when the air phase commenced in January 1991. After massive bombing, Marine ground forces participated in the sweep into Kuwait to help liberate the country and damage the Iraqi military capability.
Operation Restore Hope
In 1992 as part of the joint military Operation Restore Hope, Marine forces landed in war-torn Somalia. United States forces provided security for the distribution of humanitarian aid. The U.S. forces were later incorporated in the United Nations’ peacekeeping forces and were sent to stabilize the situation in the country.
Operation Uphold Democracy
During 1994, joint military Operation Uphold Democracy was ordered by the President to restore the civilian government in Haiti. Marines landed in the northern part of Haiti to stabilize the situation and provide security for the orderly transfer of power from the military to the democratically elected government of President Jean Bertrand Aristide.
MCI Course 8013A
3-33
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
Lesson 3 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
15 minutes
Directions
Complete the exercise items 1 through 12 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
Sergeants and corporals in the early 19th century instructed recruits, especially with regard to a. b. c. d.
Item 2
During the Vietnam War, NCOs carried the burden of a. b. c. d.
Item 3
weapons and tactics. neatness and sanitation. integration and diversity. decentralized control.
technical performance and education. integration and diversity. combat leadership. decentralized control.
Write the NCO creed. _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-34
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Items 4 and 5
Matching: For items 4 and 5, match the letter of the NCO in column 2 to the action in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used only once. Column 1
Column 2
Action
NCO
___ 4.
___ 5.
He exemplified valor leadership and courage by single-handedly killing eight of the enemy; personally assisted with the evacuation of wounded Marines; and steadfastly refused evacuation until wounded men were evacuated safely. He took charge of his platoon in absence of the leader; encouraged, inspired, and skillfully directed fire; and placed himself in mortal position to provide effective cover for his men.
a. b. c. d.
Sergeant J.E. Johnson Sergeant J.J. Poynter Corporal R.E. O’Malley Sergeant Daniel P. Matthews
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-35
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Items 6 Through 9
Matching: For items 6 through 9, match the letter of the time period in column 2 to the historic event in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used only once. Column 1
Column 2
Historic Event
Time Period
___ 6.
a. b. c. d. e.
___ 7. ___ 8. ___ 9.
Items 10 Through 12
The first Marine landing took place. Corporal Charles Brown and Private Hugh Purvis tore down the enemy flag. The MOH was given to 16 Marines. The Marines landed and established its first beachhead.
Invasion of Bahamas Civil War Foreign Duty in Korea Landing in Cuba Belleau Woods
Matching: For items 10 through 12, match the letter of the time period in column 2 to the historic event in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used only once. Column 1
Column 2
Historic Event
Time Period
___ 10. The Marines were given the name Devil Dogs. ___ 11. The French Fourragere was awarded to the 5th and 6th Regiments. ___ 12. The Marine Corps’ combat readiness was tested.
a. b. c. d. e. f.
Boxer Rebellion Belleau Woods World War I Pearl Harbor Provisional Brigade Vietnam Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-36
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
MCI Course 8013A
Answer b c I am an NCO dedicated to training new Marines and influencing the old. I am forever conscious of each Marine under my charge, and by example I will inspire him (or her) to the highest standards possible. I will commend the deserving and encourage the wayward. I will never forget that I am responsible to my commanding officer for the morale, discipline, and the efficiency of my men and their performance will reflect an image of me. c a a c b d b c e
3-37
Reference 3-22 3-22 3-24
3-27 3-25 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-30 3-30 3-31
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
3-38
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3 Exercise
STUDY UNIT 4 DRILL Overview
Estimated Study Time
2 hours, 25 minutes
Unit Scope
As a Marine NCO, you are expected to know how and when to conduct drill with your Marines. Troop movement and simple formations are the responsibility of the Marine NCO. This study unit will cover the basics of · · ·
Learning Objectives
In This Study Unit
Troop movement Conduct with the NCO sword Flags and guidons
After completing this study unit, you should be able to ·
Conduct drill with a platoon.
·
Perform drill movements with the sword.
·
Display the different flags and guidons the Marine Corps uses.
This study unit contains the following lessons: Topic Lesson 1 Platoon Drill Lesson 2 Sword Manual Lesson 3 Flags and Guidons
MCI Course 8013A
4-1
See Page 4-5 4-39 4-57
Study Unit 4
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
4-2
Study Unit 4
LESSON 1 PLATOON DRILL Introduction
Estimated Study Time
40 minutes
Lesson Scope
Drill accustoms the individual to working as a member of a team- a team moving confidently together in unison and to a measured cadence. Marines are famous for their ability to march in step, keep straight lines and perform the manual of arms with precision. The scope of this lesson includes the basic fundamentals of platoon drill. Note: Throughout this unit, commands and commands of execution will be written in all capital letters. The commands of execution will also be underlined. For example, the command forward march will be written as “FORWARD, MARCH.”
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to ·
Identify common drill terms.
·
Identify the procedures to form a platoon.
·
Identify common halted platoon movements.
·
Identify common marching platoon movements.
·
Identify the procedures to dismiss a platoon. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-3
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Introduction, Continued In This Lesson
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction General Information Common Drill Terms Forming the Platoon Aligning the Platoon Open Ranks Form for Inspection Halted Movements Positions of Rest Marching the Platoon Commands Given in the Oblique Pass in Review Dismiss the Platoon Lesson 1 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
4-4
See Page 4-3 4-5 4-6 4-9 4-12 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-21 4-23 4-29 4-31 4-32 4-33
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
General Information
Organization
The platoon is the basic drill unit. The organization consists of · ·
Symbols
MCI Course 8013A
A platoon headquarters · A platoon commander (PC) · One or more assistants Two or more squads that are numbered · Front to rear while on line · Left to right while in column
The different symbols used for drill are identified below:
4-5
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Common Drill Terms
Definitions
The common terms used for close order drill are defined in the table below: Term Alignment Base Cadence Center Column Depth
Distance Double Time Element Extended Mass Formation File
Definition A straight line on which several elements are formed. The element on which a movement is regulated. The uniform step and rhythm in marching. The middle point or element of a unit or left-center element for an even number of elements. A formation in which the elements are placed one behind the other. Space from head to rear of a formation or position. The graphic below depicts the direction of depth, as well as the direction of the front.
Space between elements in the direction of depth. Cadence at 180 steps per minute. An individual, squad, section, platoon, company, or other unit that is part of another unit. The arrangement of a company or larger unit in which elements in column are abreast and at a specified interval greater than close interval. A column of men or line of vehicles one behind the other. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-6
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Common Drill Terms, Continued
Definitions, continued
Term Flank
Formation Front
·
Definition The right or left extremity of a unit, either in line or in column.
· The element on the extreme right or left of the line. Arrangement of elements of a unit in line, in a column, or any other prescribed manner. · The space occupied by an element measured from one flank to the other. ·
The front of a man is accepted as 22 inches.
Guide
· ·
See Depth for an illustration of front. The individual upon whom a formation or elements thereof regulates its march.
Interval
· ·
To regulate interval, direction, or alignment. The lateral space between elements on the same line.
·
The two intervals used in drill are normal and close interval as depicted in the graphic below:
Platoon at normal interval.
Platoon at close interval. Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
4-7
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Common Drill Terms, Continued
Definitions, continued
Term Line Mass Formation Pace Piece Point of Rest Quick Time Rank Slow Time Snap
Step
MCI Course 8013A
Definition A formation in which the elements are abreast. The arrangement of a company or larger unit in which its elements are in column and abreast at close interval. The length of a full step in quick time, 30 inches. An individual firearm, such as a rifle. The point toward which all elements of a unit establish their dress or alignment. Cadence is 120 steps per minute. A line of men or vehicles side by side. Cadence at 60 steps per minute; used for funerals only. · In commands or signals, the quality that inspires immediate response. · In drill, the immediate execution of movements. The distance from heel to heel between the feet of a marching man.
4-8
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Forming the Platoon
Purpose
Commands
The purpose for forming the platoon falls back into the purpose for drill, which is used to ·
Move the unit from one place to another in a standard, orderly manner.
·
Provide simple formations from which combat formations may be readily assumed.
·
Teach discipline by instilling habits of precision and automatic response to orders.
·
Increase confidence through the exercise of command, by giving proper commands, and by controlling drilling troops.
·
Give troops the opportunity to handle individual weapons.
Forming the platoon is done by giving the command "FALL IN." After this command, the platoon is ordered to · · · ·
"REPORT" "INSPECTION ARMS" "PORT ARMS" "ORDER ARMS" Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-9
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Forming the Platoon, Continued
Fall In
To fall in, the platoon sergeant · · · ·
Takes post three paces in front of the point where the center of the platoon will be positioned Faces that point Draws sword, if armed with one Commands, “FALL IN” or “AT CLOSE INTERVAL, FALL IN” · A combined command · Given without rise or inflection of the voice
After the command “FALL IN” is given, the platoon will fall in on line. Fall In Procedures
The procedures that occur at the command “FALL IN” are listed in the table below: Who Guide
Action Takes post so the first rank, when aligned, will be centered on and three paces from the platoon sergeant 1st Squad Leader Falls in at normal interval (or close interval if so ordered) to the left of the guide Other Squad Falls in directly behind the first squad leader with 40 Leaders inches of distance between them st 1 Squad · Falls in on their squad leader at normal interval (or close interval if so ordered) · All Other Squads
· ·
Takes exact interval by raising their arms, then lowers their arms to the position of attention Fall in on their squad leader at normal interval (or close interval if so ordered) Cover down on the corresponding member of the first squad
Note: All personnel will fall in at the position of attention and if armed with weapons, will fall in at order arms. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-10
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Forming the Platoon, Continued
Report
The command “REPORT” consists of two substeps: · ·
Receive The Report
Receiving the report Giving the report
To receive the report after all personnel have been formed, the procedures are listed in the table below: Who Platoon Sergeant Squad Leaders Platoon Sergeant
Action Commands “REPORT.” In succession from front to rear, salute and report “ALL PRESENT” or “(Number) MARINES ABSENT.” Commands when the Marines are armed with rifles, · · ·
“INSPECTION, ARMS.” “PORT, ARMS.” “ORDER, ARMS.”
Note: A good way to remember this sequence is to remember the acronym, FRIPO: Fall in, Report, Inspection arms, Port arms, and Order arms to form a platoon with rifles. Give The Report
To give the report when the platoon commander is present, the procedures are listed in the table below: Who Platoon Sergeant Platoon Commander Platoon Sergeant
MCI Course 8013A
Action Faces about after receiving the report and ordering inspection arms and order arms Positions himself six paces to the front and centered on the platoon Salutes and reports, “SIR, ALL PRESENT AND ACCOUNTED FOR” or “SIR, (Number) MARINES ABSENT.”
4-11
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Aligning the Platoon
In Line
Aligning a platoon in line includes a series of commands and movements by the PC: · · ·
Initial Command
Initial command Dressing the ranks Resuming line formation
The PC gives the command, “DRESS RIGHT (LEFT), DRESS.” The procedures for the command of execution, “DRESS are listed in the table below: Who Platoon Members
Platoon Commander
·
Action Execute the arm and head movements as in falling in at normal interval and obtain their alignment.
· ·
Remain in this position until given another command. Faces half left as in marching and proceeds in the most direct route until positioned on line with the front rank and one pace to the right of the right flank Marine
·
Executes a halt facing to the rear
·
Executes a right face, facing down the line Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-12
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Aligning the Platoon, Continued
Dressing The Ranks
When dressing the ranks, the PC should follow the substeps listed in the table below: Step 1 2 3 4 5
6
7
Action Aligns the front rank by commanding those Marines in advance or rear of the line to move backward or forward Addresses the Marines by either name or number in rank Those commanded to move will move the designated number of steps or will continue to move until given the command, “STEADY.” Executes a short series of side steps to the right or left to identify a Marine, but must be in line with the rank when commanding a Marine to move. After verifying the alignment of the first rank · Faces to the left as in marching · Marches straight to the next rank · Does not veer in toward the next squad leader · Halts on line with each succeeding rank · Executes a right face · Aligns that rank in the same manner as the first rank After verifying the alignment of the rear rank · · · ·
Faces to the right as in marching Proceeds straight to a point three paces beyond the front rank Halts Executes a left face Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-13
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Aligning the Platoon, Continued
Resuming Line Formation
The platoon commander gives the command, “READY, FRONT; COVER.” On the command of execution, “FRONT” all platoon members immediately assume the position of attention by lowering their left arm and simultaneously turning their heads to the front. The procedures for the command of execution, “COVER” are listed in the table below: Who Front Rank Remaining Ranks Platoon Commander
Align In Column
To align a platoon in column while marching, the PC gives the command “COVER.” The procedures for the command, “COVER” are listed in the table below: Who Base Squad Leader Other Squad Leaders Base Squad Remaining Marines
MCI Course 8013A
Action Stands fast Covers on the Marine to their front March by the most direct route and take post six paces in front and center of the platoon
Action Obtains a 40-inch distance from the guide Obtain proper interval and align on the base squad leader Obtains a 40-inch distance from the Marine to the front Align on the base squad and cover on their squad leaders
4-14
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Open Ranks
Purpose
The purpose of open ranks is to increase the interval between squads on line.
Open Ranks “MARCH” Procedures
The procedures for opening ranks are similar to the procedures for aligning a platoon in column. The PC gives the command, “OPEN RANKS, MARCH.” The procedures that occurs at the command of execution “MARCH” are listed in the table below: Who First Squad Members
Second Squad Members
Third Squad Members Platoon Commander
· · · · · · · · · ·
Close Ranks “MARCH” Procedures
Returns squads to the position of attention in the same manner as aligning a platoon in line formation
The platoon commander gives the command, “CLOSE RANKS, MARCH.” The procedures that occurs at the command of execution “MARCH” are listed in the table below: Member First Squad Members Second Squad Members Third Squad Members
MCI Course 8013A
Action Take two steps forward. Halt. Execute the movements for dress right. Take one step forward. Halt. Execute the movements for dress right. Stand fast. Execute the movements for dress right. Checks the alignment of the squads
Action Stand fast. Take one step forward and halt. Take two steps forward and halt.
4-15
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Form for Inspection
Initial Commands
To form for inspection, the platoon executes open ranks. After the PC gives the commands, “READY, FRONT, COVER,” he will · · ·
Receiving The Inspecting Officer
Completing The Inspection
MCI Course 8013A
Take one step forward and then face to the front. Be in a position three paces in front of the right file of the first rank of the platoon. Wait to receive the inspection officer at this post.
When receiving the inspecting officer, ·
The PC salutes and reports, “_____ PLATOON, FORMED FOR INSPECTION, SIR.”
·
The inspecting officer returns the salute and asks the PC to precede or follow him through the inspection.
·
The PC precedes or follows the inspecting officer during the inspection as directed by the inspecting officer.
When the inspecting officer has finished inspecting the platoon, ·
The PC takes post three paces in front of the right file of the first rank.
·
The inspecting officer will make comments and discuss discrepancies as appropriate and tell the PC to take charge of the platoon.
·
The PC · Salutes · Replies, “AYE, AYE, SIR” · Faces left · Gives the command, “CLOSE RANKS, MARCH” · Assumes his or her post six paces in front centered on the platoon
4-16
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Halted Movements
Overview
After forming the platoon, you need to become familiar with the different movements of the platoon. The halted movements of a platoon drill are · · · ·
Facing Movements
Facing movements allow you to face in a different direction while halted at the position of attention. They are executed in the cadence of quick time (120 steps per minute). While facing, your arms should not swing out from your sides, but remain at the position of attention. The facing movements covered in this lesson are · · ·
Right Face
Facing movements Side step Back step Hand salute
Right face Left face About face
Right face is a two-count movement. The actions for each count are listed in the table below: Count 1
2
Action At the command, “FACE” · · · · ·
Raise your left heel and right toe slightly. Turn to the right on your right heel and left toe. Keep your left leg straight, but not stiff. Place the left foot smartly beside the right. Stand at the position of attention. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-17
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Halted Movements, Continued
Left Face
Left face is also a two-count movement. The actions for each count are listed in the table below: Count 1
2
About Face
Action At the command, “FACE” · · · · ·
Raise your right heel and left toe slightly. Turn to the left on your left heel and right toe. Keep your right leg straight, but not stiff. Place the right foot smartly beside the left. Stand at the position of attention.
About face is a two-count movement. The actions for each count are listed in the table below: Count 1
Action At the command, “FACE” ·
2
Place your right toe half a foot length behind and slightly to the left of your left heel. · Do not change the position of your left foot. · Rest most of your weight on your left heel. Turn smartly to the right until facing to the rear. · ·
Make turn on the left heel and ball of the right foot. Feet will be at attention when the turn is completed, if your right toe was placed properly in the beginning. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-18
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Halted Movements, Continued
Side Step
The purpose of side step is to move the unit a short distance to the right or left. The command, “RIGHT (LEFT) STEP, MARCH,” is given only while halted at the position of attention. At the command, “MARCH” · · · · ·
Back Step
Move your right (left) foot 12 inches to the right (left). Place your left (right) foot beside your right (left). Repeat this movement at the rate of 120 steps per minute. Keep your legs straight, but not stiff. Hold your arms at attention.
The purpose of side back is to move the unit a short distance to the rear. The command, “BACKWARD, MARCH,” is given only while halted at the position of attention. At the command, “MARCH” · · · ·
Step off to the rear with your left foot. Take 15-inch steps at a rate of 120 steps per minute. Repeat this movement at the rate of 120 steps per minute. Swing your arms naturally. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-19
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Halted Movements, Continued
Hand Salute
The purpose of the hand salute is to render appropriate honors. The command “HAND, SALUTE” is performed in two counts, each with its own command. · ·
Hand Salute Procedures
“HAND, SALUTE.” “READY, TWO.”
The procedures that occur on the commands of execution are listed in the table below: Command SALUTE
·
Action Raise your right hand smartly in the most direct manner until the tip of your forefinger touches the lower part of the headdress, above and slightly to the right of your right eye.
·
Your thumb and fingers should be extended and joined.
·
You should see your entire palm when looking straight forward.
·
Upper arm should be level with the deck and forearm at a 45-degree angle.
·
Your wrist and hand should be straight, a continuation of the line formed by your forearm.
· TWO
MCI Course 8013A
If not in ranks, turn your head and eyes toward the person or colors you are saluting. Move your hand smartly in the most direct manner back to the position of attention.
4-20
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Positions of Rest
Positions
The different positions of rest are · · · ·
“PARADE, REST” “AT EASE” “REST” “FALL OUT”
With the exception of parade rest, all commands are combined commands. Parade rest is the only one with a preparatory and command of execution. Parade Rest
The purpose of parade rest is to give relief from the position of attention. The command, “PARADE, REST” is given only while halted and at the position of attention and is a one-count movement. At the command, “REST” ·
Move your left foot smartly 12 inches to the left. Both legs should be straight with your weight resting equally on each foot.
·
At the same time, join your hands behind your back with your right hand inside your left, palms to the rear just below the belt.
·
Loosely hold your left thumb with your right hand. Fingers are extended and joined.
·
Do not move.
·
Do not talk.
·
Hold your head and eyes in the same position as you would if at attention. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-21
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Positions of Rest, Continued
At Ease
The purpose of at ease is to give further relief from the position of attention. The command, “AT EASE” is given while halted and at the position of attention or when not in ranks. It is a one-count movement. At the command, “AT EASE” · · ·
Rest
The purpose of rest is to give further relief from the position of attention. The command, “REST” is given while halted and at the position of attention. It is a one-count movement. At the command, “REST” · ·
Fall Out
Keep your right foot in place. You may move about (adjust gear), but you must not talk. When given the command while not in ranks, simply means to continue what you are doing, but cease talking.
Keep your right foot in place. You may talk and move about (adjust gear).
The purpose of fall out is to give further relief from the position of attention for extended periods of time. The command, “FALL OUT” is given while halted and at the position of attention. It is a one-count movement. At the command, “FALL OUT” leave your position in ranks, but remain nearby. When “FALL IN” is given, return to your position in ranks at the position of attention.
MCI Course 8013A
4-22
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Marching the Platoon
Common Platoon Movements
Once you have your platoon facing in the right direction, you should be ready to step off. The most common platoon movements on the march are · · · · · · ·
Mark Time
Resuming Forward March
Mark time Half step Change step Change direction on the march March to the flank March to the rear March to the oblique
The purpose of mark time is to stop the forward movement of the platoon while still maintaining a rhythmic cadence. The command, “MARK TIME, MARCH” may be given at the halt or while marching forward at quick time, half step, or double time as either foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, “MARCH,” all platoon members will ·
Take one more 30-inch step as if coming to a halt.
·
Bring your heels together then begin marking time without loss of cadence with the opposite foot.
·
Raise each foot so the ball of the foot is approximately 2 inches and the heel approximately 4 inches from the deck at a cadence of 120 steps per minute.
·
At the same time, swing your arms naturally as in marching.
The purpose of resuming march is to resume the forward march at a quick time cadence. The command, “FORWARD, MARCH” may be given as either foot strikes the deck. On the command, “MARCH,” take one more step in place, then step off with a 30-inch step. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-23
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Marching the Platoon, Continued
Half Step
The purpose of a half step is to slow the forward movement of the platoon while still maintaining a rhythmic cadence by reducing the size of the step to 15 inches. The command, “HALF STEP, MARCH” may be given at the halt or while marching forward at quick time as either foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, “MARCH,” all platoon members will · · · ·
Resuming Forward March
Take one more 30-inch step. Begin taking 15-inch steps at quick time cadence. The balls of your feet should strike the deck before your heels At the same time, maintain a natural arm swing.
The purpose of resuming forward march is to resume the forward march at a quick time cadence. The command, “FORWARD, MARCH” may be given as either foot strikes the deck. On the command, “MARCH,” take one more 15-inch step, then step off with a 30-inch step. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-24
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Marching the Platoon, Continued
Change Step
The purpose of change step is to change the step of cadence while on the march. The command, “CHANGE STEP, MARCH” may be given while marching at quick time or double time, marking time, or double time in place as the right foot strikes the deck.
Change Step Procedures
The procedures that all platoon members take on the command of execution, “MARCH” are listed in the table below: From Quick Time or Double Time
·
Action Take one more step, 30-inch or 36-inch as appropriate.
·
Marking Time Double Time in Place
As your right foot comes forward to the next step, place the toe near the left heel and step out again with the left foot. This changes the cadence count, but not the rhythm. Lift and lower the left foot twice in succession. Hop twice on the left foot and continue to double time in place. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-25
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Marching the Platoon, Continued
Change Direction
The procedures to change the direction of a column while marching are listed in the table below: Who Platoon Commander
·
Action Commands, “COLUMN RIGHT (left, half right, half left), MARCH.
·
Pivot Marine
Gives the preparatory command and the command of execution so that they end on the foot in the direction of the turn. On the command of execution, “MARCH” ·
Faces to the right (left) as in marching and steps out one full step with his right (left) foot in the direction of the turn
·
Half steps
· Other Marines of the Leading Rank
Resumes the full step when the other Marines of his rank are abreast On the command of execution, “MARCH” ·
Twice oblique to the right (left) without changing interval ·
Execute the first oblique at the command of execution.
·
Execute the second oblique when opposite their new line of march. When the oblique is completed, they will be marching the new front with proper interval.
·
Ranks in the Rear of the Leading Rank
Come abreast of the pivot Marine and conform to his or her step. On the command of execution, “MARCH,” execute the movement on the same ground and in the same way as the leading rank.
Note: The base element during the turn is the squad on the flank in the direction of the turn. The pivot Marine is the first Marine in the base squad, excluding the PC and the guide. Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
4-26
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Marching the Platoon, Continued
Platoon Commander and Guide
During column movements, the PC and guide
March to the Flank
The purpose of march to the flank is to march a platoon to either flank. The command is “BY THE RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK, MARCH.” This movement may be executed while marching forward at quick time. The command of execution will come as the foot in the direction of travel strikes the deck. Do not give this command when a platoon is halted. On the command of execution, “MARCH,” all platoon members
· · ·
· · ·
Execute smartly oblique in the direction of the turn. Half step. Resume full step in a manner that places them in their proper positions.
Take one more step. Pivot 90 degrees to the right (left) as in marching. Step out with their right (left) foot in the new direction.
When this movement is executed from a column at close interval, the squad to the rear of the squad that becomes the leading squad after making the turn takes up the half step after turning until a 40-inch distance is obtained between the squads. After such a movement, the platoon maintains normal interval until ordered otherwise. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-27
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Marching the Platoon, Continued
March to the Rear
The purpose of march to the rear is to march a platoon to the opposite direction of travel. The command, “TO THE REAR, MARCH” is given so the command of execution will come as the right foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, “MARCH,” all platoon members · · ·
Take one more step with the left foot in the direction of march. Pivot 180 degrees on both feet. Step off with the left foot in the new direction of march.
Note: Use this movement to march to the rear for a short distance. Do not give the platoon column movements while marching to the rear. March in the Oblique
To march a platoon in the oblique, the PC gives the command, “RIGHT (LEFT) OBLIQUE, MARCH.” On the command of execution, “MARCH,” all platoon members · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Take one more step forward. Pivot 45 degrees to the right (left). Step off in the oblique with their right (left) foot.
4-28
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Commands Given in the Oblique
Only Commands
The only commands you can give while marching in the oblique are · · · · ·
“FORWARD, MARCH”
Give the command, “FORWARD, MARCH” to resume the original direction of march. Give the command of execution, “MARCH” as the foot toward the original direction of march strikes the deck. On the command of execution, “MARCH,” all members of the platoon will · ·
“PLATOON, HALT”
“FORWARD, MARCH.” “PLATOON, HALT.” “IN PLACE, HALT.” “MARK TIME, MARCH.” “RESUME, MARCH.”
Pivot 45 degrees to their left (right) on their right (left) foot. Step off with their left (right foot in the original direction of march.
Give this command, “PLATOON, HALT” to halt the platoon in the original direction of march. Give the command of execution, “HALT” as the left (right) foot strikes the deck when halting from the right (left) oblique. On the command of execution, “HALT,” all members of the platoon will · · ·
Take one more step in the oblique direction. Pivot to the original direction of march on their right (left) foot. Assume the position of attention by placing their left (right) foot against their right (left) foot. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-29
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Commands Given in the Oblique, Continued
“IN PLACE, HALT”
Give the command, “IN PLACE, HALT” to temporarily halt the platoon in the oblique to correct errors. The command of execution, “HALT” is given as either foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution “HALT,” all members of the platoon will · ·
Take one more step in the oblique. Assume the position of attention by placing the right (left) foot against the left (right) foot.
“MARK TIME, The command, “MARK TIME, MARCH” is executed the same as while on MARCH” the march. To resume marching in the oblique after marking time, give the
command “RESUME, MARCH.” “RESUME, MARCH”
The only command you can give after halting in place is “RESUME, MARCH.” On the command of execution, “MARCH,” all members of the platoon will · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Step off with the left foot. Continue to march in the oblique direction.
4-30
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Pass in Review
Purpose
Pass in review is conducted to give honors to a reviewing officer. March the platoon past the reviewing officer and render the appropriate salute as you pass. Conduct a pass in review with the platoon in column at either close or normal interval with weapons at right shoulder arms.
Procedure
The steps to pass the platoon in review are listed in the table below: Step 1 2
Action The PC marches the platoon to a position where they will pass in front of the reviewing stand. · The PC gives the command, “EYES, RIGHT.” ·
3
4
The command of execution, “RIGHT” is given as the right foot strikes the deck about six paces before coming on line with the reviewing stand. On the command of execution, “RIGHT” ·
The base squad maintains the position of attention.
·
All other members of the platoon snap their head 45 degrees to the right as they march. When the end of the platoon is about six paces past the reviewing stand, the PC gives the command, “READY, FRONT.”
·
·
5
MCI Course 8013A
The command of execution, “FRONT” is given as the left foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, “FRONT,” the members of the platoon with their head to the right snap their head back to the original front and continue to march.
4-31
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Dismiss the Platoon
Armed Platoon
Dismiss a platoon from line formation with the Marines at attention. To dismiss a platoon when the troops are armed, give the following commands: · · ·
Unarmed Platoon
MCI Course 8013A
“INSPECTION, ARMS.” “PORT, ARMS.” “DISMISSED.”
To dismiss a platoon of unarmed troops, give the command, “DISMISSED.” The platoon sergeant usually dismisses the platoon.
4-32
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete exercise items 1 through 5 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
How many steps per minute is quick time cadence? a. b. c. d.
Item 2
What is the correct order to form a platoon of armed Marines? a. b. c. d.
Item 3
60 100 120 180
Fall in, order arms, report, port arms, and give the report. Fall in, report, inspection arms, port arms, and order arms. Fall in, inspection arms, report, port arms, and order arms. Fall in, port arms, order arms, report, and inspection arms.
In which cadence (steps per minute) are all facing movements executed when in a halted position? a. b. c. d.
60 100 120 180 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-33
Study Unit 4 Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 4
What is the only command that may be given after halting in place in the oblique? a. b. c. d.
Item 5
“FORWARD” “TO THE REAR” “MARK TIME” “RESUME MARCH”
What is the correct command to dismiss a platoon of unarmed Marines? a. b. c. d.
“INSPECTION ARMS, PORT ARMS, AND DISMISSED.” “PORT ARMS, DISMISSED.” “DISMISSED.” “FALL OUT.” Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-34
Study Unit 4 Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5
MCI Course 8013A
Answer c b c d c
4-35
Reference 4-8 4-11 4-17 4-30 4-32
Study Unit 4 Lesson 1 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
4-36
Study Unit 4 Lesson 1 Exercise
LESSON 2 SWORD MANUAL Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope
This lesson includes the commands and movements of platoon drill using the sword.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to ·
Identify the scabbard nomenclature.
·
Identify the sword nomenclature.
·
Describe how to properly size the sword.
·
Describe how to properly wear the sword.
·
Describe how to properly carry the sword.
·
Identify common rules for sword manual. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-39
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Introduction, Continued
Learning Objectives, continued
In This Lesson
·
Identify the procedures to draw sword.
·
Identify the procedures to order sword.
·
Identify the procedures to carry sword.
·
Identify the procedures to present sword.
·
Identify the procedures to execute eyes right with the sword.
·
Identify the procedures to return sword.
·
Identify the procedures to parade rest with the sword.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction General Information Common Rules Draw Sword Order Sword Carry Sword Present Sword Eyes Right (Left) Return Sword Parade Rest Lesson 2 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
4-40
See Page 4-39 4-41 4-43 4-45 4-46 4-47 4-48 4-50 4-51 4-52 4-53
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
General Information
Marine NCO Honor
Of all the active duty services in our country, the only NCOs authorized to carry a sword are Marine NCOs. In recognition of their leadership and contributions, Marine NCOs have been entrusted with this proud symbol of authority and leadership. With this trust comes the responsibility of properly executing the Marine NCO sword manual.
History
The Marine NCO sword is almost identical to the Army officer’s sword of 1850. In the mid-1800’s, Marine officers used this sword. When the Mameluke hilt sword was reintroduced for Marine officers in 1875, the Army officer’s sword of 1850 was prescribed for Marine NCOs.
Scabbard Nomenclature
The scabbard nomenclature is identified in the diagram below:
Sword Nomenclature
The sword nomenclature is identified in the diagram below:
Sizing the Sword
The sword comes in various lengths in increments of 2 inches (28, 30, 32, etc. inches). Determine the proper size of the sword while at the position of carry sword. The tip of the blade should be on line with the center of the opening of your ear. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-41
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
General Information, Continued
Wearing the Sword
MCI Course 8013A
Wear the sword on the left side of the body with the knuckle bow to the front. The frog will ensure the scabbard and sword remain in place.
4-42
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Common Rules
Draw and Return Sword
Draw your sword whenever you are with armed troops or in command of a unit. Draw and return sword is done without command. Unless you are members of the commander’s staff, all other movements of the sword manual are executed at the commander’s command to the unit. The commander and his staff execute all other movements of the sword manual at the commander’s separate command to his staff, given either before or after his command to the unit.
Carry Sword
Assume carry sword when · · · · ·
Giving commands Changing position in formation at quick time Addressing of being addressed by a senior Receiving the preparatory command for and while marching at quick time Any manual of arms movement has been ordered, except · Parade rest · At ease · Rest · Present arms · Order arms · Eyes right (left)
When in formations with personnel to your front at normal distance (organizational staff included), remain at carry sword except during rest or at ease. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-43
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Common Rules, Continued
Present Sword
Assume present sword when · · · · ·
Saluting with the sword The unit is presented to colors The National Anthem, To the Colors, Retreat, or Hail to the Chief is being played Executing eyes right (left) Marching past a reviewing officer
Note: Remain at the carry in the interior of a formation. Marching With the Sword
When marching with the sword at the carry, swing your arms naturally. Do not hold the scabbard with your left hand. When you march at double time, hold the sword diagonally across your chest with the sharp edge towards the front. Hold the scabbard with your left hand just below the frog.
Reading Documents
When you call roll, read documents, or publish orders to a formation · · · ·
Out of Formation
MCI Course 8013A
Slip the fingers of your left hand between the sword grip and the guard. Allow the sword to hang across your knuckles with the grip to the front. Keep your left elbow against your side. Hold the document with both hands.
When not in formation, keep your sword in your scabbard. Salute by executing a hand salute.
4-44
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Draw Sword
Three-Count Movement
When at attention with the sword in the scabbard, draw your sword when you hear the command, “DRAW SWORD.” Draw sword is a three-count movement. Draw sword only when halted and at attention.
Procedures
The procedures for each count of draw sword is listed in the table below: Count 1
Action On the preparatory command, “DRAW” ·
Grip the scabbard just below the frog with your left hand. Tilt the scabbard forward to form an angle of 45 degrees with the deck.
·
2
Take the grip in your right hand and raise it about 10 inches from the scabbard. Your right forearm is parallel to the deck with your left hand holding the scabbard against your side. On the command of execution, “SWORD” ·
3
Draw the sword smartly from the scabbard, raising your right arm to its full extent and directly to the front at an angle of 45 degrees. Your arm and the sword, with the true edge down, form a straight line.
· At the same time, drop your left hand to your side. Then ·
Bring the back of the blade against the shoulder seam of your coat or shirt with the blade vertical and the knuckle bow to the front. When you make this movement, your right arm remains straight and the sword is rotated into position by manipulating your wrist and fingers.
·
Your arm is vertical and nearly extended, but may contain a slight bend at the elbow to hold the sword in position.
·
Your thumb and first two fingers embrace the lower part of the grip with the thumb against the trouser seam.
·
Your remaining fingers are joined behind the end of the hilt.
This is the position of carry sword.
MCI Course 8013A
4-45
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Order Sword
Position
In the order sword position · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
The sword slants down to the front with the point 3 inches from the deck. The true edge of the blade is turned down. Your right arm hangs naturally to the side with the thumb along the trouser seam.
4-46
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Carry Sword
Carry Sword to Order Sword
To move from carry sword to order sword position, rotate the sword down into position using your wrist and fingers.
Order Sword to Carry Sword
To move from order sword to carry sword position · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Pivot the sword about the fulcrum the thumb and index finger forms. Push your palm down on the pommel. Snap your wrist to start the movement of the blade. Lock the sword into position when the blade reaches your shoulder seam.
4-47
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Present Sword
Two-Count Movement
To present the sword from carry or order sword, the command is “PRESENT, SWORD” or “PRESENT, ARMS.” Give these commands only when halted at order or carry sword. Present sword is a two-count movement.
Procedures
The procedures for each count of present sword are listed in the table below: Count 1
Action On the preparatory command, “PRESENT” ·
While rotating the sword so the knuckle bow faces your left, raise your right hand to the level of and 6 inches in front of your neck.
·
As your hand is raised from the seam of the trousers, keep it close to the body, moving it in a straight line.
·
When your hand is in the upper position, your arm is bent at the elbow with your elbow against your body.
·
Keep your thumb on the left side of the grip and keep your wrist straight.
·
2
The blade is inclined forward and up at an angle of 30 degrees from the vertical and the true edge is to the left. On the command of execution, “SWORD (ARMS)” ·
Move the point down smartly to a position of 3 inches above the deck and slightly right of your right foot.
·
Move your arm in a straight line on the downward movement so that it ends up hanging vertically with the knuckle bow of the sword against your trouser seam.
·
Your thumb remains on the left side of the grip, pointing toward the center of the guard.
·
The blade is inclined down and forward with the true edge to the left.
You are now at the position of present sword. Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
4-48
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Present Sword, Continued
Order Sword from Present Sword
To move to order sword from present sword, the command is “ORDER SWORD (ARMS).” Order sword is a one-count movement. On the command of execution, “SWORD (ARMS),” turn the true edge down by rotating the sword with your fingers to the position prescribed for order sword.
MCI Course 8013A
4-49
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Eyes Right (Left)
Two-Count Movement
Execute eyes right (left) only when halted at order sword or marching at carry sword. Eyes right (left) is a two-count movement. The command is “EYES, RIGHT (LEFT).” When marching, give both commands on the right (left) foot.
Procedures
The procedures for each count of eyes right (left) are listed in the table below: Count 1 2
Returning to the Front
Action On the preparatory command, “EYES,” execute the first count of present sword. On the command of execution, “RIGHT (LEFT)” ·
Execute the second count of present sword.
·
At the same time turn your head 45 degrees to the right (left).
The procedures to return to the front are listed in the table below: While Halted
· ·
Marching
MCI Course 8013A
·
Action Follow the reviewing officer with your head and eyes until he is in front of you. When the reviewing officer has passed by, execute order sword by turning the true edge down. Give the command, “READY, FRONT” when you are six paces passed the reviewing officer.
·
On the preparatory command, “READY,” turn the true edge down.
·
On the command of execution, “FRONT,” smartly turn your head and eyes to the front and execute carry sword from the order.
4-50
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Return Sword
Three-Count Movement
To return the sword to the scabbard, the command is “RETURN, SWORD.” Return sword is a three-count movement and is executed from order or carry sword.
Procedures
The procedures for each count of return sword are listed in the table below: Count 1
Action On the preparatory command, “RETURN” ·
Execute the first count of present sword.
·
2
3
MCI Course 8013A
At the same time, grasp the scabbard with your left hand just below the frog and tilt it forward at an angle of 30 degrees. Then ·
Look down at the opening of the scabbard.
·
Turn the sword down and guide the point into the opening until the hilt is 10 inches above the throat of the scabbard.
·
Your right forearm is parallel to the deck with your left hand holding the scabbard against your body.
· Raise your head back up to the position of attention On the command of execution, “SWORD” ·
Push smartly down on the sword so it slides all the way into the scabbard and release it.
·
In the same motion, bring your right hand back to your right side, release the scabbard with your left hand, and assume the position of attention.
4-51
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Parade Rest
Command
Execute parade rest from order sword. The command is “PARADE, REST.” If you are at carry sword when the command is given, come to order sword on the preparatory command “PARADE.”
Command of Execution
On the command of execution, “REST” · ·
Order Sword from Parade Rest
The command to return to the position of order sword from parade rest is “ATTENTION.” On this command, simultaneously · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Move the left foot and arm the same as when armed with a rifle. At the same time, lower the point of the sword to the deck.
Raise the point of the sword 3 inches off the deck. Move your left arm and foot back to the position of attention.
4-52
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete exercise items 1 through 11 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Items 1 Through 4
Identify the nomenclature for the sword as indicated in the diagram below:
(1) ___________________________________________________________ (2) ___________________________________________________________ (3) ___________________________________________________________ (4) ___________________________________________________________
Item 5
What position determines the proper size for the NCO sword? a. b. c. d.
Parade rest Order sword Present sword Carry sword Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-53
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 6
Draw sword is a ____________ movement. a. b. c. d.
Item 7
After the third count of draw sword, what position are you in? a. b. c. d.
Item 8
Down Up Inboard Outboard
Present sword or present arms may only be given from what positions? a. b. c. d.
Item 10
Carry sword Order sword Raised sword Present sword
In the order sword position, which direction is the true edge of the sword turned in? a. b. c. d.
Item 9
one-count two-count three-count four-count
Carry and parade rest Carry and order Order and eyes right Order and parade rest
On the first count of return sword, raise the sword up as in the first count of present sword and a. b. c. d.
look down at the opening of the scabbard. raise your head back to the position of attention. grasp the scabbard and tilt it forward. parallel your right forearm to the deck. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-54
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 11
Where is the sword tip during parade rest? a. b. c. d.
Resting on the deck 2 inches above the deck 3 inches above the deck 4 inches above the deck Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-55
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MCI Course 8013A
Answer Hilt Ricasso True edge Fuller d c a a b c a
4-56
Reference 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-45 4-45 4-46 4-48 4-51 4-52
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise
LESSON 3 FLAGS AND GUIDONS Introduction
Estimated Study Time
40 minutes
Lesson Scope
This lesson mainly deals with a guidon—usually rectangular, of distinctive color and design, and used as a symbol, a standard, a signal, or an emblem. This lesson will cover the common definitions, history, and etiquette of the flags used in the United States Marine Corps.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to ·
Identify the flag types used in the Marine Corps.
·
Identify common flag terminology.
·
Describe the history of the national ensign.
·
Identify how to properly display the colors.
·
Identify proper protocols for the national ensign.
·
Describe organizational flag history.
·
Describe the Marine Corps organizational flags.
·
Identify Marine Corps standard protocols.
·
Identify the three classes of organizational standards.
·
Identify proper usage for guidons.
·
Identify select movements with the guidon. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-57
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Introduction, Continued In This Lesson
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Flag Terminology National Ensign History National Ensign Sizes Displaying the National Ensign National Ensign Protocols Organizational Flag History Standard Protocols Types of Organizational Standards Guidon Protocols Guidon Movements Lesson 3 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
4-58
See Page 4-57 4-59 4-60 4-61 4-62 4-63 4-66 4-68 4-70 4-71 4-73 4-78
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Flag Terminology
Two Basic Types
The two flags commonly used by the Marine Corps today are known by many different names. However, they still represent either the · ·
Definitions
Nation (national flag) Organization (organizational flag)
The different flag related terms are defined in the table below: Term Battle Standard (Battle Color) Cased Colors
Ensign
Guidon Mast Pennant Staff Standards Streamer
Definition The distinguishing organizational flag authorized for and bearing the title of a designated unit of the Fleet Marine Force. Colors covered with a canvas or leather type shell. Flags are colors when ·
Mounted on a staff (pike) and carried by an individual on foot
· ·
Displayed or cased in a fixed location The national flag flown on a naval vessel or aboard a Navy or Marine Corps installation ashore.
· Also called national ensign. A small flag or pennant that a military unit carries as a standard. A vertical pole used to hoist the national ensign. A flag or emblem similar in shape to a ship's pennant. · A pole on which a flag is displayed · A flagstaff Flags mounted on a vehicle · A long narrow flag, banner, or pennant ·
MCI Course 8013A
Commonly used to decorate organizational standards with unit awards
4-59
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
National Ensign History
Nicknames
The national flag is a representation of our country. Our flag is a symbol around which we all unite. Old Glory and Stars and Stripes are just a couple of nicknames used to reference our national flag.
Initial Adoption The Continental Congress adopted the American flag, according to tradition
made by Betsy Ross, on 14 June 1777. Representing the 13 original colonies, the flag was adorned with a circle of 13 white stars on a blue background (known as the union) and 13 red and white stripes. Inspiration for National Anthem
As the American frontier expanded, two new states were added to the Union and were incorporated into the flag. Two stars and two stripes were added to the design—making a total of 15 each. This flag withstood enemy bombardment at Fort McHenry, Maryland from 13 to 14 September 1814, which inspired Francis Scott Key to write the Star Spangled Banner.
Law About Stars and Stripes
Captain Samuel C. Reid, U.S. Navy, suggested to Congress that the stripes remain 13 in number to represent the 13 original colonies and that a star be added to the blue field for each new state coming into the Union. The resulting law of 4 April 1818 requires that a star be added for each new state on the 4th of July after its admission. Today’s American flag remains virtually unchanged with the exception of the number of stars in the union. Now 50 states are represented in the union.
MCI Course 8013A
4-60
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
National Ensign Sizes
Dimension Measurements
The flag’s dimensions are measured on the · ·
Storm
The national ensign comes in three sizes. The smallest size measures 5 feet by 9½ feet. This flag is · ·
Post
Flown under normal conditions Flown daily between the hours of 0800 and sunset
The garrison flag is the largest, measuring 20 feet by 38 feet. The garrison flag is · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Flown during inclement weather conditions Called the storm flag
The post flag measures 10 feet by 19 feet. The post flag is · ·
Garrison
Hoist—the length that rides along the mast. Fly—the length that blows in the wind.
Flown on Sundays and holidays Not flown from a mast of less than 65 feet
4-61
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Displaying the National Ensign
Always Right
The national flag represents the living country and is considered a living thing. The union is the honor point. The right arm is the sword arm and therefore the point of danger. Hence, the right is the place of honor. The edge of the flag that is toward the staff is the heraldic dexter or right edge. The union of the flag and the flag itself, when in company with other flags, is always given the honor point. That means the national flag is always given the marching right, the flag's own right, or an observer's left.
Customary Display
The universal custom is to display the flag from sunrise to sunset. However, when a patriotic effect is desired for special occasions, the flag may be displayed 24 hours a day if properly illuminated during the hours of darkness.
Hoisting and Lowering
Colors, also known as the ceremonial hoisting and lowering of the national ensign, is performed daily. Hoisting the colors (morning colors) is performed at 0800. Lowering the colors (evening colors) occurs at sunset.
Half Mast
Colors will be flown from the peak or truck of the mast, except when directed to be flown at half-mast. Colors at half-mast means it is flown at the middle point of the mast. The middle point of a ·
Guyed mast is midway between the truck of the mast and the point of attachment of the guys.
·
Mast with a yardarm is midway between the truck of the mast and the yardarm.
Technically, an ensign flown at any position other than the truck of the mast is considered to be half-masted.
MCI Course 8013A
4-62
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
National Ensign Protocols
Executive Order
Never permit any form of disrespect to the national flag. Obey the cautions set forth in the Executive order by President Taft, dated 29 October 1912:
Cautions To Be Obeyed
As set forth in the Executive order, do not ·
Dip the national flag to any person or thing. The organizational colors, state flag, or institutional flag will render this honor.
·
Display the national flag with the union down, except as a distress signal.
·
Place any other flag or pennant above, on the same level, or to the right of the national flag.
·
Let the national flag touch the ground or the floor or trail in the water.
·
Place any object or emblem of any kind on or above the national flag.
·
Use the national flag as drapery in any form.
·
Fasten the national flag in any manner that will permit it to be easily torn.
·
Drape the national flag over the hood, top, sides, or back of a vehicle, train, or boat. Fix the national flag firmly to the vehicle.
·
Display the national flag on a float in a parade except from a staff.
·
Use the national flag as a covering for a ceiling.
·
Carry the national flag flat or horizontally, but always aloft and free.
·
Put lettering on the national flag.
·
Use the national flag in any form of advertising or fasten advertising signs to a pole from which you fly the national flag.
·
Display, use, or store the national flag so that it can be easily soiled or damaged.
Note: During divine services on board a ship out to sea, the church pennant is flown above the national ensign. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-63
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
National Ensign Protocols, Continued
Folding
The procedures for folding the national ensign are identified in the table below. Step 1
Action Fold the flag in half lengthwise, so the crease parallels the red and white stripes.
2
Fold the flag in half again, so the new crease also parallels the red and white stripes and the union is to the outside.
3
Fold the fly end (the end away from the union) of the flag to the top, so the single edge lies perpendicularly across the stripes.
4
Continue to fold the triangle formed in step 3 until you have folded the entire flag into a triangle.
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-64
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
National Ensign Protocols, Continued
Funerals
On the Casket
The national flag is used to cover the casket at the military funeral of any ·
Member of the military forces in active service
·
Member of the Marine Corps Reserve
·
Persons on the retired list of the Marine Corps and the Marine Corps Reserve
·
Members of recognized military organizations
·
Former members of the military service who have been discharged therefrom under honorable conditions
Place the national flag on the casket the reverse of that prescribed for displaying it vertically against a wall. The flag shall be placed · ·
Lengthwise on the casket Union at the head and over the left shoulder of the deceased
However, the flag will not be · · · Present the Flag
MCI Course 8013A
Lowered into the grave Allowed to touch the ground Committed to the deep for a burial at sea
The interment flag is furnished at government expense for the nearest kin at the conclusion of the interment. When presented, the flag is ·
Folded in the prescribed manner
·
Presented to the next of kin in a dignified manner with a short statement such as, "This flag is offered by a grateful nation in memory of the faithful service performed by your (relationship)."
4-65
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Organizational Flag History
Precursors to the Standard
Very little information is available regarding the flags carried by early American Marines, although indications are the Grand Union flag was carried ashore by the battalion led by Captain Samuel Nicholas on New Providence Island, 3 March 1776. It is quite possible the Rattlesnake flag was also carried on this expedition. During the 1830s and 1840s, the standard consisted of a white field with gold fringe and bore an elaborate design of an anchor and eagle in the center. Before the Mexican War, this flag bore the legend, To the Shores of Tripoli across the top. Later it was revised to read, From Tripoli to the Halls of the Montezumas.
Standards of Early Battles
During the Mexican and Civil Wars, Marines in the field carried a flag similar to the national flag, comprised of red and white stripes and a union. The union, however, contained an eagle perched on a shield of the United States and a half-wreath beneath the shield, with 29 stars encircling the entire design. Beginning in 1876, Marines carried the national colors (the Stars and Stripes) with U.S. Marine Corps embroidered in yellow on the middle red stripe. At the time of the Vera Cruz landing in 1914, Marines carried a more distinctive standard. The design consisted of a blue field with a laurel wreath encircling the Marine Corps emblem in the center. A scarlet ribbon above the emblem carried the words U.S. Marine Corps while another scarlet ribbon below the emblem carried the motto Semper Fidelis.
Orders
Orders were issued on 2 April 1921, which directed all national colors be manufactured without the · ·
Yellow fringe Words U.S. Marine Corps embroidered on the red stripe
An order dated 14 March 1922 retired all national colors still in use with yellow fringe or wording on the flag. Following World War I, the Army practice of attaching silver bands carrying inscriptions enumerating specific decorations and battles was adopted. This practice was discontinued on 23 January 1961. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-66
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Organizational Flag History, Continued
Modern Standard
MCI Course 8013A
Marine Corps Order No. 4 of 18 April 1925 designated gold and scarlet as the official colors of the U.S. Marine Corps. These colors, however, were not reflected in the official Marine Corps standard until 18 January 1939 when a new design incorporating the new colors was approved. The design was essentially that of today's Marine Corps standard.
4-67
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Standard Protocols
General Description
The Marine Corps organizational flag shall be · ·
Marine Corps Insignia
On the outer side of each ply will be appliqued machine embroidered components of the Marine Corps insignia, consisting of ·
· · Fringe
Spread eagle with a flowing · Motto ribbon containing the words Semper Fidelis in the eagle’s beak · Scroll, 3½ inches tall, underneath the eagle that contains 2½-inch lettering citing the name of the organization, United States Marine Corps or United States Marine Corps Reserve. Globe Fouled anchor
The fringe shall be · · · ·
Cord
Nylon, 52 inches on the hoist by 66 inches on the fly, excluding the headings and fringe Made of either one or two plies of lightweight nylon scarlet cloth
Hand knotted 2½ inches wide Golden-yellow color Trimmed on three sides of the standard
Except when streamers are authorized, each standard shall have attached below the spearhead of the staff a cord of scarlet and yellow threads approximately · ·
3/8 inch in diameter 8 feet and 6 inches in length with a tassel at each end Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-68
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Standard Protocols, Continued
Authority
Marine Corps colors or standards will be carried by the organization to which issue is authorized on the same occasions as the national colors. Except when specifically authorized by the Commandant of the Marine Corps, Marine Corps colors or standards will not be issued to temporary or provisional units or organizations.
Colors
MCI Course 8013A
Gold and scarlet are the official colors of the Marine Corps. All guidons, banners, athletic ribbons, pennants, and other articles ordinarily designed to represent the Marine Corps will use these colors. The gold will conform as nearly as possible to that in the dress chevrons for enlisted personnel.
4-69
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Types of Organizational Standards
Three Classes
A joint service specification designates Marine Corps flags as Type III flags. The three classes of organizational standards are identified as · · ·
Type III Class 1
Class 1 Class 2 Class 3
Type III Class 1 standards are the command battle and organizational standards authorized for · · ·
Designated units of the Fleet Marine Force Major non-Fleet Marine Force commands The Marine Corps Junior Reserve Officer Training Corps (USMCJROTC)
These distinguishing flags require the organization embroidered on the scroll. The command designation on the scroll is spelled out unless the unit designation is too long for the 36 spaces contained on the scroll. Then, standard Marine Corps abbreviations, with numbers and letters will be used. The letters, FMF will be included last on the scroll for all Fleet Marine Force battle standards. Type III Class 2
Type III Class 2 organizational standards are authorized for ·
Active non-Fleet Marine Force activities are not authorized the Type III Class 1 standard · The words, United States Marine Corps are on the scroll. Type III Class 3
Type III Class 3 organizational standards are authorized for · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
General officers of the Marine Corps Reserve in an active status Reserve units that are not authorized the battle standard The words, United States Marine Corps Reserve are on the scroll.
4-70
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Guidon Protocols
Definition
An organization guidon is a company, battery, squadron, or designated detachment marker bearing the Marine Corps emblem and the abbreviated designation of the unit to which authorized.
Guidons Description
The guidon shall be made of red wool bunting upon which insignia, letters, and numbers, as required, of gold wool bunting shall be sewn on each side. This guidon shall measuring 1.83 feet on the hoist and 2.33 feet on the fly. Guidons will always have regimental letters and numbers and will be consistent in size: · · · ·
Marine Corps Emblem
A Marine Corps emblem (eagle, globe, and anchor) is placed in the center of each side of the guidon. The emblem shall measure approximately · · ·
Display and Carrying
One number or letter 6 inches Two to three letters or numbers 4½ inches Four or more letters or numbers 1¾ inches Numerals preceding letters will be 4½ inches
8½ inches from tip to tip of the eagle's wings Globe 5½ inches in diameter Anchor 11 inches overall
In garrison, the guidon may be displayed at company headquarters between morning and evening colors, except during inclement weather and when carried in formation. The guidon is carried at ceremonies and any other time the commander prescribes. The guidon bearer is considered under arms and will not carry a weapon. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-71
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Guidon Protocols, Continued
Types
There are three types of organization guidons. The requirement for each organizational guidon is listed in the table below: Type I
MCI Course 8013A
Unit Fleet Marine Force
II
Non-Fleet Marine Force
III
Reserve
4-72
Lettering The letters, FMF shall be centered above the Marine Corps emblem on an arc. The letters, USMC shall be placed centrally above the Marine Corps emblem on an arc. Same as for Types I and II, except the letters, USMCR shall be centered above the emblem.
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Guidon Movements
Seven Positions
There are seven positions of the guidon: · · · · · · ·
Order Guidon
Order guidon Carry guidon Present guidon Ready guidon Guidon salute Parade rest with the guidon Fall out with the guidon
At the order, the · · · · · · ·
Ferrule rests on the deck touching the right shoe to the right of the toe. Staff is held in the “V” formed by the thumb and fingers. Thumb and fingers should be straight with fingers touching. Right arm is kept behind the staff and slightly bent. Upper staff rests in the hollow of the right shoulder. Staff points straight up with the flat side of the spearhead facing front. Guidon bearer is at the position of attention with the exception of the right hand. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-73
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Guidon Movements, Continued
Carry Guidon
Carry guidon, the normal position of the guidon while marching, is the same position as order guidon except the ferrule is 6 inches above the deck. The steps to carry guidon are listed in the table below: Step 1 2 3
4
Action Executed on a preparatory command, such as “FORWARD,” which requires moving to a new position. Place the left hand on the staff 2 inches above the right hand. · Loosen the grip of the right hand. · Pull the staff up with the left hand until the ferrule is 6 inches above the deck. · Hold the staff straight with the right hand. Move the left hand smartly back to the side.
To return to the order guidon position, on “ARMS,” allow the staff to slip through the right hand until the ferrule touches the deck. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-74
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Guidon Movements, Continued Present Guidon
Present guidon can be reached from three different positions. The commands to present and return are listed in the table below: From Position Order guidon at the halt Carry guidon on the march At officers center
Command “PRESENT, ARMS” and “ORDER, ARMS.” “EYES, RIGHT” and “READY, FRONT.” Note: Eyes right is executed in the same manner except the head turns to the right as the staff is lowered. Executed at a halt, from carry, without command.
Present guidon is executed in one count. On the command, “ARMS” ·
Lower the guidon straight to the front until the staff is horizontal and rests in the pit of the right arm.
·
Turn the staff to the right so the sharp edge of the spearhead faces down.
·
Hold your right elbow firmly against the body.
The commands to return to order or carry are listed in the table below: Command Preparatory “ORDER or READY” Execution “ARMS or FRONT”
Action Smartly and audibly grasp the staff with the left hand with the palm up at a point forward of the right hand. With the left hand, carry the guidon up and back to the position of carry guidon. At the same time, return to ·
·
Order ·
Let the staff slide straight downward through the right hand until the ferrule rests on the deck, the left hand will steady the staff as it slides downward.
·
Once the staff is returned to the deck, cut the left hand smartly back to its normal position at the left side.
Carry ·
Return your head and eyes to the front
·
Once the staff is back into the shoulder, cut the left hand smartly away. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-75
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Guidon Movements, Continued
Ready Guidon
Ready guidon is used as a signal for aiding troops in the execution of commands where hearing verbal commands is difficult. The guidon is brought to ready guidon on the preparatory command and is smartly lowered to order or carry on the command of execution. Ready guidon may be used as a signal for the execution of any command except present arms and eyes right (left), at which times the guidon also renders honors.
Guidon Salute
The purpose of guidon salute is to render honors as in hand salute. “GUIDON, SALUTE” is executed in two counts. Count 1
Action On the command of execution “SALUTE” ·
2
Move your left hand, palm down, smartly to a position approximately 18 inches above the right hand. · Keep the thumb and fingers straight and together. · Touch the staff with the first joint of your forefinger. · Turn your head and eyes toward the person being saluted. After your salute is returned, move your left hand smartly back to your side and look to the front. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-76
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Guidon Movements, Continued
Parade Rest
Fall Out
“PARADE, REST” is executed in one count and may be given only when halted at the position of attention. On the command, “REST” ·
Move your left foot smartly 12 inches to the left.
·
Place your left hand behind you, just below the belt.
·
Keep your fingers straight and touching with your palm flat and facing to the rear.
·
Straighten your right arm forward and grasp the staff so the guidon tilts forward at 30 degrees.
·
The ferrule and the spearhead remain in the same position as order guidon.
Fall out is only given from order guidon. On the command, “FALL OUT” · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Leave your position in ranks with the guidon. Remain near the formation area.
4-77
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Lesson 3 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
15 minutes
Directions
Complete exercise items 1 through 11 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
The two flags commonly used by the Marine Corps today are a. b. c. d.
Item 2
When mounted on a staff and carried by an individual on foot, the national and organizational flags are called a. b. c. d.
Item 3
colors and standards. guidons and pennants. class III and type 3s. national and organizational.
colors. standards. ensigns. ceremonial markers.
The Continental Congress adopted the American flag on a. b. c. d.
4 July 1776. 14 June 1777. 14 September 1814. 4 April 1818. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-78
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 4
When in the company of other flags, the national flag is always given point of honor. The point of honor is the a. b. c. d.
Item 5
The Executive order outlining cautions pertaining to the flag of the United States of America was drafted by President a. b. c. d.
Item 6
Truman. Washington. Eisenhower. Taft.
Marine Corps Order No. 4 of 18 April 1925 designated the official colors of the U.S. Marine Corps as a. b. c. d.
Item 7
marching right, the flag’s own left, or an observer’s right. high point, an observer’s right, or the marching right. marching right, the flag’s own right, or an observer’s left. observer’s right, the flag’s own right, or the marching right.
gold and scarlet. red and gold. red and yellow. scarlet and yellow.
The Marine Corps organizational flag shall measure ______ inches on the hoist by ______ inches on the fly. a. b. c. d.
50; 60 52; 66 54; 68 60; 74 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-79
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 8
The distinguishing organizational flags authorized for and bearing the title of a designated unit of the Fleet Marine Force are a. b. c. d.
Item 9
The three types of organizational standards are a. b. c. d.
Item 10
Type II Class 1, 2, and 3. Type II Class A, B, and C. Type III Class 1, 2, and 3. Type III Class A, B, and C.
A flag used to identify a company is called a a. b. c. d.
Item 11
guidons. streamers. battle standards. colors.
guidon. marker. pennant. streamer.
Parade rest with the guidon is a(n) ______-count movement. a. b. c. d.
one two three four Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-80
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MCI Course 8013A
Answer d a b c d a b c c a a
4-81
Reference 4-59 4-59 4-60 4-62 4-63 4-67 4-68 4-70 4-70 4-71 4-77
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
4-82
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise
STUDY UNIT 5 UNIFORMS AND INSPECTIONS Overview
Estimated Study Time
1 hour, 55 minutes
Unit Scope
Marines have long been known for their military appearance, smartness, and distinctive uniforms. What has maintained that reputation has been an unceasing emphasis on the correct wearing of the uniform, careful supervision (by noncommissioned officers especially), and the pride of individual Marines. It is up to you as a noncommissioned officer, 24 hours a day, on duty and off, to help uphold the Marine Corps reputation. Marine NCOs are often called on to inspect their troops. Before formations, the squad or section leader inspects the troops to make sure they present a professional military appearance. When preparing for formal inspections, NCOs are usually the first level inspectors for the unit. Therefore, you must know how to conduct an inspection and be familiar with uniform regulations.
Learning Objectives
Unit Content
After completing this study unit, you should be able to ·
Instruct Marines about basic information on uniforms.
·
Specify an estimated time line for your inspection.
·
Conduct an inspection.
This study unit contains the following lessons: Topic Lesson 1 Basic Information Lesson 2 Establish a Time Lesson 3 Conduct a Preliminary Inspection
MCI Course 8013A
5-1
See Page 5-3 5-13 5-21
Study Unit 5
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
5-2
Study Unit 5
LESSON 1 BASIC INFORMATION Introduction
Estimated Study Time
25 minutes
Lesson Scope
MCO P1020.34F Marine Corps Uniform Regulations is the bible on uniforms, insignia, and grooming. Uniform regulations list the articles of uniform that every enlisted Marine must maintain at all times. This lesson describes the two basic types of inspections that the regulation covers and the guidelines for conducting each type.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to
In This Lesson
·
Identify the uniform reference.
·
Identify the two types of inspections by purpose.
·
List the basic guidelines for clothing and equipment inspections.
·
Identify the sequence and items to inspect for personnel inspections.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Types of Inspections Clothing and Equipment Inspection Guidelines Personnel Inspection Guidelines Lesson 1 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
5-3
See Page 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-8
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1
Types of Inspections
Purpose
The purpose of an inspection is to determine the appearance and condition of a Marine or object, such as a piece of equipment or weapon. Marines are subjected to two types of inspections: · ·
Clothing and Equipment
Clothing and equipment Personnel
Clothing and equipment inspections are conducted to make sure each Marine has all the prescribed clothing and equipment, his or her own gear, and all gear is clean and serviceable. Additionally, the barracks are inspected to make sure they are clean and well maintained.
Personnel
A personnel inspection is the most efficient inspection where time is concerned. The purpose of a personnel inspection is to make sure your Marines · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Present a professional military appearance. Appear in good health. Communicate intelligently in military subjects.
5-4
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1
Clothing and Equipment Inspection Guidelines
Detail and Sequence
A clothing and equipment inspection takes much more time than personnel inspections. You must inspect in detail and in sequence for · · · ·
Proper display Serviceability Cleanliness Irish pennants
Bunks
When inspecting bunks, start in sequence at the head of the bunk and work down.
Wall Lockers
When inspecting a uniform display in a wall locker, inspect from left to right and top to bottom for · · · · ·
Treatment
MCI Course 8013A
Proper display Serviceability Cleanliness Proper name marking Fit (have the Marine try on one or two items)
When conducting clothing and equipment inspections, ·
Respect the display. Do not tear up the display. Replace each item as you inspect it. The Marine has worked long and hard on the display. Treat it with the same respect that you would want yours to be shown.
·
Behave professionally toward the person being inspected. Take notes of discrepancies and show them to the Marine. Be sure to praise the Marine, if praise is due.
5-5
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1
Personnel Inspection Guidelines
Sequence
When conducting a personnel inspection, inspect in sequence starting from the top of the cover and working down to the shoes.
Cover and Head Area
For covers, inspect for · · · · ·
Personal Hygiene
Inspect the overall personal hygiene and grooming standards of the Marine: · · · · · ·
Blouse and Coat Area
Serviceability Cleanliness Fit Condition of emblem (bent, shiny, etc.) Proper marking
Haircut Mustache Nose hair Shave Breath odor Fingernails (including nail polish and length)
Inspect the upper uniform appearance for the following items: · · · · · · · · · · ·
Tie or necktab Collar stays Lapel Ribbons Badges Buttons Fit of blouse or shirt Tie clasp Rank insignia Emblems Service stripes Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-6
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1
Personnel Inspection Guidelines, Continued
Trouser and Shoe Area
Inspect the lower uniform for the following items: · · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Belt and buckle Fit and length of trousers or skirt Brass and leather items (shiny with no marks or scratches) Serviceability and cleanliness of shoes or boots Proper press (double creases)
5-7
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete the exercise items 1 through 9 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
What is the governing regulation for conducting inspections? a. b. c. d.
Item 2
MCO P1020.34F MCO P1000.00 MCO 1500.01 MCO 3000.01
The purpose of an inspection is to a. make sure all your Marines are present. b. determine the appearance and condition of your Marines or object. c. determine if your Marines’ uniforms are serviceable and if their equipment works. d. punish your Marines for unsatisfactory performance or behavior.
Item 3
The purpose of a clothing and equipment inspection is to a. make sure each Marine has all the prescribed clothing and equipment, his or her own gear, and all gear is clean and serviceable. b. develop discipline and attention to detail in your Marines by having them spend many hours preparing uniforms and equipment. c. support requisitions for additional equipment by showing how much is missing or inoperable. d. establish teamwork and responsibility in the unit by having NCOs supervise Marines in their preparations. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-8
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 4
The purpose of a personnel inspection is to a. identify Marines who need extra supervision and those who are ready for additional responsibilities. b. make sure your Marines are present and meet personal appearance standards. c. make sure your Marines present a professional military appearance, appear in good health, and communicate intelligently in military subjects. d. establish standard procedures in a unit for formations, dress, and organization.
Items 5 Through 7
Matching: For items 5 through 7, match the letter of the guideline for clothing and equipment inspections in column 2 to the inspection statement in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used only once. Column 1
Column 2
Inspection Statement
Inspection Guideline
___ 5.
a. b. c. d.
___ 6. ___ 7.
Inspect from left to right for serviceability, marking, proper fit, cleanliness, and display. Do not tear up the display. Start at the head and work down.
Detail and sequence Bunks Wall lockers and wardrobes Treatment
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-9
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 8
List four of the six personal hygiene and grooming standards in a personnel inspection. (1) ___________________________________________________________ (2) ___________________________________________________________ (3) ___________________________________________________________ (4) ___________________________________________________________
Item 9
List three of the five items to inspect on the lower uniform. (1) ___________________________________________________________ (2) ___________________________________________________________ (3) ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-10
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
· · · · · · · · · ·
·
MCI Course 8013A
5-11
Answer a b a c c d b Haircut Mustache Nose hair Shave Breath odor Fingernails (including nail polish and length) Belt and buckle Fit and length of trousers or skirt Serviceability and cleanliness of shoes or boots Brass and leather items (shiny with no marks or scratches) Proper press (double creases)
Reference 5-3 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-6
5-7
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
5-12
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 Exercise
LESSON 2 ESTABLISH A TIME Introduction
Estimated Study Time
25 minutes
Lesson Scope
To establish a time for an inspection, the inspector must be given the requirements and commander’s intent. The commander’s guidance should include · · · · ·
Type of inspection Time of inspection Location for inspection List of uniforms and equipment to be inspected Format or diagram of how items are to be displayed
From this information, you can use reverse planning and conduct a preliminary inspection. Learning Objectives
In This Lesson
After completing this lesson, you should be able to ·
Define reverse planning.
·
Identify guidelines for reverse planning.
·
Identify the purpose of a preliminary inspection.
·
Identify guidelines for a preliminary inspection.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Reverse Planning Preliminary Inspection Lesson 2 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
5-13
See Page 5-13 5-14 5-16 5-18
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2
Reverse Planning
Definition
Guidelines
The reverse planning process begins long before the actual inspection. Reverse planning starts with the inspector who formulates the plans from the top to the lowest level of the organization. Regardless of the type of inspection, reverse planning is a procedure designed to ·
Keep all key players in the chain of command informed so they can plan accordingly.
·
Give the inspector an opportunity to plan for an inspection from the highest to the lowest level in his or her chain of command.
When using reverse planning, follow the guidelines listed in the table below: Guideline Receive the Commander’s Intent
Plan and Prepare
·
Action Identify the type of inspection to be conducted.
·
Check the time, date, and location.
· Notify key personnel in your chain of command. · Determine the amount of time needed for the inspection. ·
Make sure the Marines set aside enough money for uniforms that may have to be purchased (due to being unserviceable or missing) as provided for by the clothing maintenance allowance.
·
Inform every individual of time, location, type of inspection, uniform, and equipment required.
·
Identify an alternate location in case of inclement weather. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-14
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2
Reverse Planning, Continued
Guidelines, continued
Guideline Inspect
Correct Deficiencies
MCI Course 8013A
Action · Wear the same uniform as the Marines being inspected. ·
Make sure your appearance exceeds the requirements you place on your personnel.
·
Look the Marine in the eye when you make comments.
· ·
Keep your remarks impersonal and pertinent. Note all deficiencies.
·
Take measures to correct them immediately.
·
Conduct more inspections to ensure corrections were made.
5-15
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2
Preliminary Inspection
Purpose
The purpose of a preliminary inspection is to conduct it far enough in advance so your Marines will have time to correct discrepancies before the scheduled inspection.
Guidelines
You must know the time, location, type of inspection, uniform, and equipment requirements. With that information, you should adapt the guidelines to the specific circumstances of the inspection and develop your own style of inspecting based on the guidelines listed in the table below: Guideline Preparation
Action · Allow sufficient time for the unit to prepare for the inspection. ·
Permit NCOs and smaller unit leaders a chance to inspect their troops before you inspect.
· Balance
Review the uniform regulations before conducting a uniform inspection, especially when inspecting members of the opposite sex. · Stay firm and consistent during the inspection. ·
Commend the effort put forth and call attention to discrepancies.
· Comments and Questions
Note discrepancies as well as things that are done well. · Look the Marine in the eye. ·
Keep your remarks impersonal and pertinent.
·
Never ridicule or unnecessarily embarrass a Marine.
·
Question Marines on general military knowledge to accustom them to answering questions while in the ranks. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-16
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2
Preliminary Inspection, Continued
Guidelines, continued
Guideline Details
·
Actions Pay close attention to detail.
· Post-inspection
Do not become lost in detail. Maintain the inspection time schedule. · Conduct a critique and correct discrepancies soon after the inspection. ·
Indicate good and bad points.
· Pass the praise from the inspecting officer on to the Marines.
MCI Course 8013A
·
Follow-up on the discrepancies. Be sure all Marines correct their discrepancies.
·
Keep your notes for future reference.
5-17
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete exercise items 1 through 8 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
Reverse planning is used to a. give the inspector an opportunity to plan for an inspection from the highest to the lowest level in his or her chain of command. b. determine the appearance and condition of a Marine or object. c. determine if a Marine's equipment and uniforms are serviceable. d. punish your Marines for unsatisfactory performance.
Items 2 Through 4
Matching: For items 2 through 4, match the letter of the guideline for reverse planning in column 2 to the action listed in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used only once. Column 1
Column 2
Action
Guideline
___ 2. Wear the same uniform as the Marines being inspected. ___ 3. Conduct more inspections. ___ 4. Determine the amount of time needed for inspection.
a. b. c. d.
Receive the commander’s intent Plan and prepare Inspect Correct deficiencies Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-18
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 5
The purpose of a preliminary inspection is to a. see that each Marine has all the prescribed clothing and equipment, his or her own gear, and all their gear is clean and serviceable. b. develop discipline and attention to detail in your Marines by having them spend many hours preparing their uniforms and equipment. c. support requisitions for additional equipment by showing how much is missing. d. conduct it far enough in advance so your Marines will have time to correct discrepancies before the scheduled inspection.
Items 6 Through 8
Matching: For items 6 through 8, match the letter of the guideline for preliminary inspection in column 2 to the action listed in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used only once. Column 1
Column 2
Action
Guideline
___ 6. ___ 7. ___ 8.
Stay firm and consistent during the inspection. Pay close attention to detail. Do not become lost in detail. Look the Marine in the eye.
a. b. c. d. e.
Preparation Balance Comments and questions Details Post-inspection
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-19
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MCI Course 8013A
Answer a c d b d b d c
5-20
Reference 5-14 5-15 5-15 5-14 5-16 5-16 5-17 5-16
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise
LESSON 3 CONDUCT A PRELIMINARY INSPECTION Introduction Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope
The purpose of conducting a preliminary inspection is to identify the proper fit, wearing of uniforms, and grooming standards far in advance to allow enough time to correct discrepancies before the scheduled inspection. Wearing the uniform is a matter of personal pride for all Marines. Your uniform must be properly fitted according to the TM 10120-15/1, Marine Corps Fitting and Alterations Manul, and the MCO P1020.34F Marine Corps Uniform Regulations to set an example of professional appearance and strict conformity. Every sergeant must know the proper fit of uniforms to ensure the traditions and standards of the Marine Corps are properly displayed.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to ·
Identify the proper fit of uniforms for females and males Marines
·
Identify the proper wearing of the different uniforms
·
Identify the proper grooming standards females and males Marines
· Identify a proper wall locker and junk on the bunk equipment display In This Lesson
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males Proper Fit of Uniforms for Females Proper Wearing of Uniforms Proper Grooming Standards Proper Grooming Standards for Males Proper Grooming Standards for Females Clothing and Equipment Displays Lesson 3 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
5-21
See Page 5-21 5-22 5-32 5-38 5-43 5-44 5-45 5-47 5-50
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males
Shirts
If the shirt is manufactured from polyester cotton, it will probably show a maximum shrinkage of 2 percent in the collar, chest, back length, and sleeve length.
Shirt Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of shirts are listed in the table below: Fit Overall
· ·
Short (Quarter) Sleeve Shirt
· ·
Long Sleeve Shirt
·
Guideline Allow ample room around the chest and shoulders to permit free use of the arms without binding. Shoulder and arm seams should reach the point of the outer edge of the shoulder joint. Chest size determines the fit. Fits over an undershirt with all front buttons fastened. Neck size and sleeve length determine the fit.
·
Fits over an undershirt with the collar and sleeves buttoned.
·
Collar
·
·
Fits smoothly around the neck
·
Allow ½ to 1 inch of ease
Cuff (buttoned) ·
Bottom edge should cover the wrist bone to a point 2 inches above the second joint from the end of the thumb.
·
Allow a plus or minus tolerance of ½ inch to account for the shrinkage factor. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-22
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Trousers
Trousers have a numeric sizing system and are labeled according to waist and inseam measurements. Waist measurement is secondary to proper seat fit, since the waist can be altered. Fit trousers over undergarments while wearing a dress shirt, dress shoes, and web belt. Trousers are worn so the lower edge of the waistband is placed squarely on top of the hipbones. Trousers are furnished with unfinished leg bottoms, but with the intended 3-inch hem that is included in the inseam measurement. Measuring the waist is the final consideration. If the seat fits well, the waist can be altered accordingly.
Trouser Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of trousers are listed in the table below: Fit Overall
Guideline Trousers are sized numerically according to the waist measurement and are supplied in waist sizes 26, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 38, 40, 42, and 44. They are designed to fit smoothly, but not tightly around the hips, seat, and waist with a slight fullness for comfort: ·
Loose enough around the hip and buttocks to avoid ·
Gaping of the pockets
·
Visible horizontal wrinkles in the front near the pelvis
·
Rise
Fly must hang in a vertical line without gaping when zipped The measurement from the crotch to the bottom of the waistband is called the rise. ·
Too short a rise results in tightness and discomfort
·
Too long a rise results in drooping of the seat and crotch of the trousers that exhibits an unsightly appearance
The rise of the trousers shall allow ½ inch to 1-inch looseness to assure comfort and stride in normal movements such as sitting, ascending steps, and marching. Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
5-23
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Trouser Guidelines, continued
Fit Length (After Hemming)
Guideline ·
Hem should have a 2½- to 3-inch turn up.
·
Legs of trousers must hang straight from the seat ·
Fronts rest on top of the shoes with a slight break in the lower front crease
·
Front length finishes ¾ to 1 inch shorter than the back
·
Waist
· ·
Ornamental Stripes · (Blood Stripe) Placement
Back length hits at the welt of the shoe. No breaks in back crease. There shall be ½ inch to 1 inch looseness for proper fit and comfort. No horizontal wrinkles across the rear of the trousers below the waistline Positioned on the front panel with the back edge of the stripe aligned with the outseam and the edge of the pocket.
·
The stitching is to continue to the back panel of the trouser.
·
The top of stripe is to finish at or in the waist seam and the bottom end of the stripe is to be turned up in the hem Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-24
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Service and Dress Coat Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of the service and dress coat are listed in the table below: Note: Unless otherwise indicated below, all fitting checks and tolerances for the dress coat are the same as those for the service coat. Fit Overall
Collar
Shoulders and Arms
·
Service Coat Fits over the shirt and trousers with the coat fastened and belt secured
·
·
Loose enough so material can be pinched ·
·
2 inches in the chest
·
1½ inches in the waist
·
Belted loosely enough for a smooth appearance ·
·
Fit smoothly at the back
·
·
Lapels have smooth appearance
·
·
Padding should extend about ½ inch beyond the outer edge of the shoulder joint.
Dress Coat Fits over an undershirt and trousers with the web belt buckled on either side of the fly. Loose enough so material can be pinched ·
1 inch in the chest
·
½ inch in the waist
Belted loosely enough for a smooth appearance (may have slight wrinkles at the belt line) The collar shall have ½ inch to 1 inch ease
Front opening meets without gaps Same as service coat
· Sleeves
Armhole should not have any constrictive binding. Extend to a point of 1 inch above the second joint from the end of the thumb, plus or minus ¼ inch.
Same as service coat
Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
5-25
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Service and Dress Coat Guidelines, continued
Fit Chest
· ·
Length
·
Service Coat Rest easily on the chest without bulges. Front closure is offset ¾ inch to the wearer’s right of the crotch. Even horizontal edges of the front and rear panels to within a plus or minus of ¼ inch.
·
Back of the coat hangs smoothly (rear vent and back seam form a straight vertical line).
·
Proper – waist seam fits directly on top of the belt.
·
Excessive – rear vent flares open.
·
Insufficient – creates an excessive front overlap.
Dress Coat Same as service coat
Same as service coat
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-26
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Service and Dress Coat Guidelines, continued
Fit Flare
·
Service Coat Dress Coat Same as service coat The design of the service coat calls for a flared skirt to permit ease of movement
·
Back Vent
A gathering of up to 1 inch of material on both of the side seams of the flare is allowable The left side of the back vent shall overlap the right side approximately 3 to 4 inches. In some cases, the profile of the individual precludes obtaining the minimum overlap. In those cases, a minimum of 1½ inch overlap is permissible, provided the vertical edge of the vent closure is straight.
Same as service coat
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-27
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
All-Weather Coat
The all-weather coat (AWC) is provided in a numeric size including length. The AWC fits over the service coat with the liner zipped in the coat.
AWC Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of the AWC are listed in the table below: Fit
Guideline Sleeves Extend beyond the undergarment sleeve by ½ inch, plus or minus ¼ inch. Length Extend midway between the knee and the mid-calf. Chest and Shoulders Fit smoothly across the chest and shoulder blades Waist · Noticeably full on the back waist to provide a pleated effect of the material under the belt. ·
Belts loose enough to appear smooth at the center of the front and back.
·
Tapered end of belt must ·
Pass through the buckle to the wearer's left.
·
Collar
Extend not less than 1 ½ inch beyond the belt keeper and not more than ½ inch beyond the left belt loop of the coat. The back of the collars shall cover all subgarment collars. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-28
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Utility Uniform Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of the utility uniform are listed in the table below: Fit Coat
Trousers
·
Guidelines Size for camouflage coat is based on the neck and sleeve measurements
·
Fits over an undershirt loosely enough to allow ease of movement
· ·
Sleeve must be long enough to cover the wrist bone Size based on the waist and inseam measurements
·
Fits loosely enough to prevent binding or restricting effects
·
May be oversized up to 2 inches to allow for shrinkage
·
Trouser legs must reach at least the ankle bone to allow for blousing over the boot
·
No prescribed maximum length Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-29
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Caps, Frame, Garrison, and Utility
The frame and garrison caps, provided in numeric sizing, are best fitted using the try on method. The size of the garrison cap should be the same as that of the frame cap. The utility cap is provided in five alpha sizes—extra-small through extra-large. All caps should ·
Fit snugly and comfortable around the largest part of the head
·
Have lower band of the frame rest high enough on the head to preclude the top of the head from forcing the cover above its natural tautness
·
Have bottom of the visor slightly above (½ inch) the eye level of the wearer
The garrison cap should fit around the head so that neither the top, front, or rear contour of the cap breaks. Footwear
The foot is held securely in the shoe from the lacing at the instep to the heel, but with sufficient room in the toe for the foot to be free from restriction. Fitted over the appropriate socks, the wearer should experience maximum comfort.
Footwear Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of shoes or boots are listed in the table below: Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Action Place the heels well into the back. Lace dress shoes completely. Tie at least five eyelets on boots. Check the widest part of the footwear, the widest point (ball joint) of the foot. Foot fills the footwear without excessive tightness. Length is sufficient to allow at least ½ inch between the end of the longest toe and the end of the footwear Do a full knee bend with the heel off the deck. Recheck the ball joint, width, and length: · ·
Ball joint should be snug, but not too tight Footwear should have ½ inch clearance for the toes Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-30
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Footwear Guidelines, continued
Step 8 9
MCI Course 8013A
Action Walk around as a final check for comfort. The wearer has the final approval of the proper fit of the footwear. Check the overall appearance: ·
Any damage that will effect the serviceability and appearance of leather
·
Each item for loose stitching
5-31
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Females
Shirts
Shirt Guidelines
The shirt is designed as a semi-formfitting (can be tailored) garment meant to remain untucked. There are two types: ·
Long sleeve—Lengths come in short, regular, or long to allow for the natural waist of the garment to fit around the natural waist of the Marine.
·
Short sleeve—Colors come in khaki and white. The white is worn with no rank insignia and never worn without the blue coat.
The guidelines for the proper fit of shirts are listed in the table below: Fit Bust Measurement Shoulders Long Sleeves Collar
Waist
Necktabs
Guideline Fits smoothly over the bust without strain. Seam should not extend beyond natural shoulder line. Bottom edge of cuff covers wrist bone and extends to a point of 2 inches above the second joint from the end of the thumb. · Fits smoothly and closely to the neck · Allow insertion of one finger between neck and collar with collar closed. · Fits smoothly over the hips · Does not ride up
Necktabs come in one size and three colors: ·
Green—will be worn when long sleeve khaki shirts are worn with the service “A” and “B” uniforms and when the short sleeve shirt is worn with the service “A” uniform.
·
Black—will be worn by enlisted Marines with the blue dress “A”, “B”, and “C” or blue-white dress “A” and “B” uniforms.
·
Scarlet—will be worn with the blue dress blue-white “A” and “B” uniform.
No necktab will be worn with service “C” uniform or when the service sweater is worn. Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
5-32
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Females, Continued
Skirts
The service green and dress blue skirts are designed from the same basic pattern. The fitting and alteration requirements are the same for both skirts. Skirts must be fitted over the appropriate undergarments according to · ·
Skirt Length
An individual’s height determines the length of the skirts: · · ·
Skirt Guidelines
Hip measurement Waist measurement
63 inches or less wear short length 64 to 66 inches wear regular length 67 inches or more wear long length
The guidelines for the proper fit of the skirt are listed in the table below: Fit Hip Waist
· ·
Guideline Fits smoothly over the hips Fits easily, not tightly
·
Length
Center side seams at the sides so seam hangs straight from the waistline to the hem. Knee length within 1 inch above or below the kneecap Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-33
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Females, Continued
Service and Dress Slacks
The service green and dress blue slacks are designed from the same basic pattern and share the same fitting requirements. They are furnished with unfinished leg bottoms with the intended 3-inch hem included in the inseam measurement. Slacks must be fitted over the appropriate undergarment according to · ·
Service and Dress Slack Guidelines
Blood Stripe Placement
Service and Dress Coats
Hip measurement Waist measurement
The guidelines for the proper fit of the service and dress slacks are listed below: ·
Must fit smoothly around hips and waist
·
Authorized hem is 2 to 3 inches
·
Legs must be long enough to reach the juncture of the welt of the shoe in the rear
·
After hemming, the front should be ¾ inch to 1 inch shorter than the back.
·
Slight break in front.
Corporals and above have blood stripes on their slacks. The blood stripe ·
Positioned on the front panel with the back edge of the stripe aligned with the outseam and the edge of the pocket.
·
The stitching is to continue to the back panel of the trouser.
·
The top of stripe is to finish at or in the waist seam and the bottom end of the stripe is to be turned up in the hem
Both the service and dress coats are formed fitted, available in a range of sizes, and come in three lengths—short, regular, and long. Bust, shoulder, and sleeve fit are the same for both coats. However, the dress coat is designed to be slightly longer then the service coat. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-34
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Females, Continued
Service and Dress Coat Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of the service and dress coats are listed in the table below: Fit Bust
·
Shoulders
· ·
Back Waist
Sleeves
Front should lie smoothly over the bust, without strain. Shoulder edge of coat does not extend beyond the natural shoulder edge.
· Seam should rest directly on top of the shoulders. Should mold smoothly over the individual’s back from the neck to hem edge, with no wrinkles in the waist area. · If waist of coat in the back is too high above the natural waistline, try the same size coat in a longer length. ·
If coat blouses at the waist, try a short coat of the same size.
·
Fits easily through the waist, extending to a smooth flare over the hips.
·
Allow a 2-inch overlap in the center front to hang evenly. Fit smoothly when arms hang straight at the side.
· ·
Length
Guideline Use the fit that most closely corresponds to bust measurement.
·
Approximately 1 inch above the second joint from the end of the thumb and long enough to cover the long sleeve shirt. Long enough to cover the skirt zipper.
·
Collar
One-fourth inch below the skirt zipper or 7 inches below the natural waistline. Fit smoothly and closely at the back of neck. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-35
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Females, Continued
Caps
Caps are available in a range of sizes that correspond to the head size, measured in inches around the head midway on the forehead above the ears. There are three types of caps: · · ·
Cap Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of caps are listed below: · · ·
Footwear
Garrison service Dress and service Utility
Put on over the hairstyle the Marine usually wears Must be snug without puckers or wrinkles across the top Wear the visor straight with its tip in line with the eyebrows.
Choice of appropriate footwear for females depends on the uniform being worn. There are four types of footwear authorized for females: · · · ·
Boots Oxford shoes Pumps Flats
Oxford Shoe Guidelines
Guidelines for the female’s oxford shoes are similar as for males. Oxfords can only be purchased from a Marine Corps authorized source (Marine Corps Exchange, clothing sales facility, or approved commercial source). Oxfords should fit to ensure maximum comfort when fitted over hosiery.
Pump Guidelines
The guidelines for pumps are listed below: ·
Heels must measure between 1 and 2½ inches in height
·
Base of the heel must measure between ⅜ inch by ⅜ inch and 1½ inch by 1⅞ inch. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-36
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Females, Continued
Fit
The fit for pumps is the same as for oxfords. When trying on shoes or boots, be sure to follow the same guidelines presented in Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males in this lesson. In addition, check the fit when the foot is · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Flat on the deck Bent
5-37
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Wearing of Uniforms
Types
The three types of authorized uniforms for enlisted Marines are · · ·
Dress Service Utility
The evening dress uniform is authorized for wear by staff noncommissioned officers as an optional uniform. Special Dress Uniforms
The blue-white dress “A” and “B” uniforms are the same as the blue dress “A” and “B” uniforms, except the trousers, skirt, or slacks are white. This uniform can only be worn by SNCO’s during the summer. It can be prescribed for NCO’s and below by the Commanding Officer for official parades, ceremonies, and reviews.
Dress Uniforms
The types of blue dress uniforms and their description are listed in the table below: Type Dress “A”
Dress “B”
Description Blue dress coat with · large medals, ribbons for which medals · have not been struck ·
Blue dress coat with ribbons worn in lieu of medals
Occasions Parades Ceremonies Reviews
·
Solemnities
·
Entertainment when the commander desires to pay special honors to the occasion
· ·
Not authorized for leave or liberty Prescribed for the same occasions as the blue dress “A” uniform
·
Authorized for leave and liberty Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-38
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Wearing of Uniforms, Continued Dress Uniforms, continued
Type Dress “C”
Dress “D”
Description Long sleeve khaki shirt · without coat ·
Authorized for leave and liberty
·
Blue dress sweater can be worn at the option of the individual except when the coat is more appropriate Uniform of the day for specified occasions or duties
Short sleeve khaki shirt · without coat ·
Service Uniforms
Occasions Uniform of the day for specified occasions or duties
Authorized for leave and liberty.
The types of service uniform and their description are listed in table below: Type Service “A”
·
Description Service coat
·
Ribbons and badges
·
Women can wear either the long or short sleeve khaki shirt and green necktab.
·
·
Occasion Almost all official occasions, such as when a member of a court-martial, official visits, and reporting to a new duty station Authorized for leave and liberty
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-39
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Wearing of Uniforms, Continued
Service Uniforms, continued
Type Service “B”
·
Description Same as the service · “A” uniform, except the coat is · not worn
·
Service “C”
Occasion Uniform of the day Authorized for leave and liberty
Ribbons and · badges as directed or optional long sleeve shirt necktie. Short sleeve khaki shirt · with appropriate service trousers ·
Not worn for formal or semiformal social events
·
Not worn for formal or semiformal social events
Uniform of the day Authorized for leave and liberty
Note: The service sweater can be worn at the individual's option as part of the service “B” or “C” uniform. Camouflage Utility Uniform
The camouflage utility uniform is only authorized for wear in · · ·
The field Field type exercises Working conditions where the service uniform is not practical
The utility uniform is not authorized for leave or liberty. Marines can wear the utility uniform to and from their domicile, unless their commander prohibits doing so. Commanders can authorize the wear of the utility uniform for brief and appropriate stops off base during duty hours or while commuting. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-40
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Wearing of Uniforms, Continued
Maternity Uniform
When the local commander determines that a pregnant woman can no longer wear the service uniform, she must wear the maternity uniform as the uniform of the day. The maternity uniform consists of ·
Slacks or skirts
·
Long or short sleeve maternity shirts with or without the tunic top
· Maternity Uniform Guidelines
·
The tunic top must be worn when the service coat is prescribed for wear.
·
Always wear the green necktab when the tunic top or the long sleeve maternity shirt is worn.
·
Wear the short sleeve maternity shirt with an open collar and no necktab when it is worn without the tunic.
Maternity utilities
Guidelines for proper wearing of the maternity uniform are listed below: ·
Place and wear the insignia of grade on the maternity shirts as you would on regular khaki shirts.
·
Wear either pumps or oxfords when wearing the skirt.
·
Always wear oxfords when wearing slacks.
·
Wear all other uniform items of the maternity uniform the same as for the service uniform.
·
Wear the AWC unbuttoned in the latter stages of pregnancy.
·
Do not wear the sweater with the maternity uniform. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-41
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Wearing of Uniforms, Continued
Female Accessories
Hosiery and handbags are two specific uniform items for females. Wear fulllength nylon hose with the service and dress uniforms when wearing a skirt. Hosiery must harmonize with the natural skin tone of the individual. The black handbag is issued or sold through the Marine Corps Supply System and Marine Corps Exchange. It can be carried with the service and dress uniforms, except when in formation, over the left shoulder and arm.
MCI Course 8013A
5-42
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Grooming Standards
General Guidelines
Articles of religious apparel that are not visible or apparent when worn with the uniform are authorized.
Grooming Regulations
Grooming regulations do not allow eccentric and faddish styles: · · ·
Unauthorized Items
Unless authorized by CMC or higher authority, the items listed below may not be exposed with the uniform: · · · · · · · · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Hair Jewelry Eyeglasses
Pencils Pens Watch chains Pins Handkerchiefs Combs Cigarettes Pipes Barrettes Hair ribbons Flowers
5-43
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Grooming Standards for Males
Hair
Grooming regulations for the male’s hair will be · ·
Neat and closely trimmed Evenly graduated from zero length at the hairline in the lower portion of the head to a maximum of 3 inches in length on the upper portion of the head · Sideburns will not extend below the top of the orifice of the ear. Face
The face will be clean, unless the male Marine chooses to wear a mustache. However, the mustache must be · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Neatly trimmed Between the margin of the upper lip and bottom of the nose Within the corners of the mouth Hair cannot exceed ½ inch fully extended
5-44
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Grooming Standards for Females
Hair
The female’s hair can touch the collar, but cannot fall below the collar's edge.
Hair Regulations
Grooming regulations for the female’s hair: · · ·
Unauthorized Hair Regulations
Neatly shaped Attractive feminine style No interference with the proper wear of the uniform headgear—should be appropriately based on the appearance of the hair when headgear is worn.
Grooming regulations do not allow · · · ·
Eccentric hairstyles Conspicuous pins Hairnets, unless authorized for specific duties Conspicuous color changes
Any artificial coloring must harmonize with the individual’s complexion tone and eye color. Wigs must look natural and conform to all the above listed regulations. Cosmetics
Apply cosmetics conservatively. Do not wear exaggerated or faddish cosmetic styles. The aim is to achieve a natural, finished look. ·
Lipstick must harmonize with the scarlet shade used in that uniform: · Worn with the service, dress, or maternity uniform · Can wear red or pink shades with the utility uniform · Nail polish must either harmonize with lipstick or be colorless. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-45
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Grooming Standards for Females, Continued
Jewelry
Inconspicuous wristwatches, watchbands, and rings are permitted in uniform. You can wear earrings (only one earring on each earlobe) with the service and blue dress uniform.
Authorized Earrings
The regulations for earrings are listed below: · · ·
No Earrings Allowed
Grooming regulations do not allow earrings: · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Must be small, polished, yellow-gold color ball or round stud type Cannot exceed ¼ inch in diameter Cannot extend below the earlobe
With the utility uniform While in formation In certain (or similar) military functions · Parade · Review · Ceremony
5-46
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Clothing and Equipment Displays
Purpose
Clothing and equipment displays are the usual method of inspecting an individual’s clothing and combat equipment (782 gear). Displayed in the appropriate area, an inspector will inspect the required items for the · · ·
Types
Number Marking Condition
There are two types of clothing and equipment displays: · ·
Wall locker Junk on the bunk (JOB)
The Marine must stand a wall locker and JOB inspection to meet the requirements of the commander’s guidance that initiated the inspection. A commander may require a combination of bunk and wall locker displays to achieve his or her inspection purposes. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-47
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Clothing and Equipment Displays, Continued
Wall Locker Display
Wall locker displays should follow the model illustrated in the diagram below to promote uniformity throughout the Marine Corps. Though the commander may prescribe displays that vary from this model, the commander’s guidance is the key to the display.
Diagram
The wardrobe display and instructions are identified in the diagram below:
Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
5-48
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Clothing and Equipment Displays, Continued
Junk On The Bunk Display
Junk on the bunk (JOB) displays should follow the model illustrated in the diagram below to promote uniformity throughout the Marine Corps. Though the commander may prescribe displays that vary from this model, the commander’s guidance is the key to the display.
Diagram
The JOB inspection display is identified in the diagram below:
MCI Course 8013A
5-49
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Lesson 3 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
15 minutes
Directions
Complete exercise items 1 through 12 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
Where can you find instructions for the proper fit of uniform clothing? a. b. c. d.
Item 2
How long is the sleeve on the male’s long sleeve shirt? a. b. c. d.
Item 3
To the wrist bone To the thumb 3 inches above the first joint on the thumb 2 inches above the second joint from the end of the thumb
After hemming, what is the length of the hem on the trouser legs? a. b. c. d.
Item 4
TM 10120-15/1, Marine Corps Uniform Fitting and Alterations Manual Naval And Marine Corps Uniform Regulations On the clothing tag Marine Battle Skills Training Handbook
1 to 2 inches 1½ to 2½ inches 2½ to 3 inches 3½ inches
The male’s service coat should be loose enough to pinch _____ of material in the chest. a. b. c. d.
1 inch 2 inches 3 inches 4 inches Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-50
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 5
What is the proper length of the AWC? a. b. c. d.
Item 6
What is the priority of fitting for the female’s long sleeve shirt? a. b. c. d.
Item 7
Shoulders, waist, and sleeve Bust measurement, shoulders, and sleeve Bust measurement, waist, and shoulders Overlap, shoulders, and sleeve
What is the proper length of the skirt? a. b. c. d.
Item 8
Midway between the thigh and the knee At the knee Midway between the knee and the mid-calf At the ankle
Midway down the thigh, 1 inch below the knee cap Knee length, plus or minus 1 inch above or below the knee cap 2 inches above or below the knee cap 4 inches above or below the knee cap
What is the maximum authorized hem for the service and dress slacks? a. b. c. d.
1 inch 2 inches 3 inches 4 inches Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-51
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 9
What is the proper length of the sleeves on the female’s service coat? a. b. c. d.
Item 10
What are the four types of authorized uniforms for enlisted Marines? a. b. c. d.
Item 11
Blue dress, service, utility, and mess white Service, utility, formal blue, and semi-formal blue Alphas, bravos, charlies, and deltas Blue dress, blue-white dress, service, and utility
What is the maximum authorized length of hair on the upper portion of a male Marine's head? a. b. c. d.
Item 12
To the wrist bone 1 inch below the wrist bone 1 inch above the second joint from the end of the thumb 2 inches above the second joint from the end of the thumb
2 inches 3 inches 4 inches 5 inches
How long can the female Marine’s hair hang? a. b. c. d.
Cannot touch the collar Can touch the collar, but can not fall below the collar's edge 2 inches beyond the collar Must be pinned up so that it does not fall at all Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-52
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
MCI Course 8013A
Answer a d c b c b b c c d b b
5-53
Reference 5-21 5-22 5-24 5-25 5-28 5-32 5-33 5-34 5-35 5-38 5-44 5-45
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
5-54
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise
MILITARY STUDIES REVIEW LESSON EXAMINATION Review Lesson
Estimated Study Time
1 hour and 15 minutes
Introduction
The purpose of the review lesson examination is to prepare you for the final examination. We recommend that you try to complete your review lesson examination without referring to the text, but for those items (questions) you are unsure of, restudy the text. When you finish your review lesson and are satisfied with your responses, check your responses against the answers provided at the end of this review lesson examination.
Directions
Select the ONE answer that BEST completes the statement or that answers the item. For multiple choice items, circle your response. For matching items, place the letter of your response in the space provided.
Item 1
The primary references for non-judicial punishment are the a. Constitution of the United States of America, the Manual for CourtsMartial, the Declaration of Independence, and Article 31. b. Bill of Rights, Article 31, Manual of the Judge Advocate General, and the Constitution of the United States of America. c. Manual of the Judge Advocate General, the Fifth Amendment, Article 31, and the Uniform Code of Military Justice. d. Constitution of the United States of America, the Uniform Code of Military Justice, Manual for Courts-Martial, and the Manual of the Judge Advocate General. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-1
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 2
Protection against self-incrimination is granted by a. the Bill of Rights through direct application of the Fifth Amendment. b. the Fifth Amendment of the Constitution of the United States of America through direct application of Article 31 of the UCMJ. c. the Commandant of the Marine Corps through direct application of Article 31 of the UCMJ. d. Article 31 of the Bill of Rights through direct application of the UCMJ.
Item 3
No person subject to the chapter may interrogate or request any statement from an accused or a person suspected of an offense without first informing him of the accusation and advising him that he does not have to make any statement regarding the offense of which he is accused or suspected. He is also informed that any statement made by him may be used as evidence against him in a trial by court-martial composes the contents of paragraph ______ of Article 31 of the UCMJ. a. b. c. d.
Item 4
1 2 3 4
No person subject to this chapter may compel any person to incriminate himself, or to answer any question that may tend to incriminate him composes the contents of paragraph ______ of Article 31 of the UCMJ. a. b. c. d.
1 2 3 4 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-2
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 5
No person subject to this chapter may compel any person to make a statement or to produce evidence before any military tribunal if the statement or evidence is not material to the issue and may tend to degrade him composes the contents of paragraph ______ of Article 31 of the UCMJ. a. b. c. d.
Item 6
1 2 3 4
The two basic elements of Article 31 rights are the a. b. c. d.
beginning and end. warning and waiver. Rocks and Shoals revisions of 1950. Manual of Courts-Martial and Manual of Judge Advocate General. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-3
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 7
The recommended procedures to advise a suspect of his or her Article 31 rights are listed below in scrambled order: (1) Instruct the suspect to read and sign the Suspects Rights and Acknowledgement/Statement Form. (2) Identify yourself to the suspect. (3) Ask the suspect three questions: · Do you want a lawyer? · Do you understand that if you should decide to answer questions, you may stop answering questions at any time? · Do you want to answer questions and make a statement? (4) Read the Article 31 Warning Card verbatim without error to the suspect. (5) Document the suspect’s Article 31 advisement on the Suspects Rights and Acknowledgement/Statement Form. (6) Terminate the reading if the suspect: · Does not understand his or her rights · Declines to answer questions or make a statement · Requests a lawyer. What is the correct sequence of procedures to advise a suspect of his or her Article 31 rights? a. b. c. d.
Item 8
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 2, 3, 4, 6, 5, 1 2, 4, 3, 6, 5, 1 3, 5, 2, 6, 1, 4
Who can administer the Article 31 advisement? a. Officer in charge, platoon commander, or commanding officer as deemed necessary by the scope of the military investigation b. Any person acting as an agent of the military authorities for the purpose of furthering a military investigation c. First sergeant in lieu of the officer in charge, platoon commander, or commanding officer for the purpose of furthering a military investigation d. Platoon sergeant or first sergeant prior to anyone to establish the need for furthering a military investigation Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-4
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 9
When should the suspect be advised of Article 31? a. Daily to ensure that if something happens you are covered b. During an illegal act c. After it has been determined by the first sergeant that there has been a substantial violation of the UCMJ d. Before any interrogation begins or whenever an act constitutes a statement of admission
Item 10
It is important to properly issue the Article 31 advisement to an accused suspect for the admissibility of a. b. c. d.
Item 11
a confession or admission of guilt at a trial. evidence at a trial. any information at a performance evaluation board. character references during court proceedings.
A suspect is required to submit to fingerprinting for a security clearance. a. Article 31 warning is required b. Article 31 warning is not required
Item 12
A suspect is requested to give a handwriting sample for the purpose of identification. a. Article 31 warning is required b. Article 31 warning is not required Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-5
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 13
An individual is required to submit a photograph for the purpose of identification at a promotion board. a. Article 31 warning is required b. Article 31 warning is not required
Item 14
An individual under the influence of alcohol, but understanding his or her rights, is requested to identify his or her personal effects at a crime scene. a. Article 31 warning is required b. Article 31 warning is not required
Item 15
An individual is required to submit a photograph for identification in connection with an investigation. a. Article 31 warning is required b. Article 31 warning is not required
Item 16
The punitive articles are found in the ______ and are listed from a. b. c. d.
Manual of Judge Advocate General, Appendix 2; 1 through 134. Manual for Courts-Martial (MCM), Appendix 2; 1 through 134. Manual of Judge Advocate General, Appendix 2; 77 through 134. Manual for Courts-Martial (MCM), Appendix 2; 77 through 134. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-6
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 17
The punitive articles are composed of a. b. c. d.
Item 18
charges and specifications. offenses and elements. offenses and defenses. charges and arguments.
The components of the punitive articles that lead to charging a suspect of an offense are listed below in scrambled order: (1) Determine the article violated. (2) Check the list of offenses that fit the facts. (3) Determine the essential elements of the offense, which cover the essential conditions that must exist to convict the accused. (4) Sight the specification. (5) Narrow the charge. (6) Get all the facts about the incident. (7) Prepare and submit the charge sheet. What is the correct sequence of responses listed below to charge a suspect of an offense? a. b. c. d.
Item 19
6, 1, 2, 4, 3, 5, 7 6, 1, 5, 2, 4, 3, 7 1, 6, 2, 3, 5, 4, 7 1, 5, 2, 4, 3, 6, 7
Who is authorized to submit a charge sheet? a. b. c. d.
First sergeant Platoon commander Squad leader Any Marine Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-7
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 20
What is the basic information on a charge sheet? a. Charge(s) and specification(s) b. Charge(s), specification(s), and maximum punishment c. Charge(s), specification(s), witnesses, and maximum punishment
Item 21
What are the two primary sources for the laws of war? a. b. c. d.
Item 22
Destroying the enemy’s will to resist or change their will until it agrees with the objective set forth by higher authorities is defined as the a. b. c. d.
Item 23
The customary international law and ratified treaties The international conferences and customary international law The ratified treaties and international summits for peace The customary international law and Sun Tsu’s Art of War
purpose of theatre tactics. objective of infantry missions. Department of Defense’s objective for high intensity conflict. objective of war.
The three purposes for laws of war are identified in the list below: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Prevent unnecessary suffering of combatants and non-combatants. Strengthen international coalitions. Ensure free and democratic elections are held and enforced. Safeguard certain fundamental human rights of persons. Encourage the restoration of peace. Establish free markets and open trade with other sovereign countries. Allow United Nations to set up peacekeeping forces.
Select the correct purposes for laws of war from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
7, 2, 3 4, 2, 6 1, 4, 5 1, 3, 5 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-8
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 24
What are the four basic concepts underlying the laws of war? a. Military necessity, proportionality, unnecessary suffering, and discrimination b. Proportionality, fire and maneuver, discrimination, and fire superiority c. Fire and maneuver, amphibious doctrine, air superiority, and combined arms d. Military necessity, proportionality, combined arms, and amphibious doctrine
Item 25
The nine Marine principles of war are identified in the list below: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
Marines utilize the MAGTF concept. Marines do not steal. Marines fight only enemy combatants. Marines do not kill or torture prisoners. Marines locate close with and destroy the enemy. Marines collect and care for the wounded whether friend or foe. Marines should do their best to prevent violations of the law of war. Marines destroy no more than the mission requires. Marines provide relief organizations with support. Marines do not harm enemies who surrender. Marines treat all civilians humanely. Marines do not attack medical personnel, facilities, or equipment. Marines should maximize fire support.
Select the correct principles of war from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 12, 13 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-9
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 26
A war crime is defined as the intentional a. misuse of materiel and military personnel for purposes that are inconsistent with theatre policies to include rules of engagement. b. harming of civilians not taking part in the hostilities, enemy prisoners of war, medical personnel, or other non-combatants. c. disobedience of any orders issued on the battlefield whether or not it involves prisoners of war, non-combatants, or medical personnel. d. harming of non-combatants, personnel not taking part in the exchange of fire, enemy prisoners of war, or other civilians not taking part in the hostilities.
Item 27
The most effective methods of preventing war crimes are to a. keep your Marines informed, maintain a high state of readiness, and prevent degradation of personal weapons readiness. b. make the enemy nameless and faceless, maintain a high state of readiness, and keep your Marines prepared for any situation. c. maintain high military standards, keep your Marines informed, and prevent personal wars or vendettas. d. maintain a high military standards, prevent personal relationships, and keep your Marines prepared for any situation. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-10
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 28
The three steps required to report an illegal order are identified in the list below: (1) Clarify the order. (2) Execute the order. (3) Report the order using the chain of command, but bypassing the superior who issued the order. (4) Report the order to the closest U.N. observer. (5) Refuse the order. (6) Apprehend the order issuer and turn them in to the commanding officer. Select the correct sequence of steps listed below to report an illegal order. a. b. c. d.
Item 29
1, 2, 6 1, 5, 3 3, 4, 5 4, 5, 6
Directives issued by competent military authority which delineate the circumstances and limitations under which United States forces will initiate and/or continue combat engagement with other forces encountered are defined as a. b. c. d.
battle orders. combat directives. operations orders. rules of engagement. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-11
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 30
The three purposes for rules of engagement (ROE) are identified in the list below: (1) Provides direct interface between application of the Geneva Convention and self-defense force members on international contingency deployments (2) Provides implementation guidance for the application of force for mission accomplishment and for the exercise of the inherent right and obligation of self-defense (3) Implements silence is consent defense for fire control during indirect fire planning and application (4) Serves as a fire control method of military operations by the civilian and military chain of command (5) Implements the inherent right of self-defense (6) Provides a safe back blast area when engaging targets with antiarmor weapons Select the correct purposes for ROE from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
Item 31
1, 3, 6 2, 4, 3 2, 4, 5 3, 5, 6
What are the classes of persons that are entitled to self-defense? a. b. c. d.
U.S. forces, U.S. Marines, U.S. Postal Service Individuals and self, units, and national interests U.S. citizens, multinational coalitions, medical personnel Missionaries, medical personnel, and third party nationals Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-12
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 32
What are the three types of actions that will justify self-defense? a. A hostile act, threat or hostile intent, or presence of a force deemed hostile b. Unruly crowds in imminent danger zones, verbal exchanges with negative connotations from host county personnel, or unauthorized entry into secure areas by third party persons c. Multinational training operations in imminent danger zones, counter drug operations in support of the ATF, or joint staffs assigned to imminent danger zones d. Direct and indirect fire, security patrols in imminent danger zones, or joint operations with national and internal forces
Item 33
The origins of the noncommissioned officer are identified in the list below: (1) Battle Drill Guide for Marines (2) Regulations for the Order and Discipline of the Troops of the United States (3) Uniform Code of Military Justice (4) Non-Commissioned Officers’ Handbook (5) Regulations for the Troops of the Foreign Legion and American Legion (6) United States Constitution and Bill of Rights (7) The Blue Book and Condottieri Units (8) Regulations for Good Order and Discipline Select the correct origins of the noncommissioned officer from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
1 and 8 2 and 7 5 and 3 6 and 4 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-13
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 34
The responsibilities of the NCO are identified in the list below: (1) (2)
Discipline Marines as directed by the UCMJ. Provide links between commanders (as well as officers in general) and the troops. (3) Recognize and reward outstanding technical and military skills. (4) Prepare rosters and ensure that personnel action requests are submitted for all administrative action. (5) Muster formations as often as possible to improve accountability. (6) Organize a professional library at every command level. (7) Afford avenues for advancement whereby enlisted men and women may realize their full potential as leaders. (8) Ensure that the Marines apply for special duty. (9) Decentralize command authority in an orderly structure down to the smallest element in an organization. (10) Provide a senior enlisted adviser, a platoon sergeant, a first sergeant, or a sergeant major for each commander. Select the correct responsibilities of the NCO from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
1, 3, 5, 7, 9 2, 3, 7, 9, 10 2, 4, 5, 6, 8 3, 4, 6, 9, 10 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-14
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 35
The NCO’s obligations for self and to the unit are identified in the list below: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
Win on the battlefield and accomplish all assigned tasks. Develop delegation skills to eliminate overextending your responsibility. Develop subordinates to ensure a lighter workload yourself. Enjoy the burden of your leadership position. Focus on shortcomings of others to improve morale and readiness. Build and foster unit cohesion. Provide training and set meaningful standards. Provide assistance only to Marine under your supervision. Providing your unit with positive leadership. Hold yourself and your Marines accountable to high standards. Ensure that you are nominated for personal awards and recognition.
Select the NCO’s correct obligations for self and to the unit from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d. Item 36
1, 2, 4, 7, 8, 9 1, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10 2, 4, 5, 6 10, 11 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11
The major roles the NCO fulfills are identified in the list below: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
Cursory observer and protagonist Unit leader and disciplinarian Sergeant of the guard Trainer and guardian of standards Tactical planner and developer Training NCO and squad leader Backbone of the Corps Duty NCO at company commands
Select the correct roles the NCO fulfills from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
2, 6, 8 3, 4, 7 1, 3, 5 2, 4, 7 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-15
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 37
The purpose of the Medal of Honor (MOH) is to a. posthumously recognize armed forces personnel for performance above and beyond the line of duty. b. recognize deeds of gallantry and heroism in times of war and of peace. c. provide an opportunity for goal setting and a command support program for gallantry volunteers. d. recognize heroic achievement in combat zones after there is a declaration of war.
Item 38
The MOH criteria are identified in the list below: (1) The deed must be the type that if not done, it will not subject the individual to any justified criticism. (2) The deed must be in support of a unit involved in combat operations. (3) The deed must be without detriment to the mission of the command or to the command to which attached. (4) The valor must include hand-to-hand combat and there must be at least one enemy casualty using an entrenching tool. (5) The unit must suffer high combat casualties, and with at least one of the key personnel being replaced by the MOH recipient. (6) No margin of doubt or possibility of error in awarding this honor. (7) Service is rendered conspicuous above their comrades by an act so outstanding that it clearly distinguishes their gallantry beyond the call of duty from lesser forms of bravery. (8) The deed must be executed while assigned to a combat arms unit or during the execution phase of an expeditionary operation. Select the correct criteria of the MOH from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
1, 2, 5, 7 1, 3, 6, 7 2, 3, 4, 8 3, 4, 5, 8 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-16
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 39
The first Marine NCO awarded the MOH was a. b. c. d.
Item 40
Corporal John F. Mackie while serving aboard USS Calena. Sergeant Henry J. Denigt while serving aboard USS Brooklyn. Sergeant Richard Binder while serving aboard USS Tichonderoga. Sergeant James Martin while serving aboard USS Richmond.
The historical NCO duties are identified in the list below: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
NCO education (1981 to present) Color guard details (American Revolution to present) Junior leaders, decentralized control (Vietnam to present) Burial details (American Revolution to present) Weapons and daytime maneuvers (World War I to present) Basic training (World War II to present) Sea duty (American Revolution to present) Marine Security Guard duty (Boxer Rebellion to present) Battle leaders, integrated squads (Korean War to present) Neatness and sanitation (American Revolution to present)
Select the historical NCO duties from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8 1, 3, 5, 6, 9, 10 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-17
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 41
The first paragraph of the NCO creed is cited below: I am an NCO dedicated to training new Marines and influencing the old. I am forever conscious of each Marine under my charge, and by example I will inspire him (or her) to the highest standards possible. I will strive to be patient, understanding, just and firm. I will commend the deserving and encourage the wayward. Select the correct second paragraph of the NCO creed from the responses listed below. a. I will remember that I am responsible to the SNCO and NCO corps for the discipline, focus, and combat effectiveness of my men. b. I will never forget that I am responsible to my commanding officer for the morale, discipline, and the efficiency of my men and their performance will reflect an image of me. c. I am responsible to the SgtMaj and SNCO’s for the management of my Marines, their professional and personal discipline, combat effectiveness, and attention to detail. Their performance reflects directly on my personal performance standards and me. d. I will never forget that I am responsible to my platoon commander and platoon sergeant for the combat efficiency, morale, and good order of my men and their overall performance.
Item 42
In 1983 following the assassination of the Prime Minister and the overthrow of the government of Grenada, the Marines participated in an operation. It was a joint military operation in response to a request from neighboring Caribbean nations. The Marines’ rapid response secured the island and safeguarded hundreds of American citizens living on the island. What is the correct name of this descriptive deployment? a. b. c. d.
Operation Sharp Edge Operation Just Cause Operation Urgent Fury Operation Restore Hope Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-18
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 43
During 1989 in response to increasing unrest in Panama, the President ordered a joint military operation. United States forces, including the Marines, overthrew the military government of General Manuel Noriega and installed a civilian government. What is the correct name of this descriptive deployment? a. b. c. d.
Item 44
This military operation was designed to halt the advance of Iraqi forces and to position multinational forces assembled for possible offensive action to dispel the invading force. This operation validated the Marine Corps’ maritime prepositioning force (MPF) concept and enacted the plan of tailoring units to accomplish a mission as part of a Marine air-ground task force (MAGTF). What is the correct name of this descriptive deployment? a. b. c. d.
Item 45
Operation Just Cause Operation Uphold Democracy Operation Ernest Will Operation Urgent Fury
Operation Desert Storm Operation Rolling Thunder Operation Ernest Will Operation Desert Shield
During 1991, an operation was launched after the Iraqi government refused to comply with the United Nations’ resolutions. Marine aviation conducted combat operations when the air phase commenced in January 1991. After massive bombing, Marine ground forces participated in the sweep into Kuwait to help liberate the country and damage the Iraqi military capability. What is the correct name of this descriptive deployment? a. b. c. d.
Operation Desert Shield Operation Desert Calm Operation Desert Storm Operation Peace Vector IV Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-19
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 46
In 1992 as part of a joint military operation, Marine forces landed in war-torn Somalia. United States forces provided security for the distribution of humanitarian aid. The U.S. forces were later incorporated in the United Nations’ peacekeeping forces and were sent to stabilize the situation in the country. What is the correct name of this descriptive deployment? a. b. c. d.
Item 47
During 1994, a joint military operation was ordered by the President to restore the civilian government in Haiti. Marines landed in northern Haiti to stabilize the situation and provide security for the orderly transfer of power from the military to the democratically elected government of President Jean Bertrand Aristide. What is the correct name of this descriptive deployment? a. b. c. d.
Item 48
Operation Freedom Banner Operation Restore Hope Operation Urgent Fury Operation Fiery Vigil
Operation Just Cause Operation Restore Hope Operation Urgent Fury Operation Uphold Democracy
A column of men or line of vehicles is identified as a. b. c. d.
column. file. rank. element. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-20
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued Directions for Items 49 Through 52
Choose the answer that correctly describes the term identified by the corresponding number in the platoon diagram below:
Item 49
a. b. c. d.
Footstep Ground distance Distance Right guide
Item 50
a. b. c. d.
Second squad Middle Center Alignment
Item 51
a. b. c. d.
Baseline Depth Front Line
Item 52
a. b. c. d.
Front Row Squad File Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-21
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 53
An arrangement of elements of a unit in line, in column, or any other prescribed manner is described as a. b. c. d.
Item 54
The individual upon whom a formation or elements thereof regulates its march is identified as the a. b. c. d.
Item 55
platoon commander. squad leader. guide. platoon sergeant.
The lateral space between elements on the same line is defined as a. b. c. d.
Item 56
an extended mass formation. a squad. a platoon. a formation.
interval. a pace. distance. a step.
Cadence of 120 steps per minute is referred to as ___________ time. a. b. c. d.
double slow normal quick Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-22
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued Item 57
Select the correct procedures that a platoon sergeant must execute to form an unarmed platoon. Choice a
b
c
d
Step (1) Post himself or herself three paces in front of the point where the center of the platoon will be and face that point. (2) Command, “FALL IN” or “AT CLOSE INTERVAL, FALL IN.” (3) Command, “REPORT.” (4) Receive the report. (5) Salute and report, “SIR, ALL PRESENT AND ACCOUNTED FOR” or “SIR, (Number) MARINES ABSENT.” (1) Post himself or herself six paces in front of the point where the center of the platoon will be and face that point. (2) Command, “FALL IN” or “AT CLOSE INTERVAL, FALL IN.” (3) Command, “REPORT.” (4) Receive the report. (5) Salute and report, “SIR, ALL PRESENT AND ACCOUNTED FOR” or “SIR, (Number) MARINES ABSENT.” (1) Post himself or herself three paces in front of the point where the center of the platoon will be and face that point. (2) Draw sword. (3) Command, “FALL IN” or “AT CLOSE INTERVAL, FALL IN.” (4) Command, “REPORT.” (5) Receive the report. (6) Command, “INSPECTION, ARMS.” “PORT, ARMS.” “ORDER, ARMS (7) Salute and report, “SIR, ALL PRESENT AND ACCOUNTED FOR” or “SIR, (Number) MARINES ABSENT.” (1) Post himself or herself six paces in front of the point where the center of the platoon will be and face that point. (2) Command, “FALL IN” or “AT CLOSE INTERVAL, FALL IN.” (3) Command, “REPORT.” (4) Receive the report. (5) Command, “INSPECTION, ARMS.” “PORT, ARMS.” “RIGHT SHOULDER, ARMS.” “ORDER, ARMS.” (6) Salute and report, “SIR, ALL PRESENT AND ACCOUNTED FOR” or “SIR, (Number) MARINES ABSENT.” Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-23
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 58
Facing movements, side step, ______________________ are different halted movements of a platoon drill. a. b. c. d.
Item 59
Mark time, half step, change direction on the march, and march to the oblique are common marching movements. What are the other three most common marching movements? a. b. c. d.
Item 60
back step, and hand salute reverse step, and hand salute change step, and hand salute dismissed, and back step
Change step, march to open ranks, and march to the tactical column Change step, march to the flank, and march to the rear Change step, march to route step, and march to the rear Chain step, march to the flank, and march to the rear
Select the correct procedures to dismiss an armed platoon at attention in line formation. a. “INSPECTION, ARMS.” “PORT, ARMS.” “ORDER, ARMS.” “DISMISSED.” b. “INSPECTION, ARMS.” “RIGHT SHOULDER, ARMS.” “PORT, ARMS.” “DISMISSED.” c. “DISMISSED.” d. “INSPECTION, ARMS.” “PORT, ARMS.” “DISMISSED.” Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-24
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Directions for Items 61 Through 64
Using the diagram below, identify items 61 through 64 on the scabbard.
Item 61
a. b. c. d.
Upper end Orifice Throat Hand grip
Item 62
a. b. c. d.
Diamond stud Frog stud Frog catch Rhombic catch
Item 63
a. b. c. d.
Tip Striking end Lower end Blade cover
Item 64
a. b. c. d.
Drag Foible Casement tip False edge Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-25
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Directions for Items 65 Through 68
Using the diagram below, identify items 65 through 68 on the sword.
Item 65
a. b. c. d.
Stud Hilt Grip Pommel
Item 66
a. b. c. d.
Hand shield Brass knuckle Knuckle bow Brass guard
Item 67
a. b. c. d.
Hand grip Hilt Carrying handle Cutlass
Item 68
a. b. c. d.
Picasso Test approval star Ricasso Neck Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-26
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Directions for Items 69 Through 72
Using the diagram below, identify items 69 through 72 on the sword.
Item 69
a. b. c. d.
Foible Blade edge True edge Wilkinson edge
Item 70
a. b. c. d.
Foible Cutting edge Blade Percussion point
Item 71
a. b. c. d.
Percussion point Fuller Foible False edge
Item 72
a. b. c. d.
False edge Foible Fuller Percussion point Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-27
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued Directions for Items 73 Through 77
Using the diagram below, identify items 73 through 77 on the sword.
Item 73
a. b. c. d.
Wilkinson edge False edge Percussion point Foible
Item 74
a. b. c. d.
False edge Wilkinson edge Foible Percussion point
Item 75
a. b. c. d.
Quillion Forte Ricasso Blade
Item 76
a. b. c. d.
Upper blade Ricasso Forte Quillion
Item 77
a. b. c. d.
Hilt Grips Handle Knuckle bow Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-28
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 78
The sword is the correct size when the tip of the sword is a. b. c. d.
Item 79
eye level at carry sword. 3 inches above the ground at present sword. on line with the center of your ear opening. 6 inches above the ground at the scabbard carry.
The sword is worn a. on the left side of the body in the scabbard placed inside the frog. b. on the right side of the body at carry sword at all times. c. on the left side of the body if the carrier is right-handed and opposite for left handed carriers. d. as dictated by local drill and ceremony regulations.
Item 80
The sword is drawn whenever you are with armed troops or you a. b. c. d.
are ready to move from one location to another. approach an officer. are in command of a unit. think there is a good reason. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-29
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 81
A Marine should assume carry sword when any manual of arms movement has been ordered except: parade rest, at ease, rest, present arms, order arms, eyes right (left), and changing position in formation at quick time. What are the other two exceptions? a. Giving commands and returning the weapon to the armory b. Addressing and being addressed by a senior and giving commands c. Receiving the preparatory command for and while marching at quick time and after the platoon has been dismissed d. After executing return sword and while receiving the command of execution from at ease or parade rest
Item 82
When marching with the sword at the carry, you should swing your arms naturally and a. hold the scabbard with your left hand. b. hold your left elbow stiff to make it symmetrical with your right arm. c. switch your sword carriage to your left arm when your right arm gets tired. d. do not hold the scabbard with your left hand.
Item 83
Hold the sword ____________________ when you march at double time and a. forward of the chest remembering to swing the arm; rotate the drag of the scabbard forward. b. diagonally across the chest with the sharp edge towards the front; hold the scabbard with your left hand just below the frog. c. both hands across the body at the port; have to be aware of the bouncing scabbard. d. by the grip under the right arm remembering to pinch the elbow to the body; grasp the scabbard by the upper end. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-30
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 84
Draw sword is a a. b. c. d.
Item 85
When the sword slants down to the front with the point 3 inches from the deck and the true edge of the blade turned down best describes a. b. c. d.
Item 86
three-count movement when halted and at attention. two-count movement when halted or marching manual. static movement at the beginnings of formation. one-count movement at the commander’s discretion.
present arms. order sword. parade rest when armed with a sword. at ease when armed with a sword.
When moving from order sword to carry sword, the sword should be a. at a 45-degree angle across the chest and ready for double time. b. ready for return sword at the bearer’s own unspoken command. c. locked into the wrist when bringing it and in front of the face to give the appropriate salutation or greeting. d. locked into a vertical position when the blade reaches your shoulder seam.
Item 87
On the preparatory command of present arms, the sword will be a. straight out at a 45-degree angle, dropping it down and vertically with the thumb along the shoulder seam. b. raised up to the level of and 6 inches in front of your neck with the blade at a 30-degree angle. c. pulled from the scabbard when walking, brought out at a 45-degree angle and up in front of the body. d. retained in the scabbard and a hand salute will be rendered. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-31
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 88
When executing eyes right (left), when is the command “READY, FRONT” given? a. After the true edge of the sword is turned down in preparation for the command of execution. b. When the last man of the platoon passes by the reviewing officer. c. When you are six paces passed the reviewing officer. d. As you pass the second flag set up in the parade reviewing area.
Item 89
Return sword is executed as a a. two-count command on your own and returning to the position of attention. b. self-executed command after being directed to do so by the staff commander and returning to the position of attention thereafter. c. three-count command ending with snapping the sword into the scabbard and coming to the position of attention simultaneously on the third count. d. self-inflicted command when drilling alone, which should be heard by the evaluator.
Item 90
When executing parade rest with a sword, you may a. b. c. d.
Item 91
lower the point of the sword to the deck. return sword and assume the normal parade rest position as if unarmed. keep the sword at the carry position if you wish. let the blade fall across your body and into your left hand and hold the sword across your body.
What are the two types of flags used by the Marine Corps? a. b. c. d.
Organizational and guidons Guidons and national Streamers and guidons Organizational and national Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-32
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 92
Which is the distinguishing organizational flag authorized for and bearing the title of a designated unit of the Fleet Marine Force? a. b. c. d.
Item 93
Colors covered with a canvas or leather type of shell defines the term a. b. c. d.
Item 94
standards. streamer. guidon. national ensign.
When did the Continental Congress adopt the American flag? a. b. c. d.
Item 96
covered. retired. cased. stowed.
A flag mounted on a vehicle is called a. b. c. d.
Item 95
Organizational colors Battle standard Guidon Battle pennant
4 July 1776 14 June 1777 4 July 1777 14 June 1776
Where is the national ensign displayed when in the company of other colors? a. b. c. d.
On the left or honor position Separated by one lateral pace to the right In the center of the group as long as it is on the tallest staff Always given the marching right or the honor point Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-33
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 97
The universal custom to display the national ensign is a. b. c. d.
Item 98
from 0800 to sunset. from 0800 to 1830. from sunrise to sunset. 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
The national flag is dipped in respect to heads of state and at war memorials. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 99
As a universal distress signal, the national flag can be displayed with the union down. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 100
It is not appropriate to carry the national flag flat or horizontally, but always aloft and free. Neither is it to be used as a covering for a ceiling. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 101
The national flag can be displayed where it can be easily soiled or damaged, as long as you have a replacement. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 102
For storage after use, the national flag is folded into a rectangle and stowed. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-34
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 103
The national flag is used to cover the casket at a military funeral for any member of the military forces on active service, in the Marine Corps Reserve, on the retired lists of USMC and USMCR, or a former member of the military service discharged under any kind of condition. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 104
The national flag is placed lengthwise with the union at the head and over the left shoulder of the deceased, which is the reverse of that prescribed for displaying it vertically against a wall. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 105
The flag may be lowered into the grave and committed to the deep for a burial at sea. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 106
The interment flag is furnished at government expense for the nearest kin at the conclusion of the interment. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 107
In 1876, Marines carried the national colors (the Stars and Stripes) with ________________ embroidered in yellow on the middle red stripe. a. b. c. d.
Don’t Tread on Me U.S. Marine Corps To the Shores of Tripoli From Tripoli to the Halls of Montezuma Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-35
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 108
At the time of the Vera Cruz landing in 1914, Marines carried a design of ____________ with a laurel wreath encircling the Marine Corps emblem in the center. A ______ ribbon above the emblem carried the words U.S. Marine Corps while another scarlet ribbon below the emblem carried the motto, a. b. c. d.
Item 109
Marine Corps Order No. 4 of ____________ designated gold and scarlet as the official colors of the U.S. Marine Corps, but was not incorporated until _____________. This new design reflected what was essentially that of a. b. c. d.
Item 110
scarlet and gold; blue; The First Team. gold field; scarlet; First to Fight. blue field; scarlet; Semper Fidelis. scarlet field; blue; From the Shores of Tripoli.
18 Nov 1775; 23 July 1876; the Stars and Stripes. 2 April 1921; 23 January 1961; the Viet Nam era Marine Corps standard. 23 May 1914; 14 March 1922; the World War II Marine Corps standard. 18 April 1925, 18 January 1939; today’s Marine Corps standard.
The Marine Corps organizational flag shall be constructed of one or two plies of lightweight scarlet ________________, excluding the headings and fringe. a. b. c. d.
cotton duct, 56 inches top to bottom, 76 inches long gortex, 56 inches on the fly, 42 inches on the hoist nylon, 52 inches on the hoist by 66 inches on the fly resilient material, 56 inches long, 42 inches vertically Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-36
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 111
The Marine Corps standard shall contain a. 2½ inches of golden-yellow fringe, embroidered components of the Marine Corps insignia, and staff a cord. b. embroidered unit identification; eagle, globe, anchor, golden-yellow fringe, and battle streamers. c. gold silk fringe, battle streamers, Marine Corps insignia, and unit identification. d. staff a cord, 2½ inches of ivory fringe, Marine Corps insignia, and embroidered unit awards.
Item 112
A joint service specification designates Marine Corps flags as Type III flags. The three types of organizational standards are a. b. c. d.
Item 113
Where will guidons be displayed and when? a. b. c. d.
Item 114
Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3. colors, standards, and guidons. garrison, post, and storm. national, Marine Corps, and unit battle colors.
The battalion headquarters for holidays and parades only The company headquarters between morning and evening colors The battalion commander’s office when the company is not in the field The company commander’s office when the commander is present
There are _________ positions of the guidon. a. b. c. d.
four five six seven Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-37
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 115
At present guidon, the guidon is carried a. across the chest of the bearer and slightly forward with the edge of the spearhead facing down. b. vertically with the left across the bearer’s chest and horizontal to the deck. c. horizontal to the deck and resting in the pit of the right arm so the sharp edge of the spearhead is face down. d. at a 45-degree angle to the front and under the bearer’s right arm pit with the spearhead down.
Item 116
The Marine Corps Uniform Regulations gives instructions on how to a. b. c. d.
Item 117
The two types of inspections conducted are clothing and equipment and a. b. c. d.
Item 118
buy new uniforms. dry-clean your uniforms. wear your the uniform. preserve your uniform once you get out of the Marine Corps.
vehicles. service record book. hygiene. personnel.
What are the basic guidelines for the clothing and equipment inspections? a. Make sure each Marine has all of their prescribed clothing and equipment, his or her own gear, and all their gear is clean and serviceable. b. Establish a routine on inspections and all the gear is displayed in the same order. c. Fill out a missing gear statement in a timely manner so supply can order the prescribed gear. d. Let Marines get a lesson on time lines in regards to how long it takes to clean his or her gear and check for serviceable gear. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-38
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 119
When conducting a personnel inspection, what is the main guideline to follow? a. b. c. d.
Item 120
Spend 5 minutes on each Marine. Look at each Marine differently because you are trying to find trends. Look at each Marine the same, top to bottom, same order of sequence. Look only at the new Marines to see if their section leaders prepared them for the inspection.
What is reverse planning? a. Letting the plan start at the lowest level in the chain of command for the inspection b. Giving the inspector an opportunity to plan for an inspection from the top to bottom of the chain of command c. Having small inspections before the big inspection d. Letting the inspector see all the Marines and their gear
Item 121
What are the guidelines for reverse planning when determining the time needed for an inspection? a. b. c. d.
Item 122
Pre-inspections Commanders involvement Planning and preparation Inspections
What is the purpose of a preliminary inspection? a. b. c. d.
Gives the junior Marines a chance to inspect Tells the NCO what to look for during an inspection Lets the unit know what to inspect for in the inspection Allows sufficient time for the unit to correct discrepancies before the scheduled inspection Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-39
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 123
When conducting a preliminary inspection, what is the main guideline to follow? a. b. c. d.
Item 124
Where can you find proper fitting and authorized alterations for uniform items? a. b. c. d.
Item 125
Marine Corps Uniform Fitting and Alterations Manual Marine Battle Drill Handbook Naval Uniform Regulations NCO Leadership Handbook
Grooming standards for both male and female hair a. b. c. d.
Item 126
Spend 5 minutes on each Marine. Look at each Marine differently because you are trying to find trends. Look at each Marine the same. Look only at the new Marines to see if their section leaders prepared them for the inspection.
must be neatly in shaped, evenly graduated, and non-eccentric. follow the local trends. depend on your nationality. must be put up if it gets in your way.
What are the two types of equipment displays? a. b. c. d.
Wall locker and junk on the bunk Wall locker and personnel Junk on the bunk and personnel Personnel and equipment display Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-40
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the review lesson items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Answer d b b a c b c b d a b b b a b d b c d a a d c a c b c b d c b a
Reference Page 1-4 and 1-5 1-6 1-11 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-15 1-15 1-15 1-16 1-17 1-17 1-17 1-17 1-17 1-24 1-24 1-25 through 1-30 1-30 1-30 2-5 2-7 2-7 2-9 2-10 and 2-11 2-12 2-14 2-15 2-22 2-22 2-24 2-25 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-41
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Answers, continued
Item Number 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65
Answer b b b d b b a d b c a d c b d b c c b a d c a d a a b d c b a a d
Reference Page 3-4 and 3-5 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-16 3-16 3-17 3-22 and 3-23 3-24 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-33 3-33 3-33 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-10 4-12 and 4-13 4-19 4-25 4-34 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-42
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Answers, continued
Item Number 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
Answer c b c c c b a d d a c b c a c c d b a b d b c c a d b c a b
Reference Page 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-42 4-43 4-43 4-44 4-44 4-45 4-46 4-47 4-48 4-50 4-51 4-52 4-59 4-59 4-59 4-59 4-60 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-43
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Answers, continued
Item Number 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126
MCI Course 8013A
Answer d c b a a b b b a b a b c d c a a b d c c d a c b c d c a a a
R-44
Reference Page 4-62 4-62 4-63 4-63 4-63 4-63 4-64 4-65 4-65 4-65 4-65 4-66 4-66 4-67 4-68 4-68 4-70 4-71 4-73 4-75 5-3 5-4 5-4 5-14 5-14 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-21 5-45 and 5-46 5-48
Review Lesson Examination
8013A
MILITARY STUDIES (8013A) Course Introduction
Scope
An outstanding Marine NCO must have the ability to train and advise Marines on many different subjects. You must be technically and tactically proficient in these subjects to accomplish this task. This course discusses a variety of subjects that will enhance your ability to assist junior Marines in their quest to be better Marine leaders. Though the subjects are considerably larger than this course can handle, this is merely a starting point in responding to inquiries from your junior Marines who are striving to become Marine leaders.
References
The following references were used in the writing of this course: · · · · · · ·
Manual for Courts-Martial, United States (2000) Edition. JAG Instruction 5800.7C, Manual of the Judge Advocate General. MCRP 5-12.1A, Law of Land Warfare. MCRP 4-11.8A, Food Services Reference. Army Pamphlet 27-10, Military Justice. Marine Corps University Archives Simmons, Edwin Howard, The United States Marines, A History, 3rd Edition · Department of the Navy, Naval Historical Center. · www.marinemedals.com · www.usmc.mil/historical.nsf · www.history.navy.mil · MCO P5060.20 Pt 1/Pt 2, Marines Corps Drill and Ceremonies Manual. · MCO P10520.3B, Marine Corps Flag Manual. · MCO P1020.34F, Marine Corps Uniform Regulations. · TM 10120-15/1, Marine Corps Fitting and Alterations Manual. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
i
Course Introduction
Course Introduction, Continued
Table of Contents
This course contains the following study units: Study Unit -1 2 3 4 5 --
Title Course Introduction Non-Judicial Punishment (NJP) The Law of Land Warfare History and Contributions of Marine Noncommissioned Officers (NCOs) Drill Uniforms and Inspections Review Lesson Exercise
Page i 1-1 2-1 3-1 4-1 5-1 R-1
Estimated Study Time
You will spend about 12 hours and 30 minutes completing this course. This includes the time to study the text, complete the exercises, and take the final exam.
Reserve Retirement Credits
You will earn four retirement credits after you complete this course. You can earn reserve retirement credits at the rate of one credit for each 3 hours of estimated study time. Note: If you are awarded credits for drill attendance during drill periods, reserve retirement credits are not awarded for MCI study time.
Summary
The all-important gateways to successfully complete this course are summarized in the table below: Step 1 2 3
After you… Enroll in the program Complete the self-paced text Pass the final examination
Then you will… Receive your program material. Arrange to take the final examination. Receive a course completion certificate.
Note: For more information, refer to the Program Guide.
MCI Course 8013A
ii
Course Introduction
STUDY UNIT 1 NON-JUDICIAL PUNISHMENT (NJP) Overview
Estimated Study Time
2 hour, 45 minutes
Unit Scope
This unit addresses the use of information required in the professional development of a senior NCO. This unit of study will enhance knowledge, benefit training, and help maintain discipline within a unit. The premise of this unit is every Marine should have a basic understanding of the Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ) and non-judicial punishment (NJP).
Learning Objectives
After completing this study unit, you should be able to
Unit Content
·
Explain the rights of the accused to an accused suspect.
·
Identify proper documenting of a charge sheet.
This study unit contains the following lessons: Topic Lesson 1 Fundamentals Lesson 2 Article 31 Lesson 3 Documenting the Offense
MCI Course 8013A
1-1
See Page 1-3 1-9 1-25
Study Unit 1
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
1-2
Study Unit 1
LESSON 1 FUNDAMENTALS Introduction
Estimated Study Time
20 minutes
Lesson Scope
This lesson will provide background information critical to understanding non-judicial punishment (NJP) and will identify the two basic elements of Article 31 under the Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ).
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to
In This Lesson
·
Describe the references for NJP.
·
Identify the source authority for self-incrimination protection.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction References Self-Incrimination Protection Lesson 1 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
1-3
See Page 1-3 1-4 1-6 1-7
Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
References
Multiple Sources
The system of military justice gets its authority from many sources. Just as a Marine must follow his or her chain of command, you must also research information from all the military justice sources.
References of Information
The table below lists various sources of information for military justice: Source Constitution of the · United States of America
Information Basic source that authorizes a separate system of criminal law in the military
·
·
Authority from Article I, section stating that Congress shall have the power …to make rules for the government and regulation of the land and naval forces… Congress enacted in 1950
·
Military Justice Act of 1968 revised
·
Provides a separate system of military criminal law for the armed forces
·
Referred to as the code
·
Contains 140 articles that form a basis for administering justice for the Armed Forces of the United States
Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ)
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-4
Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
References, Continued
References of Information, continued
Source Manual for Courts-Martial · (MCM)
Manual of the Judge Advocate General (JAGMAN)
MCI Course 8013A
1-5
Information A regulatory supplement that explains UCMJ provisions
·
An executive order of the president
·
Article 36 authorizes the president to issue regulations prescribing the procedure to follow before military tribunals, including the rules of evidence
·
Article 56 authorizes the president to establish limits of punishment for most offenses
·
Provides the force and effect of law
· ·
Must be complied with Published by JAG of the Navy
·
Contains additional provisions
·
Explains how to carry out and supplement the MCM relative to Navy and Marine Corps service members
Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
Self-Incrimination Protection
Source Authority
The Fifth Amendment of the Constitution of the United States grants the privilege against self-incrimination.
Military Application
The Fifth Amendment protection applies procedurally to military personnel through the provisions of Article 31, UCMJ. To be admissible in a courtmartial, the accused makes a pretrial statement, which must meet the requirements of Article 31, UCMJ. These requirements are described in detail in the next lesson. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-6
Study Unit 1, Lesson 1
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete the exercise items 1 through 3 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
Congress enacted which of the NJP references listed below in 1950? a. b. c. d.
Item 2
Which of the following is a major reference source that explains NJP? a. b. c. d.
Item 3
Manual of the Judge Advocate General Constitution of the United States of America Uniform Code of Military Justice Manual for Courts-Martial
Battle Skills Guidebook Warfighting Handbook Manual for Courts-Martial Commanding Officers Leadership Book
The privilege of self-incrimination is granted by the _____ Amendment of the Constitution of the United States. a. b. c. d.
Third Fourth Fifth Sixth Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-7
Study Unit 1, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3
MCI Course 8013A
Answer c c c
1-8
Reference 1-4 1-5 1-6
Study Unit 1, Lesson 1 Exercise
LESSON 2 ARTICLE 31 Introduction
Estimated Study Time
25 minutes
Lesson Scope
This lesson explains Article 31 of the UCMJ in detail. This article ensures that protection from self-incrimination is provided to military members suspected of committing a crime.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to ·
Identify the contents of Article 31 by paragraph.
·
Identify the two parts of Article 31 rights.
·
Describe the proper procedure for advising accused suspects of rights.
·
Identify who can give Article 31 warning.
·
Identify when Article 31 warning should be given.
·
State the importance of properly advising accused suspects of rights.
·
Identify specific situations where Article 31 warning and waiver are required or not required. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-9
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Introduction, Continued
In This Lesson
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Contents The Suspect’s Rights Advising the Suspect The Importance of Properly Advising the Suspect Specific Issues on Article 31 Rights Lesson 2 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
1-10
See page 1-9 1-11 1-13 1-15 1-17 1-18 1-20
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Contents
Protection From Incriminating Yourself
The contents of Article 31, UCMJ by paragraph are quoted in the table below:
Paragraph a
b
Contents No person subject to this chapter may compel any person to incriminate himself, or to answer any question that may tend to incriminate him. No person subject to the chapter may interrogate, or request any statement from an accused or a person suspected of an offense without first informing him of the nature of the accusation and advising him that he does not have to make any statement regarding the offense of which he is accused or suspected and any statement made by him may be used as evidence against him in a trial by court-martial.
Remarks Paragraph (a) of Article 31, UCMJ is a paraphrase of that portion of the Fifth Amendment that protects a citizen from being a witness against himself. Paragraph (b) of Article 31, UCMJ is the equivalent to the Miranda Rights that civilians must be advised of before they can be questioned pertaining to an offense that they are believed to have committed.
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-11
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Contents, Continued
Protection From Incriminating Yourself, continued
MCI Course 8013A
Paragraph c
Contents No person subject to this chapter may compel any person to make a statement or to produce evidence before any military tribunal if the statement or evidence is not material to the issue and may tend to degrade him.
d
No statement obtained from any person in violation of this article, or obtained through the use of coercion, unlawful influence, or unlawful inducement may be received in evidence against him in a trial by court-martial.
1-12
Remarks Paragraph (c) of Article 31 protects military personnel from having to testify to immaterial and degrading matters. This kind of testimony would have a tendency to disgrace the witnesses or to bring them into disrepute even if they would not be subject to any real danger of prosecution. Paragraph (d) forbids the introduction of evidence obtained in violation of Article 31 into a courtmartial (evidence obtained without a proper warning or through coercion or unlawful influence). Statements, confessions, and admissions must be voluntary if they are to be admissible in a courtmartial.
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
The Suspect’s Rights
Elements
There are two basic elements of Article 31: · ·
Warning
Warning Waiver
A warning is given so the accused suspect is informed and advised in compliance with Article 31, UCMJ. Before asking the suspect a question, he or she must be warned and advised of their rights: ·
(Suspect’s name), you are suspected of the offense(s) of (a general description or the offense, such as larceny or assault).
·
You have the right to remain silent.
·
Any statement you make can be used as evidence against you in a trial by court-martial.
·
You have the right to consult with a lawyer, to have a lawyer with you during all questioning, and to seek the lawyer's advice before you answer any questions.
·
If you desire, you may obtain a civilian lawyer at your own expense.
·
If you cannot afford or do not desire a civilian lawyer, a military lawyer can be appointed to you without cost.
·
If you decide to answer questions now without a lawyer present, you will have the right to stop answering at any time. You also have the right to stop answering questions at any time in order to obtain a lawyer. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-13
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
The Suspect’s Rights, Continued
Waiver
After the warning has been given, make sure the suspect or accused understands his or her rights by asking the three questions listed below: ·
(Suspect’s name), do you want a lawyer? (Suspect replies.)
·
Do you understand that if you should decide to answer questions, you may stop answering questions at any time? (Suspect replies.)
·
Do you want to answer questions and make a statement? (Suspect replies.)
Once the suspect understands their rights, then he or she can freely, knowingly, and intelligently waive them if so desired.
MCI Course 8013A
1-14
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Advising the Suspect
Who Warns Suspects
Article 31(b), UCMJ imposes the duty to warn on only those persons subject to this code. However, by necessary implication, the duty is also imposed on any person acting as an agent of the military authorities for the purpose of furthering a military investigation.
When to Warn Suspects
Give the accused suspect Article 31 rights before any interrogation begins or whenever an act constitutes a statement of admission.
Verbatim Reading
A verbatim (word for word) reading of Article 31 rights is the method to use to advise the suspect of his or her rights. The two elements (warning and waiver) of Article 31 should be stated exactly as published in Article 31 without error to the suspect or accused.
Procedural Recommendations
The manner in which to advise suspects of their rights is as follows: ·
Identify yourself to the suspect.
·
Read the Article 31 Warning Card verbatim without error to the suspect.
·
Ask the suspect three questions:
·
·
Do you want a lawyer?
·
Do you understand that if you should decide to answer questions, you may stop answering questions at any time?
·
Do you want to answer questions and make a statement?
Terminate the reading if the suspect: ·
Does not understand his or her rights
·
Declines to answer questions or make a statement
·
Requests a lawyer Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-15
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Advising the Suspect, Continued
Procedural Recommendations, continued
·
Document the suspect’s Article 31 advisement on the Suspects Rights and Acknowledgement/Statement Form.
·
Instruct the suspect to read and sign the Suspects Rights and Acknowledgement/Statement Form.
Note: Intoxication either by alcohol or drugs (illegal or prescribed) can prevent a suspect or an accused from understanding the warning. Delay interrogation until the effects of the intoxicants are reduced and the accused or suspect can understand the warning. Otherwise, the warning would be ineffective and improper.
MCI Course 8013A
1-16
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
The Importance of Properly Advising Suspects
Understanding the Warning
At trial, the admissibility of a confession or admission of guilt depends on his or her signing of the Suspects Rights and Acknowledgement/Statement Form, which is in compliance with Article 31. Of course, no one can know what the accused did or did not understand. If the defense contends the accused did not understand his or her rights, that burden of proof rests with the defense and not the trial counsel.
Written Advice and Waiver
If a written advice and waiver of the suspect's rights is available, it may be introduced to show what the accused saw, possibly read, and signed. This evidence does no more than show the circumstances from which the court could conclude the pretrial statement of the accused was in compliance with Article 31 and was voluntary. However, the defense counsel may introduce testimony of the accused to show that he or she did not understand their rights. The court decides whether any statement is admissible.
MCI Course 8013A
1-17
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Specific Issues on Article 31 Rights
Statements
Visual Inspection
Article 31(b) prohibits the interrogation of an individual or the requesting of a statement from an accused person or suspect without first giving him or her the prescribed warning. The key word is statement—verbal statements include ·
An interrogation, which is any attempt to induce an accused or a suspect to make a verbal statement. In other words, an interrogation is a question or group of questions.
·
Some physical acts that a suspect performs at the interrogator's request may be considered verbal statements in court.
Visual inspection of the person of an accused or suspect does not violate any right provided by the Constitution or by any provision of the UCMJ. An accused or suspect can be compelled to submit to · · · · ·
Problem
Fingerprinting Be photographed Write or speak for identification Assume a stance Make a particular gesture
The problem is deciding when a situation requires the Article 31 rights to be read, understood, and waived, and when it is not required. A problem arises when the accused or suspect is not asked to make a statement, but asked simple questions to provide the investigators with physical evidence or to assist them in getting it. Note: Whenever an act may constitute a statement of admission, an Article 31 warning and waiver is required. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-18
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Specific Issues on Article 31 Rights, Continued
Examples
The impact of Article 31 rights on admissibility in court for specific situations is cited in the table below: Example Situation A The person who is accused or suspected of an offense is asked to identify his clothing among clothing belonging to others. The action of the accused in complying with this particular request has been determined to be an acknowledgement of ownership and is considered a statement. B A Marine’s superior suspects the accused of having marijuana and informs him, “I think that you know what I want; give it to me.” So the Marine points to his shirt where the marijuana is then discovered. Since the Marine handed over the marijuana without receiving an Article 31 warning, the marijuana is not admissible at trial. C Examining the hands of a larceny suspect to determine the presence of a stain caused by stolen money, which had been dusted with a fluorescent powder.
MCI Course 8013A
1-19
Article 31 Discussion An Article 31 warning is needed before the request is made so the clothes can be admitted in a court-martial.
Handing over a package of marijuana cigarettes by the suspect to the superior was inadmissible at trial because an Article 31 warning of rights did not precede the act.
This falls under the category of visual inspection and need not be prefaced by an Article 31 warning.
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete the exercise items 1 through 9 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
Which paragraph under Article 31 states: No statement obtained from any person in violation of this article or obtained through the use of coercion, unlawful influence, or unlawful inducement, may be received in evidence against him in a trial by court-martial? a. b. c. d.
Item 2
Paragraph a Paragraph b Paragraph c Paragraph d
What are the two basic elements of Article 31 rights? (1) _________________________________________________________ (2) _________________________________________________________
Item 3
How many questions are in the waiver element of Article 31? a. b. c. d.
Item 4
Three Four Five Six
When must Article 31 warning and waiver be administered to the accused suspect? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-20
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 5
Who is responsible for advising an accused suspect of the Article 31 rights? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________
Item 6
How must the Article 31 rights be read to the accused suspect? a. b. c. d.
Item 7
Verbatim Slowly Whether or not the individual understands, he or she is guilty. Suspects are not required to have their rights read.
In the case of an intoxicated or drug-induced (prescribed or illegally) suspect, what is the proper procedure you should carry out? a. Read the Article 31 rights immediately because of the regulations. b. Ask the suspect if he or she wants to drink some coffee. c. Allow time to pass before reading the warning, but proceed with the interrogation. d. Delay interrogation until the effects of the intoxicants are reduced and the accused or suspect can understand the warning.
Item 8
The admissibility of a confession from a suspect depends on his or her a. b. c. d.
willingness to give you the truth. understanding the rights under the Article 31 warning. having a lawyer present. signing of the Suspects Rights and Acknowledgement/Statement Form, which is in compliance with Article 31. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-21
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 9
Which of the following situations requires Article 31 warning and waiver to be administered? a. Visual inspection b. Asking simple questions c. Examining the hands of a suspect for residue from an item handled during a crime d. Requiring a suspect to write or speak for identification, to assume a stance, or to make a particular gesture Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-22
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4
5
6 7 8 9
MCI Course 8013A
Answer d (1) Warning (2) Waiver a · Before any interrogation begins · Whenever an act constitutes a statement of admission Any person acting as an agent of the military authorities for the purpose of furthering a military investigation a d d b
1-23
Reference 1-12 1-13 1-14 1-15
1-15
1-15 1-16 1-17 1-18
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
1-24
Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise
LESSON 3 DOCUMENTING THE OFFENSE Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope
This lesson provides the information you will need to charge someone of an UCMJ violation. As a Marine sergeant, you will be required to document an offense of the UCMJ. Once you have identified the violation, you will be able to submit a charge sheet for processing.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to
In This Lesson
·
State the punitive articles of the UCMJ.
·
Identify the components of a punitive article.
·
Identify who can submit a charge sheet.
·
State the basic information required on a charge sheet.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Punitive Articles Narrowing the Charges Example Article Submit a Charge Sheet. Lesson 3 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
1-25
See Page 1-25 1-26 1-28 1-29 1-32 1-35
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Punitive Articles
Reference
The offenses are listed in the Manual for Courts-Martial (MCM) as punitive articles 77 through 134. The MCM contains the UCMJ (Appendix 2) and explanatory material needed to implement the code. Of particular importance is Part IV, which contains a discussion of military offenses and a listing of their elements. Note: The Manual for Courts-Martial (MCM), (19xx edition) is available through the Government Printing Office, Washington, DC.
Components
The six components of a punitive article are discussed in the MCM in the following sequence: · · · · · ·
Example
Text of the article Elements of the offense or offenses Explanation Lesser included offenses Maximum punishment Sample specifications
Article 86, unauthorized absence consists of five offenses that in turn are composed of separate elements. The offenses are ·
Failure to go to appointed place of duty consisting of three elements.
·
Going from appointed place of duty consisting of three elements.
·
Absence from unit, organization, or place of duty consisting of four elements.
·
Abandoning watch or guard.
·
Absence from unit, organization, or place of duty with intent to avoid maneuvers or field exercises consisting of five elements. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-26
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Punitive Articles, Continued
Determining Article Violated
From any given set of facts, which crime has been committed, you will determine the nature of the offense the accused has allegedly committed. It is critical that you avoid erroneous determination. Follow the four steps listed in the table below: Step 1
Action Get all the facts about the incident: · · ·
An informal investigation A formal investigation A report from an investigative agency · Criminal Investigation Division (CID) · Naval Criminal Investigation Service (NCIS) · Local civilian law enforcement agencies · Witnessing the events yourself
2
3
4
Note: The MCM requires a commanding officer to start a preliminary inquiry of an offense that may be tried by court-martial. Check the list of offenses for the one(s) that fit the facts (see Contents, Part IV, Punitive Articles of the MCM. Read the list and select any possible offenses. Note: Each offense is assigned a number such as Article 85, Desertion; Article 86, Unauthorized Absence, etc. Turn to the offense(s) you selected. Each offense is discussed separately within Part IV, MCM. After the text, a paragraph entitled ELEMENTS sets forth the essential conditions that must exist to convict an accused of the offense. These essential conditions are called the elements of an offense. To be found guilty of an offense, · ·
The essential elements must match the facts of the case. All the elements must be proven beyond a reasonable doubt.
If one or more elements are absent, the Marine did not commit that offense.
MCI Course 8013A
1-27
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Narrowing the Charges
Reference
An individual may be charged with more than one offense, but each offense must have its own specification. Part IV, MCM references the language for almost every charge and specification. The Rules for Court-Martial (R.C.M.) 307(c) of the MCM discusses in detail how to prepare the charge and specification once the offense has been identified. The information that follows is an example of an article’s structure and considerations you must make when applying that charge to a suspect taken directly from the MCM.
MCI Course 8013A
1-28
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Example Article
Article 86
Article 86, Unauthorized Absence (UA) ·
Contains five separate UA offenses (see Punitive Articles, Example in this lesson).
·
Covers every case not provided for elsewhere in which any member of the Armed Forces is, through the member's own fault, not at the place where the member is required to be at a prescribed time. It is not necessary that the person be absent entirely from military jurisdiction and control.
For purposes of this course, only the first offense will be discussed in detail. In actual practice, you would have to read through all five offenses of Article 86 to determine which offenses were violated. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-29
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Example Article, Continued
Offense
The first offense of Article 86 is Failure to Go to Appointed Place of Duty. To charge someone with the first offense, you must be able to prove all three essential elements of proof. The table below lists what the elements mean to you as a leader: Element Discussion (a) That a certain The ultimate offense. An oral or written order is authority appointed sufficient to appoint a time and place of duty. a certain time and · Violations of written orders that appoint a time and place of duty for place of duty can be charged; however, the accused the accused. will only be punished for his unauthorized absence (for which a lesser punishment is permitted). The ultimate offense is not the violation of the order, but the absence that violated the order. · (b) That the accused knew of that time and place…
Generally, violation of an oral order that appoints a time and place of duty can only be prosecuted as UA. Knowledge of the order. The accused knew or should have known of that time and place of duty. This element may be proven by either ·
·
Direct Evidence ·
A witness testifies that at 1410 he heard the accused say, “Oh, oh – I’m in trouble now. The Gunny told me to report to the CO at 1400.”
·
Evidence that tends to prove or disprove a fact in issue. In this example, the fact in issue is knowledge of the order.
Circumstantial Evidence ·
Evidence such as the Plan of the Day (POD) was properly posted and included an announcement stating the time and place of duty.
·
Tends to prove knowledge; does not absolutely prove knowledge unless the accused read the POD or heard the announcement. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-30
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Example Article, Continued
Offense, continued
MCI Course 8013A
Element (c) That the · accused, without authority, failed to go to the appointed place of duty at the time prescribed.
Discussion Completion of the Offense. The accused failed to go to his or her appointed place of duty. The offense is complete at the moment the accused fails to appear at the appointed place of duty at the prescribed time. The fact that the accused later went to his or her appointed place of duty is not a defense. That the accused finally made an appearance may lessen the severity of the sentence that may be awarded. However, the Marine is still in violation of this article by failing to appear at the prescribed time.
·
Without Authority. The key words in all absence offenses are without authority. Absence is not an offense. It must be coupled with the fact that the absence was without authority to constitute an offense under the UCMJ. A Marine may be absent with authority from his or her unit or place of duty as on liberty, leave, temporary additional duty (TAD), etc. Therefore, the allegation must be that a particular absence was without authority before that absence becomes an offense under the UCMJ.
·
Use of Documents. Failure to go to an appointed place of duty at a prescribed time in violation of Article 86 is generally proven by official records, a copy of orders directing the time and place for reporting, etc. This offense is easily proven through the introduction of documentary evidence created by the particular order; e.g., a restriction muster, or a log sheet. This order directed a specific accused to be at a specific place at a particular time. His or her absence at that time may be proven by a master sheet or log entry made by the personnel in charge.
1-31
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Submit a Charge Sheet
Who Can Charge the Offense?
Before an NJP may be imposed, the offense must be identified and a charge and specification(s) determined. Once that is done, anyone may initially prepare a charge sheet. This sheet is to be forwarded to a unit’s local legal support section or law center.
DD Form 458
When the offense has been identified, a Charge Sheet, DD Form 458 is prepared. This form must be prepared before any punitive action can be taken.
Elements
There are two elements of a charge sheet: ·
Charge: a one-sentence statement that lists the number and title of the alleged offense.
·
Specification: always included with the charge; it details who committed the offense, when, where, against whom, and under what circumstances. In other words, it specifies all the elements of the particular offense.
A single charge sheet can have multiple charges and specifications on it. The charge and the specification's purpose is to inform the accused of the offenses alleged against him or her so that he or she will have an opportunity to plan a defense against those charges. Example of a Charge
The charge would be as follows: · ·
Example of a Specification
Desertion: Charge I, Violation of the UCMJ, Article 85. Larceny: Charge I, Violation of the UCMJ, Article 121.
In a case of larceny, the specification would be as follows: In that Lance Corporal John Doe, United States Marine Corps did, at Marine Corps Base, Quantico, Virginia, on or about 20 November 1999 stole one wristwatch, of a value of about $95.00, the property of Larry Smith. (See paragraph 46(f)(1), Part IV, MCM, 1984). Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-32
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Submit a Charge Sheet, Continued
The Front View of DD Form 458
The front view of the Charge Sheet, DD Form 458 is identified in the diagram below:
Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
1-33
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Submit a Charge Sheet, Continued
The Back View of DD Form 458
MCI Course 8013A
The back view of Charge Sheet, DD Form 458 is identified in the diagram below:
1-34
Study Unit 1, Lesson 3
Lesson 3 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete the exercise items 1 through 7 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
What are the numbered punitive articles found in the Manual for Courts-Martial (MCM)? a. b. c. d.
Item 2
17 through 34 31 through 76 77 through 134 177 through 234
What are the six components of a punitive article? (1) _________________________________________________________ (2) _________________________________________________________ (3) _________________________________________________________ (4) _________________________________________________________ (5) _________________________________________________________ (6) _________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-35
Study Unit 1 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 3
Who can prepare a charge sheet and forward it to the unit’s local legal support section or law center? a. b. c. d.
Item 4
The commanding general Anyone The legal counsel of the accused The Marine accused of the offense
What basic information is required on the charge sheet? a. b. c. d.
Who and what happened Rights of the accused and request for counsel The commands authority and regulations The charge and specification Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
1-36
Study Unit 1 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
3 4
MCI Course 8013A
1-37
Answer c Text of the article Elements of the offense or offenses Explanation Lesser included offenses Maximum punishment Sample specifications b d
Reference 1-26 1-26
1-32 1-32
Study Unit 1 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
1-38
Study Unit 1 Exercise
STUDY UNIT 2 THE LAW OF LAND WARFARE Overview Estimated Study Time
1 hour, 15 minutes
Unit Scope
Ancient wars were characterized by total and unrestrained violence. Defeated forces and civilians were subjected to wholesale extermination, torture, and slavery. During the Middle Ages, war was studied from both a philosophical and technical perspective, military and political leaders recognized that unlimited war was counterproductive to their objectives. Today, the Laws of War regulates combat.
Learning Objectives
After completing this study unit, you should be able to
In This Study Unit
·
Identify the law of land warfare fundamentals.
·
Identify the rules of engagement
This study unit contains the following lessons: Topic Lesson 1 Law of Land Warfare Fundamentals Lesson 2 Rules of Engagement (ROE)
MCI Course 8013A
2-1
See Page 2-3 2-21
Study Unit 2
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
2-2
Study Unit 2
LESSON 1 LAW OF LAND WARFARE FUNDAMENTALS Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope
Following World War II, the Nuremburg Tribunal, which tried the major German war criminals, declared: International Law is not the product of an international legislature. The law of warfare is to be found not only in treaties, but in the customs and practices of states which gradually obtain universal recognition from the general principles of justice.
This lesson will discuss the purpose for the laws of war. The key to understanding the laws of war is to know the overall objective of war as viewed by the United States. This lesson will show how the laws of war benefit the overall accomplishment of the military mission assigned to achieve that objective. Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to ·
Identify the two main sources for the laws of war.
·
Identify the objective of war.
·
State the purpose for the laws of war.
·
Identify the four basic concepts underlying the laws of war.
·
Identify the nine Marine Corps principles for the laws of war.
·
Identify what constitutes a war crime.
·
Identify methods to prevent war crimes.
·
Identify how to report a war crime. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-3
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Introduction, Continued
In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Sources of Land Warfare War Concepts Underlying the Laws of War Basic Principles of the Laws of War War Crimes Preventing War Crimes Reporting War Crimes Lesson 1 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
2-4
See Page 2-3 2-5 2-7 2-9 2-10 2-12 2-13 2-15 2-16
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Sources of Land Warfare
Main Sources
There are two main sources for the laws of war: · ·
Customary International Law
The customary international law is a body of rules that civilized nations recognize as binding them in their conduct towards one another. This body of rules is established by the custom and practice of a country: · ·
International Custom
Customary International Law Ratified Treaties
International Custom Codified International Laws
International custom, as evidence of a general practice accepted as law, consists of ·
A practice by a number of nations regarding situations falling within the domain of international relations
·
Continuous practice over a long period of time
·
Conception that the practice is required by or is consistent with prevailing international law
·
General acquiescence by other nations
Many customary practices are eventually codified, such as most of the contents of the Geneva Convention. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-5
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Sources of Land Warfare, Continued
Codified International Laws
The codified international laws (Geneva Convention) can become so widely accepted that it is considered customary, even for nations that are not yet a party to a particular international agreement. Customary acts that have become internationally accepted practices are listed below: · · · ·
Ratified Treaties
Formal declarations of war Prisoner exchanges Protection of civilians and non-combatants Communication through neutral third parties
Treaties are formal agreements that are made between two or more countries. Sources for the laws of war are in treaties and international customs, which have been practiced over a long period of time by a large number of countries in the belief that it is required by law. Treaties that establish laws of war and have been ratified by the U.S. Senate are part of the U.S. law. The two main treaties that deal with laws of war are · · · · · ·
The Hague Rules of 1907 The Geneva Convention of 1949 Treatment of prisoners of war Protection of the sick and wounded on land Protection of the sick, wounded, and shipwrecked at sea Protection of civilians during times of war
A Marine in violation of the laws of war would be punished under the UCMJ. Other References
There are numerous references for the law of land warfare. A few of them are listed below: · · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Handbook, On The Law of War For Armed Forces, written by Frederic De Mulinen Army Pamphlet 27-10, The Law of Land Warfare FM 27-10 MCRP 4-11.8B MCRP 5-12.1A
2-6
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
War
Objective of War
The objective of war is to destroy the enemy’s will to resist or change their will until it agrees with the objective set forth by higher authorities. Obeying the laws of war will help accomplish this objective with the least amount of suffering and destruction of personnel and property.
Purposes for Laws of War
There are three purposes for laws of war: · · · · · · ·
Prevent unnecessary suffering of combatants and non-combatants. Safeguard certain fundamental human rights of persons: Prisoners of war Sick and wounded Shipwrecked people Civilians Encourage the restoration of peace.
Constitutional Obligations
The Nation’s law requires that we afford certain rights to persons captured on the battlefield. Every disciplined Marine needs to be aware of this basic philosophy. As the defenders of our Constitution, we have an obligation to enforce its provisions. However, affording this legal protection to captured persons also is of military value.
Prisoner Treatment Effects Military Objective
Warriors developed the general rules on how to treat enemy prisoners of war (EPWs). Lawyers only wrote down what the commanders practiced. We also comply with these rules because it helps us on the battlefield. If the enemy knows that we will treat him with dignity and respect and not harm him, he is more likely to surrender. We also hope these basic rights will be afforded to our Marines if they become prisoners of war. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-7
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
War, Continued
Handling Prisoners
Once a person has surrendered or comes into your custody, it is your duty to ensure they are treated humanely. You must account for each and every EPW from capture until you turn him over to higher headquarters. Initially, treat a captured person as a prisoner of war¾always. Process them according to the five Ss: · · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Search Silence Segregate Safeguard Speed to the rear
2-8
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Concepts Underlying the Laws of War
Four Basic Concepts
The four basic concepts underlying the laws of war are listed below: · · · ·
Military Necessity
Military necessity Proportionality Unnecessary suffering Discrimination
The principle of military necessity justifies the employment of that degree or kind of violence, not forbidden by international law, required to secure the timely submission of the enemy. Military necessity is never accepted as a justification for committing a war crime.
Proportionality
In combat operations, Marines are required to strike a balance between infliction of suffering and the use of force. Marines must apply only the amount of force needed to accomplish the mission.
Unnecessary Suffering
Although suffering cannot be eliminated in war, you must exercise a degree of restraint in combat. Destruction must be limited to that which is necessary, relevant, and proportionate to the accomplishment of legitimate military missions.
Discrimination
Attacks must be directed against a specific military target.
MCI Course 8013A
2-9
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Basic Principles of the Laws of War
Source of Reference
The list of acts covered under various treaties and conventions are extensive. Every leader must review FM 27-10, The Law of Land Warfare, to enhance their knowledge on this subject. The time to teach the Marines in your unit the laws of war is now, not when you are in harms way. The nine basic principles of the laws of war are listed in the table below: Number Principle 1 Marines fight only enemy combatants. While it is perfectly lawful to kill an enemy combatant, it is not legal to intentionally target a civilian who is not taking part in the hostilities. 2 Marines do not harm enemies who surrender. They must disarm them and turn them over to their superior. Giving good treatment of EPWs will encourage more enemies to surrender and shorten the time to achieve victory. It will also encourage the enemy to give better treatment to U.S. prisoners. 3 Marines do not kill or torture prisoners. Killing or torturing an enemy prisoner is a violation of the UCMJ and will be punished harshly. 4 Marines collect and care for the wounded whether friend or foe. Wounded enemy troops will not be left on the battlefield after the engagement is over to suffer a slow and lingering death. 5 Marines do not attack medical personnel, facilities, or equipment. Both friendly and enemy medical personnel are to be encouraged to come to the battlefield in safety to care for the wounded combatants. 6 Marines destroy no more than the mission requires. While it is legal to destroy properties to accomplish the military mission, unnecessary destruction of civilian property wastes resources and detracts from mission accomplishment. 7 Marines treat all civilians humanely. Civilians who are not taking part in the hostilities are to be treated with respect. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-10
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Basic Principles of the Laws of War, Continued
Source of Reference, continued
Number Principle 8 Marines do not steal. Marines respect private property and possessions. A thief is a thief whether in peace or war and will be prosecuted under the UCMJ. 9 Marines should do their best to prevent violations. They must report all violations of the laws of war to their superior. It is not sufficient for the individual Marine to only obey the laws of war, but Marines must use their authority to prevent others from violating the law. Where they cannot prevent a violation, they must report the offense up their chain of command. If the Marine believes his superior is partially responsible for the violation, this report may be made to any other officer in a position of authority. It may also be made to the provost marshal, judge advocate, or even the chaplain.
MCI Course 8013A
2-11
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
War Crimes
Definition
A war crime is the intentional harming of civilians not taking part in the hostilities, enemy prisoners of war, medical personnel, or other noncombatants. While any violation of the laws of war may be considered a war crime, the violations that are directed at these particular protected persons are most likely to be prosecuted harshly.
Examples
In all cases of armed conflict (whether or not there is a declaration of war) acts that violate the Geneva Convention are war crimes. Some examples of war crimes are · · · · · · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Torture Rape Murder Reprisals against EPWs or civilians Mutilation Unnecessary destruction of cultural sites Attacks on medical facilities Faking surrender only to attack Attacking while dressed in enemy uniforms
2-12
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Preventing War Crimes
Morale Courage
Marines must step forward and use moral courage to halt atrocities. The bottom line is if you know in your gut that what is happening is wrong, tell the perpetrators to cease their actions immediately.
Correct Pattern
A review of war crime cases reveals that a pattern of lack of training, boredom, and poor leadership usually occurs just before acts of misconduct toward EPWs, the sick and wounded, and civilians. You should look for this pattern and take affirmative steps to prevent war crimes: · · ·
Conduct Tactical Training
Conduct tactical training. Stress normal military behavior. Provide good leadership.
In all tactical training before deploying, teach the procedures for dealing with situations that can easily become laws of war violations, such as how to · · ·
Handle troublesome EPWs properly. Select a lawful military target in the middle of the civilian community. Respond properly when a white flag is shown, using careful tactical responses.
Under the stress of combat, Marines will respond the way they were trained. Remind Marines that they are authorized to use deadly force and to destroy property only because of military necessity. Tactical situations will dictate confrontation with the enemy. Criminal conduct during a deployment is intolerable, distracts from accomplishment of the military mission, and will be dealt with swiftly. Properly treated, the civilian populace may be a prime source of intelligence information. Reinforce the basic laws of war instruction by emphasizing the nine basic principles of the laws of war. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-13
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Preventing War Crimes, Continued
Stress Normal Military Behavior
Most laws of war violations result from the constant change of combat stress and then long periods of boredom. Good leadership should emphasize normal behavior and positive activity. Constantly remind Marines of normal military behavior standards: ·
· · Provide Good Leadership
Be watchful for signs of · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Maintain high standards of military: · Courtesy · Discipline · Hygiene · Moral conduct Keep your Marines informed. Prevent personal wars or vendettas within the unit and with local civilians.
Personality disorders Stress-related actions Antisocial conduct A breakdown in military discipline and courtesy
2-14
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Reporting War Crimes
Identify Illegal Orders
Orders are presumed to be legal. Remember training is aimed at preventing the issuance of illegal orders. Illegal orders are regarded as a war crime violation. Examples of illegal orders are to · ·
Report the Order
Kill the prisoners. Mutilate the bodies.
The first way you should report the order is by following the chain of command, bypassing the superior who issued the order. The commanding officer has the responsibility and the authority to immediately correct and discipline any misconduct. A second option is to report the order to the military police, if a report cannot be made up the chain of command. If neither the chain of command nor military police are available, report the order to a judge advocate or chaplain.
Procedure
To report an illegal order, follow the steps listed in the table below: Step 1
2 3
MCI Course 8013A
Action Clarify the order.
Example The order is, “Take care of those useless prisoners. You know what to do with them.” Your response should be, “Sir, are you ordering me to kill the helpless enemy prisoners?” Refuse the order. “Sir, I will not shoot the prisoner.” Report the order using the “Colonel, on this date, I was ordered chain of command, but to shoot a prisoner.” bypassing the superior who issued the order.
2-15
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete exercise items 1 through 9 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
List the two main sources for the laws of war. (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________
Item 2
Which two treaties deal specifically with laws of war issues? (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________
Item 3
What is the objective of war? (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________
Item 4
What are the three purposes for the laws of war? (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________ (3) ________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-16
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 5
List the four basic concepts underlying the laws of war. (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________ (3) ________________________________________________________ (4) ________________________________________________________
Item 6
Following the basic principles of the laws of war, what are the proper procedures for handling a wounded foe discovered on the battlefield? ___________________________________________________________
Item 7
Define war crime. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________
Item 8
What three procedures are included in tactical training for preventing war crimes? (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________ (3) ________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-17
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 9
What are the three steps to report an illegal order? (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________ (3) ________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-18
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3
4
5
6 7
8
9
Answer (1) Customary International Law (2) Ratified Treaties (1) The Hague Rules of 1907 (2) The Geneva Convention of 1949 (1) Destroy the enemy’s will to resist. (2) Change their will until it agrees with the objective set forth by higher authorities. (1) Prevent unnecessary suffering of combatants and non-combatants. (2) Safeguard certain fundamental human rights to people such as EPWs, the sick and wounded, civilians, etc. (3) Encourage the restoration of peace. (1) Military necessity (2) Proportionality (3) Unnecessary suffering (4) Discrimination Collect and care for the wounded. The intentional harming of civilians not taking part in the hostilities, enemy prisoners of war, medical personnel, or other non-combatants (1) Handle troublesome enemy prisoners of war properly. (2) Select a lawful military target in the middle of civilian community. (3) Respond properly when a white flag is shown. (1) Clarify the order. (2) Refuse the order. (3) Report the order.
Reference 2-5 2-6 2-7
2-7
2-9
2-10 2-12
2-13
2-15
Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
2-19
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
2-20
Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise
LESSON 2 RULES OF ENGAGEMENT (ROE) Introduction
Estimated Study Time
25 minutes
Lesson Scope
Although the laws of war provide the basic foundation for all military operations, individual Marines should receive detailed rules of engagement (ROE) for each particular exercise. This lesson explains the general principles that apply to rules of engagement.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to
In This Lesson
·
Define the term rules of engagement.
·
Identify the three main purposes of ROE.
·
Name the three classes of persons who are entitled to self-defense.
·
Name the three types of actions that will justify self-defense.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction General Information Self-Defense Lesson 2 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
2-21
See Page 2-21 2-22 2-24 2-27
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
General Information
Rules of Engagement Definition
The Joint Pub 1-02, DOD Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms defines rules of engagement (ROE) as…directives issued by competent military authority which delineate the circumstances and limitations under which United States forces will initiate and/or continue combat engagement with other forces encountered. Higher authorities should establish the ROE to explain proper conduct in detail.
Purposes for ROE
Standing ROE
The three main purposes for ROE are listed below: ·
Provides implementation guidance on the application of force for mission accomplishment
·
Serves as a fire control method of military operations by the civilian and military chain of command
·
Implements the inherent right of self-defense
The Chairman of the Joint Chiefs Instruction 3121.01A dated 15 January 2000 provides the standing rules of engagement (Standing ROE) for U.S. forces. In the absence of superseding guidance, the Standing ROE (SROE) establishes fundamental policies and procedures governing the actions to be taken by U.S. force commanders. The SROE will apply in the event of a military attack against the United States and during all military operations, contingencies, terrorist attacks, or prolonged conflicts outside the territorial jurisdiction of the United States. The SROE was established far in advance of any current deployment. The Chairman’s instruction recognizes that each particular mission will have different levels of threat, different objectives, and different weapons mix. Competent military authorities draft more specific ROE to accomplish a particular mission. The SROE provides guidelines for incorporating ROE development into the crisis action planning and deliberate planning processes by commanders and staffs at all levels. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-22
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
General Information, Continued
Mission ROE
The responsibility of the mission specific ROE is listed below: · ·
G-3—when engaged in operations or crisis action planning G-5—when engaged in deliberate planning
Generally, the staff judge advocate provides assistance in developing specific mission ROE. Restraints and Constraints
ROE are prepared based upon the following: · · · ·
Laws of war (LOW) Political policy Public opinion Military operational constraints
ROE are more restrictive than what the LOW allows. Targeting rules are usually incorporated within the ROE.
MCI Course 8013A
2-23
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
Self-Defense
Of Whom
Marines are authorized by ROE to use deadly force to defend three classes of persons. Those three classes are identified in the table below: Class of Persons Individuals and Self Units
National Interests
Explanation Marines have the inherent right to defend themselves. Marines have the right and obligation to defend U.S. forces, including elements or personnel thereof, and other U.S. forces in the vicinity against a hostile act or hostile intent. Example: In 1983, the Marine Barracks in Beirut, Lebanon was the victim of a suicide bombing. In the investigation, the young Marine sentry explained that he hesitated to chamber a round into his weapon upon the approach of the truck for fear that under his vaguely worded ROE card, he would be committing a war crime. The Marine sentry should have been instructed that he had the right to exercise unit self-defense. Marines have the right to defend U.S. citizens and their property from hostile acts or hostile intent. Note: The SROE do not automatically authorize Marines to defend designated non-U.S. forces, foreign nationals, and their property. Authority to exercise this collective selfdefense is normally retained by the National Command Authority (the President, Secretary of Defense, and National Security Advisor). Therefore, the correct level of authorization to defend non-U.S. forces and nationals should be obtained prior to entering into foreign territory. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-24
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
Self-Defense, Continued
Against What
U.S. forces need not be attacked before they can respond in self-defense. The use of force in peacekeeping, and even in peace enforcement, is normally a measure of last resort. Under those circumstances, attempts should be made to control the situation without the use of force. If force is necessary, the nature, duration, and scope of the force should not exceed the amount required to decisively counter the hostile act or intent. Self-defense force used against a hostile situation is identified in the table below: Situation Act
Intent
Force
Explanation An attack or use of force against U.S. forces and, when national and or collective self-defense has been implemented, against those persons and assets protected by those definitions. The threat of imminent use of force, including the threat of force used to impede or preclude the mission or duties of U.S. forces. Hostile intent is fact specific. Note: Although the classified portions of the SROE contain guidance throughout to the factors that may constitute evidence of hostile intent in various situations, the ultimate decision rests with the commander against whom the potential hostile intent is being demonstrated. Any force (civilian, terrorist, paramilitary, or military) that has committed a hostile act or demonstrated hostile intent, and is considered a continuing hostile threat. Once declared hostile by appropriate authority, U.S. forces need not observe a hostile act or demonstration of hostile intent before engaging. The basis of the engagement shifts from conduct of the potential threat to merely status of the force. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-25
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
Self-Defense, Continued
Request for Changes
The SROE expects the threat assessment will likely change throughout the course of a single mission and the mission specific ROE will have to change to stay current. During any deployment, you should expect routine changes to the mission specific ROE based upon better intelligence on the threat assessment and or the scope of the mission changes. If your unit is requesting a change for supplemental mission specific ROE, it should always include the justification for the request. Your unit should serialize all requests sent up the chain of command and all approvals, especially the Joint Task Force and higher headquarters that are promulgating and or approving the ROE. Example: A unit that has received CINC ROE approval serial 005 should ensure that they possess approval serials 001 through 004, unless the latest message is a total restatement of all previously approved ROE.
Training
During the stress of combat, Marines will react the way they are trained. In developing tactical unit training, ROE should be written for unit commanders and individual Marines to practice making judgment calls with regard to a possible threat. ROE will seldom, if ever, state in explicit detail when force may be utilized. Such a decision is subject to many factors that the person responsible for facing the threat must determine. Therefore, ROE should not be regarded as a comprehensive checklist of events that must occur before force can be used.
MCI Course 8013A
2-26
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete exercise items 1 through 4 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
Define rules of engagement. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________
Item 2
The three main purposes for ROE are (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________ (3) ________________________________________________________
Item 3
What three classes of persons does ROE authorize the use of deadly force to defend? (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________ (3) ________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-27
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 4
List the three types of hostile situations that justify self-defense. (1) ________________________________________________________ (2) ________________________________________________________ (3) ________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
2-28
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1
2
3 4
MCI Course 8013A
Answer …directives issued by competent military authority which delineate the circumstances and limitations under which United States forces will initiate and/or continue combat engagement with other forces encountered. (1) Provides implementation guidance on the application of force for mission accomplishment (2) Serves as a fire control method of military operations by the civilian and military chain of command (3) Implements the inherent right of self-defense (1) Individuals and self (2) Units (3) National interests (1) Act (2) Intent (3) Force
2-29
Reference 2-22
2-22
2-24 2-25
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
2-30
Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise
STUDY UNIT 3 HISTORY AND CONTRIBUTIONS OF MARINE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS (NCOs) Overview
Estimated Study Time
1 hour, 55 minutes
Unit Scope
This study unit will discuss the historic development of the noncommissioned officer (NCO), significant NCOs, and battles in Marine Corps history. As an NCO, you should realize the enormous burden of your responsibilities as well as the joys and success that come from those responsibilities.
Learning Objectives
After completing this study unit, you should be able to
Unit Content
·
Identify the origins of the noncommissioned officer (NCO).
·
State the purpose of the Medal of Honor (MOH).
·
Identify historic individuals and battles.
This study unit contains the following lessons: Topic Lesson 1 Origins of the Noncommissioned Officer Lesson 2 Medal of Honor (MOH) Lesson 3 Historic Individuals and Battles
MCI Course 8013A
3-1
See Page 3-3 3-15 3-21
Study Unit 3
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
3-2
Study Unit 3
LESSON 1 ORIGINS OF THE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope
Try to imagine a Marine Corps without noncommissioned officers (NCOs). Boot camp would not exist because drill instructors would not exist. Think of the hundreds of platoons in a Marine division, a lieutenant just out of the basic school would head each platoon with no NCO standing in. The dignity of a command, which is essential to discipline, would be lost without NCOs.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to
In This Lesson
·
Identify the origins of the NCO.
·
List the responsibilities of the NCO.
·
Identify NCO obligations for self and to the unit.
·
Identify the roles the NCO fulfills.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction International Origins American NCO Development Marine Corps NCO Development NCO Purpose NCO Obligations NCO Roles Lesson 1 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
3-3
See Page 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-11
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
International Origins
Seventh Century, B.C.
As recorded in the book of Deuteronomy in the seventh century B.C., captains of fifties and captains over tens served among the forces of Moses. A Roman gunnery sergeant was called a centurion who commanded the smallest tactical units in the Roman Legion.
Middle Ages
During the Middle Ages after the fall of Rome, no organized armies, as the Romans knew them or as we know them today, existed. However, as soon as the first rudiments of modern military organization appeared during the fourteenth century, the NCO reappeared.
The 1400’s
The Condottieri, the first modern military units, consisted of mercenary French, Swiss, and Italian soldiers. They were professionals who served under the colors of any state that paid and fed them. The Condottieri units initiated the ranks of sergeants and corporals. Sergeant, dating from 1425, is the older rank.
MCI Course 8013A
3-4
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
American NCO Development
Baron von Steuben
In 1778 Baron von Steuben, a Prussian adviser, was forging the continental Army into a professional force and wrote the Regulations for the Order and Discipline of the Troops of the United States: The choice of noncommissioned officers is an object of the greatest importance: The order and discipline of a regiment depends so much on the behavior, that too much care cannot be taken for granted. Honesty, sobriety and a remarkable attention to every point of duty are absolute necessary.
The Blue Book
Baron von Steuben also aided the NCO’s growth as an instructor of soldiers by writing the Blue Book—name derived from the color of the first edition. This manual covered all aspects of infantry service and stressed NCO responsibilities for the care, discipline, and training of the men in garrison and in the field.
Attributes for an NCO
Von Steuben’s six attributes for an NCO are as valid today as they were at Valley Forge: · · · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Character Attention to duty Loyalty Command presence Professional skill Ability to instruct
3-5
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Marine Corps NCO Development
Shared Leadership
NCOs have always shared leadership responsibilities with their commissioned superiors. For more than 200 years, NCOs have served as leaders in the U.S. Marine Corps during peace and war. NCOs are key to unit morale and esprit de corps, as well as the mainstay of discipline and efficiency.
Role of Tactics
Because both the American and European armies generally fought standing in lines facing the enemy (linear tactics), the NCOs had to keep the long ranks steady to maintain volley fire discipline. A fundamental problem in the Civil War was that the linear tactics still being used were designed for men carrying smoothbore muskets. During the Civil War, soldiers were armed with rifled muskets, which had greater accuracy. Unless tactics were changed, casualties were certain to be horrendous with the increased killing power of even newer weapons introduced late in the war.
Technological Changes
Breech loading rifles, cavalry carbines, and the gatling guns underscored the need for more open tactical formations. Various unit commanders gradually introduced such formations to reduce the vulnerability of their men to the increased volume and accuracy of enemy fire.
Maintain Order The gradual elimination of linear tactics after the Civil War redefined the
NCO’s combat leadership role. The change in technological advances and tactics emphasized and increased the role of the small unit leaders, the NCOs, to maintain order on a more complex battlefield.
MCI Course 8013A
3-6
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
NCO Purpose
Essential Link in Command
The NCO provides the essential link between the unit’s commanders and enlisted Marines. To serve successfully as the link between commanders and unit members, the NCO has always had to perform several important functions simultaneously.
Responsibilities
The NCO’s responsibilities are listed below:
Major Tasks Summarized
·
Decentralize command authority in an orderly structure down to the smallest element in an organization.
·
Provide links between commanders (as well as officers in general) and the troops.
·
Provide a senior enlisted adviser, a platoon sergeant, a first sergeant, or a sergeant major for each commander.
·
Afford avenues for advancement whereby enlisted men and women may realize their full potential as leaders. (Not every Marine can become a general, but with application and attitude, every Marine can win chevrons and, in so doing, demonstrate that the road to the top is always open.)
·
Recognize and reward outstanding technical and military skills.
In other words, NCOs help the commander to · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Lead, train, and take care of enlisted Marines. Enable good Marines to get promoted. Maximize the Marines’ best skills and abilities.
3-7
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
NCO Obligations
To Yourself
As an NCO, you owe it to yourself to enjoy the burden of your leadership position. If you do not, your Marines will know it and you will be ineffective. Just as enthusiasm is contagious, so is lack of it. Providing your unit with positive leadership, you will reap the greatest returns from the Marines entrusted to your care: · · · · ·
To the Unit
Your primary obligations to the unit are to · · ·
Trust Among Marines
Greatest accomplishment of the mission Willing obedience Inspire confidence Loyalty Respect
Win on the battlefield. Accomplish all assigned tasks. Build and foster unit cohesion: · Provide training. · Set meaningful standards. · Hold yourself and your Marines accountable to high standards.
As an NCO, you must create trust among Marines from vastly different social backgrounds and cultural experiences: You can build on that trust by eliminating the ignorance of prejudice while at the same time, educating Marines on the value of diversity. This mutual trust is too easily destroyed if you tolerate racist overtures, sexual harassment, fraternization, or hazing. If you encourage or turn your head to any of these evils, you will immediately lose credibility and will destroy unit cohesion.
MCI Course 8013A
3-8
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
NCO Roles
Roles of the NCO
The NCO fulfills five major roles: · · · · ·
Unit Leader
Unit leader Trainer Guardian of standards Backbone of the Corps Disciplinarian
Successful leadership demands excellence. To be a good unit leader, practice the six traits listed below: · · · · · ·
Know yourself and your troops. Be both tactically and technically proficient. Understand mission requirements and communicate them clearly. Make sound and timely decisions. Always set a good example. Take responsibility for unit performance.
Trainer
You are a trainer ready to teach troops everything they must know, from the proper wearing of the uniform and the observance of military customs and traditions to marksmanship and physical training. Above all, you must fully understand military professionalism and be able to pass along to others whatever knowledge is required to accomplish the mission.
Guardian of Standards
Historically, the setting of standards has been the responsibility of officers. However, the teaching and enforcing of standards, both of soldier discipline and soldier skills, has been the NCO’s responsibility. Thus, you must enforce standards of conduct.
Backbone of the Corps
NCOs are the backbone of the Marine Corps. From the recruiting process, through recruit training, and into the operation forces, the Marine Corps holds the NCOs responsible for the care and development of the nation’s most precious resource, the individual Marine. No other service in the world fully entrusts its NCOs to the extent that the Marine Corps does. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-9
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
NCO Roles, Continued
Disciplinarian
MCI Course 8013A
Subordinates have always watched NCOs. Therefore, you must discipline yourself first to present a positive example at all times. You must remain thoroughly prepared in tactics and techniques of your field. If you present a negative example for any reason, you encourage your subordinates to violate accepted standards of conduct. Serious discipline problems will soon develop.
3-10
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete the exercise items 1 through 12 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Items 1 Through 4
Matching: For items 1 through 4, match the letter of the period of time in column 2 to the NCO development in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used only once. Column 1
Column 2
NCO Development
Period of Time
___ 1.
a. b. c. d. e.
___ 2. ___ 3. ___ 4.
Item 5
The Condottieri units initiated the ranks of sergeants and corporals. Centurions commanded the smallest tactical units in the Roman Legion Baron von Steuben listed six attributes for an NCO that are still valid. Technological advances and tactical changes increased NCO leadership role.
Seventh Century, B.C. Middle Ages 1400’s 1778 Civil War
What are the three major tasks that summarize the NCO’s responsibilities? (1) _______________________________________________________ (2) _______________________________________________________ (3) _______________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-11
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Items 6 Through 10
Matching: For items 6 through 10, match the letter of the type of obligation in column 2 to the action in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used more than once. Column 1
Column 2
Action
Obligation
___ 6. ___ 7.
Provide training. a. To yourself Build and foster unit b. To the unit cohesion. ___ 8. Provide positive leadership. ___ 9. Hold yourself and your Marines accountable to high standards. ___ 10. Inspire confidence. Item 11
As an NCO, what are four of the six tasks to be a good unit leader? (1) _______________________________________________________ (2) _______________________________________________________ (3) _______________________________________________________ (4) _______________________________________________________
Item 12
What are the major roles of the NCO? a. Soul of the unit, assistant to the commander, trainer, and disciplinarian b. Backbone of the Corps, intermediary between commanders and unit members, and trainers c. Unit leader, assistant to the commander, an example of standards, and trainer d. Unit leader, trainer, guardian of standards, backbone of the Corps, and disciplinarian
MCI Course 8013A
3-12
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise Solutions
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5
· · ·
6 7 8 9 10 11
· · ·
· · · 12
MCI Course 8013A
3-13
Answer c a d e Lead, train, and take care of enlisted Marines. Enable good Marines to get promoted. Maximize the Marines’ best skills and abilities. b b a b a Know yourself and your troops. Be both tactically and technically proficient. Understand mission requirements and communicate them clearly. Make sound and timely decisions. Always set a good example. Take responsibility for unit performance. d
Reference 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7
3-8 3-8 3-8 3-8 3-8 3-9
3-9
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
3-14
Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise
LESSON 2 MEDAL OF HONOR (MOH) Introduction
Estimated Study Time
20 minutes
Lesson Scope
NCOs must combine history and tradition with skill and ability to prepare for combat. The Medal of Honor (MOH) is the highest award for valor in action against an enemy force that can be bestowed upon an individual serving in the armed services of the United States. Generally presented to its recipient by the President of the United States of America in the name of Congress, it is often called the Congressional Medal of Honor.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to
In This Lesson
·
State the purpose of the Medal of Honor (MOH).
·
List the criteria for receiving the MOH.
·
Identify the first Marine NCO to receive the MOH.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Background Information History Lesson 2 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
3-15
See Page 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18
Study Unit 3, Lesson 2
Background Information
Purpose
The purpose of the MOH is to recognize deeds of gallantry and heroism in times of war and of peace. It is given for conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his or her life above the call of duty. The act or execution of duty must be performed while ·
Engaged in an action against an enemy of the United States
·
Engaged in military operations involving conflict with an opposing foreign force
·
Serving with friendly foreign forces (such as the case with the United Nations’ forces in Korea) engaged in an armed conflict against an opposing armed force in which the United States is not a belligerent party
The MOH is the highest award given for bravery in the United States. MOH Criteria
MCI Course 8013A
The criteria of the MOH is as follows: ·
No margin of doubt or possibility of error in awarding this honor.
·
Service is rendered conspicuous above their comrades by an act so outstanding that it clearly distinguishes their gallantry beyond the call of duty from lesser forms of bravery.
·
The deed must be the type that if not done, it will not subject the individual to any justified criticism.
·
The deed must be without detriment to the mission of the command or to the command to which attached.
3-16
Study Unit 3, Lesson 2
History
Birth of the MOH
The idea for the MOH was born during the Civil War as men fought gallantly and often displayed great heroism: · · ·
Presentation
First Marine Recipient
MCI Course 8013A
Instituted only for the enlisted men of the Navy with officers being permitted to receive the award later Authorized by Congress Approved on 21 December 1861 by President Abraham Lincoln
On 20 September 1905, President Theodore Roosevelt signed an executive order: ·
Presentation of the award will always be formal and impressive.
·
The recipient will, when practical, be ordered to Washington, DC.
·
The President will make the presentation, as Commander in Chief or by such representative designated by the President.
·
When not practicable to have the presentation at Washington, the details of time, place, and ceremony will be prescribed by the Chief of Staff for each case.
·
On campaign, the division or higher commander will make the presentation.
In May 1862, Corporal John F. Mackie was the first Marine to receive the MOH. During the attack on Fort Darling at Drewry’s Bluff, Virginia, he fearlessly maintained his musket fire against the rifle pits on shore, and when ordered to fill vacancies at guns caused by men wounded and killed in action, manned the weapon with skill and courage. Currently, 294 Marines have received the MOH since 1862.
3-17
Study Unit 3, Lesson 2
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete the exercise items 1 through 6 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
What is the purpose of the Medal of Honor (MOH)? ____________________________________________________________
Items 2
List three of the four criteria for receiving the MOH. (1) _________________________________________________________ (2) _________________________________________________________ (3) _________________________________________________________
Item 3
The MOH is the highest award given in the United States for a. b. c. d.
Item 4
leadership. bravery. judgment. initiative.
Who was the first Marine recipient of the MOH? ____________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-18
Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 5
Marines have received the MOH since a. b. c. d.
Item 6
1775. 1862. 1881. 1941.
When did President Lincoln approve the MOH? a. b. c. d.
20 September 1805 21 December 1862 20 September 1841 21 December 1861 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-19
Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2
3 4 5 6
MCI Course 8013A
Answer To recognize deeds of gallantry and heroism in times of war and of peace · No margin of doubt or possibility of error in awarding this honor. · Service is rendered conspicuous above their comrades by an act so outstanding that it clearly distinguishes their gallantry beyond the call of duty from lesser forms of bravery. · The deed must be the type that if not done, it will not subject the individual to any justified criticism. · The deed must be without detriment to the mission of the command or to the command to which attached. b Corporal John F. Mackie b d
3-20
Reference 3-16 3-16
3-16 3-17 3-17 3-17
Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise
LESSON 3 HISTORIC INDIVIDUALS AND BATTLES Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope
The history of the Marine Corps is rife with tales of the Marine NCO. Today’s corporals and sergeants carry on one of the strongest and longest unbroken traditions of duty, honor, courage, and commitment within our Corps.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to
In This Lesson
·
State the NCO’s tasks throughout history.
·
Write the NCO creed.
·
Cite specific examples of NCO behavior that exemplified the NCO creed.
·
Identify the importance of specific incidents in Marine Corps history.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction NCO Tasks Through History NCO Creed NCOs in Action 1776 Through 1890s 1900 Through 1940s 1950s and 1960s 1980s Through 1990s Lesson 3 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
3-21
See Page 3-21 3-22 3-24 3-25 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-34
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
NCO Tasks Through History
Neatness and Sanitation
In the early days of American Revolution, little standardization of NCO duties or responsibilities existed. Sergeants and corporals were expected to instruct recruits in all matters of military training, especially with regard to their neatness and sanitation. However, the increase of technology that accompanied modernization greatly effected the NCO corps during the last half of the 19th century. The duties of the NCO were clearly defined during this period.
Weapons and Daytime Maneuvers
World War I required the first massive training of men that the United States had seen. NCOs trained hundreds of Marines who would be sent overseas. NCOs were the primary instructors during this period with lessons emphasizing weapons and daytime maneuvers.
Basic Training
With the attack on Pearl Harbor in 1941, the United States found itself at war. This attack forced basic training to be centered around hands-on experience instead of the classroom instruction. NCOs conducted all of the training. After basic training, Marines were sent to their units where training continued.
Battle Leaders, Integrated Squads
During the Korean War, NCOs emerged more prominently as battle leaders than they had in World War II. The deeply eroded hills, ridges, narrow valleys, and deep gorges forced many units to advance as squads. The Korean War was the first war the United States entered with an integrated force. Black and white Marines fought side by side on the battlefield against a common foe.
Junior Leaders, Decentralized Control
In 1965, the first American ground troops were committed to Vietnam. The American policy of containment of communism was severely challenged. The Vietnamese communists fought a long, drawn out war that eventually wore down the American forces. At times, there were no clear battle lines and often it was hard to tell friend from foe. This battle proved to be a junior leaders’ war with decentralized control. Much of the burden of combat leadership fell on the NCOs. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-22
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
NCO Tasks Through History, Continued
NCO Education In recent years, the emphasis on NCO education was stressed to all units in
the Marine Corps. In 1981, the NCO Basic Course was established. The basic course was designed to educate NCOs on subjects and skills needed to enhance their performance and abilities on and off the battlefield.
MCI Course 8013A
3-23
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
NCO Creed
Live by the NCO Creed
Memorize and try to live by the NCO creed as follows: I am an NCO dedicated to training new Marines and influencing the old. I am forever conscious of each Marine under my charge, and by example I will inspire him (or her) to the highest standards possible. I will strive to be patient, understanding, just and firm. I will commend the deserving and encourage the wayward. I will never forget that I am responsible to my commanding officer for the morale, discipline, and the efficiency of my men and their performance will reflect an image of me.
NCO Contributions
History has shown that proficient NCOs utilize the NCO creed as words to live by in all facets of life. During many of the battles in which the Marine Corps has participated, NCOs have exemplified the NCO creed. These NCOs were always winners on the battlefield and subsequently earned numerous prestigious awards for their distinguished and noteworthy contributions.
Summary
The Marine Corps owes its existence to the accomplishments of generations of NCOs who have served under its colors and have made history. That history is an integral part of the sense of pride and tradition that pervades the present day Marine Corps. Learning the NCO creed, you will · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Understand your responsibilities as an NCO. Have a ready tool to conduct your life. Continue the legacy and tradition for future NCOs.
3-24
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
NCOs in Action
Exemplify
From the halls of Montezuma to the shores of Tripoli, Marines continue to fight and die in war and peace to secure the liberties and freedom of democracy and humanitarianism worldwide.
Special Recognition
Special recognition is given to four NCOs and their actions on duty: · · · ·
Sergeant J.E. Johnson
Sergeant J.E. Johnson Sergeant J.I. Poynter Corporal R.E. O’Malley Sergeant Daniel P. Matthews
Sergeant Johnson was awarded the Medal of Honor for conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his life while serving in Korea as a squad leader for 3/7 1st Marine Division in December 1950. Sergeant Johnson and his squad were vastly outnumbered when a well-entrenched and cleverly concealed enemy force wearing the uniforms of friendly troops attacked the platoon’s open and unconcealed positions. Sergeant Johnson unhesitatingly took charge of his platoon in the absence of the leader and, exhibiting great personal valor in the face of a heavy barrage of hostile fire, coolly proceeded to move about among his men, shouting words of encouragement and inspiration and skillfully directing their fire. To help his platoon, Sergeant Johnson immediately placed himself in an extremely hazardous position to provide effective cover for his men. Fully aware that his voluntary action meant either certain death or capture to himself, he courageously continued to provide effective cover for his men and was last observed in a wounded condition single handedly engaging enemy troops in close hand-grenade and hand-to-hand fighting. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-25
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
NCOs in Action, Continued
Sergeant J.I. Poynter
Sergeant Poynter was awarded the MOH for conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his life above and beyond the call of duty while serving as a squad leader in a rifle platoon of Company A, 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, 1st Marine Division. In action against enemy aggressor forces during the defense of Hill 532, south of Sudong, Korea on 4 November 1950. Sergeant Poynter gallantly gave his life for his country. When a vastly outnumbering, well-concealed hostile force launched a sudden vicious counterattack against his platoon’s hasty defense position, Sergeant Poynter displayed superb skill and courage in leading his squad and directing its fire against the onrushing enemy. With his ranks critically depleted by casualties and he himself critically wounded, the onslaught gained momentum. The hostile force surrounded his position. Sergeant Poynter seized his bayonet and engaged in bitter hand-tohand combat as the breakthrough continued. Observing three machineguns closing in at a distance of 25 yards, he dashed from his position, grasping hand grenades from his fallen Marines as he ran. He then charged the emplacements in rapid succession, killing the crews of two and putting the other out of action before he fell, mortally wounded. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-26
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
NCOs in Action, Continued
Corporal R.E. O’Malley
Corporal O’Malley was honored for conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity in action against the communist (Viet Cong) forces at the risk of his own life above and beyond the call of duty. While leading his squad in the assault against a strongly entrenched enemy force, his unit came under intense small arms fire. With complete disregard for his personal safety, Corporal O’Malley raced across an open rice paddy to a trench line where the enemy forces were located. Jumping into the trench, he attacked the Viet Cong with his rifle and grenades and single-handedly killed eight of the enemy. He then led his squad to the assistance of an adjacent Marine unit that was suffering heavy casualties. Continuing to press forward, he reloaded his weapon and fired, with telling effect, into the enemy emplacement. Corporal O’Malley personally assisted in the evacuation of several wounded Marines, and again regrouping the remnants of his squad, he returned to the point of the heaviest fighting. Ordered to an evacuation point by an officer, Corporal O’Malley gathered his besieged and badly wounded squad and led them under fire to a helicopter for withdrawal. Although three times wounded in his encounter, and facing imminent death from a fanatic and determined enemy, he steadfastly refused evacuation. He continued to cover his squad’s boarding of the helicopters while, from an exposed position, he delivered fire against the enemy until his wounded men were evacuated. Only then, with his last mission accomplished, did he permit himself to be removed from the battlefield. By his valor, leadership, and courageous efforts on behalf of his comrades, he served as an inspiration to all who observed him. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-27
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
NCOs in Action, Continued
Sergeant Daniel P. Matthews
During the Vietnam conflict, Sergeant Matthews was assigned to F Company, 2/7, 1st Marine Division as a squad leader. Sergeant Matthews was participating in a counterattack against a firmly entrenched and wellconcealed hostile force that had repelled six previous assaults on a vital enemy-held outpost far forward of the main line. During the attack, Sergeant Matthews observed the deadly fire preventing a corpsman from removing a wounded man lying in an open area. Without much thought for his own safety, Sergeant Matthews leaped into the machinegun nest, taking the enemy by complete surprise. He continued his one-man assault until he had succeeded in destroying the machinegun nest that enabled his comrades to evacuate the stricken Marine to safety.
MCI Course 8013A
3-28
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
1776 Through 1890s
Invasion of Bahamas
The first Marine landing took place during the Revolutionary War. Marines invaded New Providence Island in the Bahamas and seized guns and supplies. The uniform of the day had a stiff stock worn around the neck to protect from sword slashes, thus earning Marines the nickname Leather Neck.
Civil War
Despite the Marines’ readiness and prompt action at Harpers Ferry, the Marine Corps played only a small part during the Civil War. Even so, during this conflict, 16 Marines were awarded the MOH.
Foreign Duty in Korea
After the USS flagship Colorado was fired upon 10 June 1871 on the Han River in west Korea, Captain McLane Tilton led his squad in an assault against the Korean forts. After taking two of the forts without much difficulty, Captain Tilton then led his Marines against a heavily fortified Citadel. During the ensuing battle, which required hand-to-hand combat, Corporal Charles Brown and Private Hugh Purvis made their way to the flagstaff and tore down the enemy flag. As a result of this heroic act, both Marines were subsequently awarded the Medal of Honor.
Landing in Cuba
On 11 June 1881 after the Marines landed and established its first beachhead on Cuban soil, they attacked. On the morning of 15 June 1881, Lieutenant Magill was ordered to bypass the objective and cut off any enemy retreat. As Lieutenant Magill led his men to the crest, a nearby ship opened fire upon the squad. As the shells began falling, Lieutenant Magill realized he and his men were in the ship’s line of fire. Without hesitation, Sergeant John Quick stood up in plain sight of the enemy and began waving an improvised flag in a cease-fire fashion. With the enemy bullets whistling through the air, Sergeant Quick remained exposed and continued to signal until the firing stopped.
MCI Course 8013A
3-29
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
1900 Through 1940s
China’s Boxer Rebellion
During the summer of 1900, prior to the extensive Marine buildup in the Philippines, the Boxer Rebellion broke out in China. On the following day, the Boxers destroyed railways and shops. With violent mobs screaming for the death of all Westerners, an alarm had been sent for military assistance. Of course, the Marines responded.
Belleau Woods
During June of 1918, Marines attacked well-entrenched Germans at Belleau Woods and defeated them with tenacious, courageous, and gallant fighting styles. Due to the Marines’ dogged fighting style, the Germans gave the name Devil Dogs to the Marines.
French Fourragere
As a result of the Marines’ outstanding service in World War I, the French awarded the French Fourragere to the 5th and 6th Regiments for their outstanding service. The French Fourragere is a yellow braided cord that is worn around the arm of the dress uniform at the shoulder.
Pearl Harbor
On the morning of 7 December 1941, Japan launched a devastating attack on the American Pacific Fleet anchored at Pearl Harbor. As a result, Marines defended against attacks throughout the Pacific during the opening stages of the war. During the war, the Marine Corps was the principal ground force the Allies used in a strategy of island hopping campaign. This major role led to the strength of the Marine Corps reaching nearly 500,000 during the war.
MCI Course 8013A
3-30
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
1950s and 1960s
Provisional Brigade
Conflict in Korea tested the Marine Corps’ combat readiness. The Marines responded to the North Korean attack by quickly assembling the first Marine Provisional Brigade from the under-strength of 1st Marine Division. The 1st Marine Provisional Brigade acted as a fire brigade to defend the Pusan perimeter. The Marines fulfilled other roles in the Korean War: · ·
Vietnam
Amphibious landing forces over the seawalls at Inchon Aviators flying helicopters in battle for the first time
In February 1965, shortly after the celebration of Tet (a Vietnamese holiday), the Viet Cong attacked two U.S. military installations, injuring and killing a large number of U.S. Army advisors and maintenance personnel. As a result of these attacks, President Lyndon B. Johnson ordered military targets in North Vietnam be bombed. Marines landed in South Vietnam, committing the Marine Corps to its longest war in history.
MCI Course 8013A
3-31
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
1980s Through 1990s
Beirut, Lebanon
In the summer of 1982, at the request of the Lebanese government, the United States agreed to establish a U.S. military presence in that country to serve as a peacekeeping force. On 24 March 1983, the 24th Marine Amphibious Unit (MAU) left America in support of that mission. On 23 October 1983, a suicide-truck bomb attack on the headquarters building killed 241 Americans and wounded 70 others. On 24 March 1984, a tree was planted along Lejeune Boulevard in Jacksonville, N.C. for each of the lost service members. The last Marines withdrew in July 1984. On 23 October 1986, a memorial plaza was dedicated in memory of all the service members.
Operation Urgent Fury
In 1983 following the assassination of the Prime Minister and the overthrow of the government of Grenada, Marines participated in Operation Urgent Fury. It was a joint military operation in response to a request from neighboring Caribbean nations. The Marines’ rapid response secured the island and safeguarded hundreds of American citizens living on the island.
Operation Just Cause
During 1989 in response to increasing unrest in Panama, the President ordered the joint military Operation Just Cause. The United States forces, including the Marines, overthrew the military government of General Manuel Noriega and installed a civilian government. Under indictment in the United States for drug trafficking and racketeering, Noriega was arrested and sent to the United States for trial.
Operation Desert Shield
In 1990 following the Iraq invasion of Kuwait, Operation Desert Shield was launched. This military operation was designed to halt the advance of Iraqi forces and to position multinational forces assembled for possible offensive action to dispel the invading force. Operation Desert Shield validated the Marine Corps’ maritime prepositioning force (MPF) concept and enacted the plan of tailoring units to accomplish a mission as part of a Marine air-ground task force (MAGTF). Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-32
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
1980s Through 1990s, Continued
Operation Desert Storm
During 1991, Operation Desert Storm was launched after the Iraqi government refused to comply with the United Nations’ resolutions. Marine aviation conducted combat operations when the air phase commenced in January 1991. After massive bombing, Marine ground forces participated in the sweep into Kuwait to help liberate the country and damage the Iraqi military capability.
Operation Restore Hope
In 1992 as part of the joint military Operation Restore Hope, Marine forces landed in war-torn Somalia. United States forces provided security for the distribution of humanitarian aid. The U.S. forces were later incorporated in the United Nations’ peacekeeping forces and were sent to stabilize the situation in the country.
Operation Uphold Democracy
During 1994, joint military Operation Uphold Democracy was ordered by the President to restore the civilian government in Haiti. Marines landed in the northern part of Haiti to stabilize the situation and provide security for the orderly transfer of power from the military to the democratically elected government of President Jean Bertrand Aristide.
MCI Course 8013A
3-33
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3
Lesson 3 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
15 minutes
Directions
Complete the exercise items 1 through 12 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
Sergeants and corporals in the early 19th century instructed recruits, especially with regard to a. b. c. d.
Item 2
During the Vietnam War, NCOs carried the burden of a. b. c. d.
Item 3
weapons and tactics. neatness and sanitation. integration and diversity. decentralized control.
technical performance and education. integration and diversity. combat leadership. decentralized control.
Write the NCO creed. _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-34
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Items 4 and 5
Matching: For items 4 and 5, match the letter of the NCO in column 2 to the action in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used only once. Column 1
Column 2
Action
NCO
___ 4.
___ 5.
He exemplified valor leadership and courage by single-handedly killing eight of the enemy; personally assisted with the evacuation of wounded Marines; and steadfastly refused evacuation until wounded men were evacuated safely. He took charge of his platoon in absence of the leader; encouraged, inspired, and skillfully directed fire; and placed himself in mortal position to provide effective cover for his men.
a. b. c. d.
Sergeant J.E. Johnson Sergeant J.J. Poynter Corporal R.E. O’Malley Sergeant Daniel P. Matthews
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-35
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Items 6 Through 9
Matching: For items 6 through 9, match the letter of the time period in column 2 to the historic event in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used only once. Column 1
Column 2
Historic Event
Time Period
___ 6.
a. b. c. d. e.
___ 7. ___ 8. ___ 9.
Items 10 Through 12
The first Marine landing took place. Corporal Charles Brown and Private Hugh Purvis tore down the enemy flag. The MOH was given to 16 Marines. The Marines landed and established its first beachhead.
Invasion of Bahamas Civil War Foreign Duty in Korea Landing in Cuba Belleau Woods
Matching: For items 10 through 12, match the letter of the time period in column 2 to the historic event in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used only once. Column 1
Column 2
Historic Event
Time Period
___ 10. The Marines were given the name Devil Dogs. ___ 11. The French Fourragere was awarded to the 5th and 6th Regiments. ___ 12. The Marine Corps’ combat readiness was tested.
a. b. c. d. e. f.
Boxer Rebellion Belleau Woods World War I Pearl Harbor Provisional Brigade Vietnam Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
3-36
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
MCI Course 8013A
Answer b c I am an NCO dedicated to training new Marines and influencing the old. I am forever conscious of each Marine under my charge, and by example I will inspire him (or her) to the highest standards possible. I will commend the deserving and encourage the wayward. I will never forget that I am responsible to my commanding officer for the morale, discipline, and the efficiency of my men and their performance will reflect an image of me. c a a c b d b c e
3-37
Reference 3-22 3-22 3-24
3-27 3-25 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-30 3-30 3-31
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
3-38
Study Unit 3, Lesson 3 Exercise
STUDY UNIT 4 DRILL Overview
Estimated Study Time
2 hours, 25 minutes
Unit Scope
As a Marine NCO, you are expected to know how and when to conduct drill with your Marines. Troop movement and simple formations are the responsibility of the Marine NCO. This study unit will cover the basics of · · ·
Learning Objectives
In This Study Unit
Troop movement Conduct with the NCO sword Flags and guidons
After completing this study unit, you should be able to ·
Conduct drill with a platoon.
·
Perform drill movements with the sword.
·
Display the different flags and guidons the Marine Corps uses.
This study unit contains the following lessons: Topic Lesson 1 Platoon Drill Lesson 2 Sword Manual Lesson 3 Flags and Guidons
MCI Course 8013A
4-1
See Page 4-5 4-39 4-57
Study Unit 4
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
4-2
Study Unit 4
LESSON 1 PLATOON DRILL Introduction
Estimated Study Time
40 minutes
Lesson Scope
Drill accustoms the individual to working as a member of a team- a team moving confidently together in unison and to a measured cadence. Marines are famous for their ability to march in step, keep straight lines and perform the manual of arms with precision. The scope of this lesson includes the basic fundamentals of platoon drill. Note: Throughout this unit, commands and commands of execution will be written in all capital letters. The commands of execution will also be underlined. For example, the command forward march will be written as “FORWARD, MARCH.”
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to ·
Identify common drill terms.
·
Identify the procedures to form a platoon.
·
Identify common halted platoon movements.
·
Identify common marching platoon movements.
·
Identify the procedures to dismiss a platoon. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-3
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Introduction, Continued In This Lesson
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction General Information Common Drill Terms Forming the Platoon Aligning the Platoon Open Ranks Form for Inspection Halted Movements Positions of Rest Marching the Platoon Commands Given in the Oblique Pass in Review Dismiss the Platoon Lesson 1 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
4-4
See Page 4-3 4-5 4-6 4-9 4-12 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-21 4-23 4-29 4-31 4-32 4-33
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
General Information
Organization
The platoon is the basic drill unit. The organization consists of · ·
Symbols
MCI Course 8013A
A platoon headquarters · A platoon commander (PC) · One or more assistants Two or more squads that are numbered · Front to rear while on line · Left to right while in column
The different symbols used for drill are identified below:
4-5
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Common Drill Terms
Definitions
The common terms used for close order drill are defined in the table below: Term Alignment Base Cadence Center Column Depth
Distance Double Time Element Extended Mass Formation File
Definition A straight line on which several elements are formed. The element on which a movement is regulated. The uniform step and rhythm in marching. The middle point or element of a unit or left-center element for an even number of elements. A formation in which the elements are placed one behind the other. Space from head to rear of a formation or position. The graphic below depicts the direction of depth, as well as the direction of the front.
Space between elements in the direction of depth. Cadence at 180 steps per minute. An individual, squad, section, platoon, company, or other unit that is part of another unit. The arrangement of a company or larger unit in which elements in column are abreast and at a specified interval greater than close interval. A column of men or line of vehicles one behind the other. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-6
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Common Drill Terms, Continued
Definitions, continued
Term Flank
Formation Front
·
Definition The right or left extremity of a unit, either in line or in column.
· The element on the extreme right or left of the line. Arrangement of elements of a unit in line, in a column, or any other prescribed manner. · The space occupied by an element measured from one flank to the other. ·
The front of a man is accepted as 22 inches.
Guide
· ·
See Depth for an illustration of front. The individual upon whom a formation or elements thereof regulates its march.
Interval
· ·
To regulate interval, direction, or alignment. The lateral space between elements on the same line.
·
The two intervals used in drill are normal and close interval as depicted in the graphic below:
Platoon at normal interval.
Platoon at close interval. Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
4-7
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Common Drill Terms, Continued
Definitions, continued
Term Line Mass Formation Pace Piece Point of Rest Quick Time Rank Slow Time Snap
Step
MCI Course 8013A
Definition A formation in which the elements are abreast. The arrangement of a company or larger unit in which its elements are in column and abreast at close interval. The length of a full step in quick time, 30 inches. An individual firearm, such as a rifle. The point toward which all elements of a unit establish their dress or alignment. Cadence is 120 steps per minute. A line of men or vehicles side by side. Cadence at 60 steps per minute; used for funerals only. · In commands or signals, the quality that inspires immediate response. · In drill, the immediate execution of movements. The distance from heel to heel between the feet of a marching man.
4-8
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Forming the Platoon
Purpose
Commands
The purpose for forming the platoon falls back into the purpose for drill, which is used to ·
Move the unit from one place to another in a standard, orderly manner.
·
Provide simple formations from which combat formations may be readily assumed.
·
Teach discipline by instilling habits of precision and automatic response to orders.
·
Increase confidence through the exercise of command, by giving proper commands, and by controlling drilling troops.
·
Give troops the opportunity to handle individual weapons.
Forming the platoon is done by giving the command "FALL IN." After this command, the platoon is ordered to · · · ·
"REPORT" "INSPECTION ARMS" "PORT ARMS" "ORDER ARMS" Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-9
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Forming the Platoon, Continued
Fall In
To fall in, the platoon sergeant · · · ·
Takes post three paces in front of the point where the center of the platoon will be positioned Faces that point Draws sword, if armed with one Commands, “FALL IN” or “AT CLOSE INTERVAL, FALL IN” · A combined command · Given without rise or inflection of the voice
After the command “FALL IN” is given, the platoon will fall in on line. Fall In Procedures
The procedures that occur at the command “FALL IN” are listed in the table below: Who Guide
Action Takes post so the first rank, when aligned, will be centered on and three paces from the platoon sergeant 1st Squad Leader Falls in at normal interval (or close interval if so ordered) to the left of the guide Other Squad Falls in directly behind the first squad leader with 40 Leaders inches of distance between them st 1 Squad · Falls in on their squad leader at normal interval (or close interval if so ordered) · All Other Squads
· ·
Takes exact interval by raising their arms, then lowers their arms to the position of attention Fall in on their squad leader at normal interval (or close interval if so ordered) Cover down on the corresponding member of the first squad
Note: All personnel will fall in at the position of attention and if armed with weapons, will fall in at order arms. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-10
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Forming the Platoon, Continued
Report
The command “REPORT” consists of two substeps: · ·
Receive The Report
Receiving the report Giving the report
To receive the report after all personnel have been formed, the procedures are listed in the table below: Who Platoon Sergeant Squad Leaders Platoon Sergeant
Action Commands “REPORT.” In succession from front to rear, salute and report “ALL PRESENT” or “(Number) MARINES ABSENT.” Commands when the Marines are armed with rifles, · · ·
“INSPECTION, ARMS.” “PORT, ARMS.” “ORDER, ARMS.”
Note: A good way to remember this sequence is to remember the acronym, FRIPO: Fall in, Report, Inspection arms, Port arms, and Order arms to form a platoon with rifles. Give The Report
To give the report when the platoon commander is present, the procedures are listed in the table below: Who Platoon Sergeant Platoon Commander Platoon Sergeant
MCI Course 8013A
Action Faces about after receiving the report and ordering inspection arms and order arms Positions himself six paces to the front and centered on the platoon Salutes and reports, “SIR, ALL PRESENT AND ACCOUNTED FOR” or “SIR, (Number) MARINES ABSENT.”
4-11
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Aligning the Platoon
In Line
Aligning a platoon in line includes a series of commands and movements by the PC: · · ·
Initial Command
Initial command Dressing the ranks Resuming line formation
The PC gives the command, “DRESS RIGHT (LEFT), DRESS.” The procedures for the command of execution, “DRESS are listed in the table below: Who Platoon Members
Platoon Commander
·
Action Execute the arm and head movements as in falling in at normal interval and obtain their alignment.
· ·
Remain in this position until given another command. Faces half left as in marching and proceeds in the most direct route until positioned on line with the front rank and one pace to the right of the right flank Marine
·
Executes a halt facing to the rear
·
Executes a right face, facing down the line Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-12
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Aligning the Platoon, Continued
Dressing The Ranks
When dressing the ranks, the PC should follow the substeps listed in the table below: Step 1 2 3 4 5
6
7
Action Aligns the front rank by commanding those Marines in advance or rear of the line to move backward or forward Addresses the Marines by either name or number in rank Those commanded to move will move the designated number of steps or will continue to move until given the command, “STEADY.” Executes a short series of side steps to the right or left to identify a Marine, but must be in line with the rank when commanding a Marine to move. After verifying the alignment of the first rank · Faces to the left as in marching · Marches straight to the next rank · Does not veer in toward the next squad leader · Halts on line with each succeeding rank · Executes a right face · Aligns that rank in the same manner as the first rank After verifying the alignment of the rear rank · · · ·
Faces to the right as in marching Proceeds straight to a point three paces beyond the front rank Halts Executes a left face Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-13
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Aligning the Platoon, Continued
Resuming Line Formation
The platoon commander gives the command, “READY, FRONT; COVER.” On the command of execution, “FRONT” all platoon members immediately assume the position of attention by lowering their left arm and simultaneously turning their heads to the front. The procedures for the command of execution, “COVER” are listed in the table below: Who Front Rank Remaining Ranks Platoon Commander
Align In Column
To align a platoon in column while marching, the PC gives the command “COVER.” The procedures for the command, “COVER” are listed in the table below: Who Base Squad Leader Other Squad Leaders Base Squad Remaining Marines
MCI Course 8013A
Action Stands fast Covers on the Marine to their front March by the most direct route and take post six paces in front and center of the platoon
Action Obtains a 40-inch distance from the guide Obtain proper interval and align on the base squad leader Obtains a 40-inch distance from the Marine to the front Align on the base squad and cover on their squad leaders
4-14
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Open Ranks
Purpose
The purpose of open ranks is to increase the interval between squads on line.
Open Ranks “MARCH” Procedures
The procedures for opening ranks are similar to the procedures for aligning a platoon in column. The PC gives the command, “OPEN RANKS, MARCH.” The procedures that occurs at the command of execution “MARCH” are listed in the table below: Who First Squad Members
Second Squad Members
Third Squad Members Platoon Commander
· · · · · · · · · ·
Close Ranks “MARCH” Procedures
Returns squads to the position of attention in the same manner as aligning a platoon in line formation
The platoon commander gives the command, “CLOSE RANKS, MARCH.” The procedures that occurs at the command of execution “MARCH” are listed in the table below: Member First Squad Members Second Squad Members Third Squad Members
MCI Course 8013A
Action Take two steps forward. Halt. Execute the movements for dress right. Take one step forward. Halt. Execute the movements for dress right. Stand fast. Execute the movements for dress right. Checks the alignment of the squads
Action Stand fast. Take one step forward and halt. Take two steps forward and halt.
4-15
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Form for Inspection
Initial Commands
To form for inspection, the platoon executes open ranks. After the PC gives the commands, “READY, FRONT, COVER,” he will · · ·
Receiving The Inspecting Officer
Completing The Inspection
MCI Course 8013A
Take one step forward and then face to the front. Be in a position three paces in front of the right file of the first rank of the platoon. Wait to receive the inspection officer at this post.
When receiving the inspecting officer, ·
The PC salutes and reports, “_____ PLATOON, FORMED FOR INSPECTION, SIR.”
·
The inspecting officer returns the salute and asks the PC to precede or follow him through the inspection.
·
The PC precedes or follows the inspecting officer during the inspection as directed by the inspecting officer.
When the inspecting officer has finished inspecting the platoon, ·
The PC takes post three paces in front of the right file of the first rank.
·
The inspecting officer will make comments and discuss discrepancies as appropriate and tell the PC to take charge of the platoon.
·
The PC · Salutes · Replies, “AYE, AYE, SIR” · Faces left · Gives the command, “CLOSE RANKS, MARCH” · Assumes his or her post six paces in front centered on the platoon
4-16
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Halted Movements
Overview
After forming the platoon, you need to become familiar with the different movements of the platoon. The halted movements of a platoon drill are · · · ·
Facing Movements
Facing movements allow you to face in a different direction while halted at the position of attention. They are executed in the cadence of quick time (120 steps per minute). While facing, your arms should not swing out from your sides, but remain at the position of attention. The facing movements covered in this lesson are · · ·
Right Face
Facing movements Side step Back step Hand salute
Right face Left face About face
Right face is a two-count movement. The actions for each count are listed in the table below: Count 1
2
Action At the command, “FACE” · · · · ·
Raise your left heel and right toe slightly. Turn to the right on your right heel and left toe. Keep your left leg straight, but not stiff. Place the left foot smartly beside the right. Stand at the position of attention. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-17
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Halted Movements, Continued
Left Face
Left face is also a two-count movement. The actions for each count are listed in the table below: Count 1
2
About Face
Action At the command, “FACE” · · · · ·
Raise your right heel and left toe slightly. Turn to the left on your left heel and right toe. Keep your right leg straight, but not stiff. Place the right foot smartly beside the left. Stand at the position of attention.
About face is a two-count movement. The actions for each count are listed in the table below: Count 1
Action At the command, “FACE” ·
2
Place your right toe half a foot length behind and slightly to the left of your left heel. · Do not change the position of your left foot. · Rest most of your weight on your left heel. Turn smartly to the right until facing to the rear. · ·
Make turn on the left heel and ball of the right foot. Feet will be at attention when the turn is completed, if your right toe was placed properly in the beginning. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-18
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Halted Movements, Continued
Side Step
The purpose of side step is to move the unit a short distance to the right or left. The command, “RIGHT (LEFT) STEP, MARCH,” is given only while halted at the position of attention. At the command, “MARCH” · · · · ·
Back Step
Move your right (left) foot 12 inches to the right (left). Place your left (right) foot beside your right (left). Repeat this movement at the rate of 120 steps per minute. Keep your legs straight, but not stiff. Hold your arms at attention.
The purpose of side back is to move the unit a short distance to the rear. The command, “BACKWARD, MARCH,” is given only while halted at the position of attention. At the command, “MARCH” · · · ·
Step off to the rear with your left foot. Take 15-inch steps at a rate of 120 steps per minute. Repeat this movement at the rate of 120 steps per minute. Swing your arms naturally. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-19
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Halted Movements, Continued
Hand Salute
The purpose of the hand salute is to render appropriate honors. The command “HAND, SALUTE” is performed in two counts, each with its own command. · ·
Hand Salute Procedures
“HAND, SALUTE.” “READY, TWO.”
The procedures that occur on the commands of execution are listed in the table below: Command SALUTE
·
Action Raise your right hand smartly in the most direct manner until the tip of your forefinger touches the lower part of the headdress, above and slightly to the right of your right eye.
·
Your thumb and fingers should be extended and joined.
·
You should see your entire palm when looking straight forward.
·
Upper arm should be level with the deck and forearm at a 45-degree angle.
·
Your wrist and hand should be straight, a continuation of the line formed by your forearm.
· TWO
MCI Course 8013A
If not in ranks, turn your head and eyes toward the person or colors you are saluting. Move your hand smartly in the most direct manner back to the position of attention.
4-20
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Positions of Rest
Positions
The different positions of rest are · · · ·
“PARADE, REST” “AT EASE” “REST” “FALL OUT”
With the exception of parade rest, all commands are combined commands. Parade rest is the only one with a preparatory and command of execution. Parade Rest
The purpose of parade rest is to give relief from the position of attention. The command, “PARADE, REST” is given only while halted and at the position of attention and is a one-count movement. At the command, “REST” ·
Move your left foot smartly 12 inches to the left. Both legs should be straight with your weight resting equally on each foot.
·
At the same time, join your hands behind your back with your right hand inside your left, palms to the rear just below the belt.
·
Loosely hold your left thumb with your right hand. Fingers are extended and joined.
·
Do not move.
·
Do not talk.
·
Hold your head and eyes in the same position as you would if at attention. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-21
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Positions of Rest, Continued
At Ease
The purpose of at ease is to give further relief from the position of attention. The command, “AT EASE” is given while halted and at the position of attention or when not in ranks. It is a one-count movement. At the command, “AT EASE” · · ·
Rest
The purpose of rest is to give further relief from the position of attention. The command, “REST” is given while halted and at the position of attention. It is a one-count movement. At the command, “REST” · ·
Fall Out
Keep your right foot in place. You may move about (adjust gear), but you must not talk. When given the command while not in ranks, simply means to continue what you are doing, but cease talking.
Keep your right foot in place. You may talk and move about (adjust gear).
The purpose of fall out is to give further relief from the position of attention for extended periods of time. The command, “FALL OUT” is given while halted and at the position of attention. It is a one-count movement. At the command, “FALL OUT” leave your position in ranks, but remain nearby. When “FALL IN” is given, return to your position in ranks at the position of attention.
MCI Course 8013A
4-22
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Marching the Platoon
Common Platoon Movements
Once you have your platoon facing in the right direction, you should be ready to step off. The most common platoon movements on the march are · · · · · · ·
Mark Time
Resuming Forward March
Mark time Half step Change step Change direction on the march March to the flank March to the rear March to the oblique
The purpose of mark time is to stop the forward movement of the platoon while still maintaining a rhythmic cadence. The command, “MARK TIME, MARCH” may be given at the halt or while marching forward at quick time, half step, or double time as either foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, “MARCH,” all platoon members will ·
Take one more 30-inch step as if coming to a halt.
·
Bring your heels together then begin marking time without loss of cadence with the opposite foot.
·
Raise each foot so the ball of the foot is approximately 2 inches and the heel approximately 4 inches from the deck at a cadence of 120 steps per minute.
·
At the same time, swing your arms naturally as in marching.
The purpose of resuming march is to resume the forward march at a quick time cadence. The command, “FORWARD, MARCH” may be given as either foot strikes the deck. On the command, “MARCH,” take one more step in place, then step off with a 30-inch step. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-23
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Marching the Platoon, Continued
Half Step
The purpose of a half step is to slow the forward movement of the platoon while still maintaining a rhythmic cadence by reducing the size of the step to 15 inches. The command, “HALF STEP, MARCH” may be given at the halt or while marching forward at quick time as either foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, “MARCH,” all platoon members will · · · ·
Resuming Forward March
Take one more 30-inch step. Begin taking 15-inch steps at quick time cadence. The balls of your feet should strike the deck before your heels At the same time, maintain a natural arm swing.
The purpose of resuming forward march is to resume the forward march at a quick time cadence. The command, “FORWARD, MARCH” may be given as either foot strikes the deck. On the command, “MARCH,” take one more 15-inch step, then step off with a 30-inch step. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-24
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Marching the Platoon, Continued
Change Step
The purpose of change step is to change the step of cadence while on the march. The command, “CHANGE STEP, MARCH” may be given while marching at quick time or double time, marking time, or double time in place as the right foot strikes the deck.
Change Step Procedures
The procedures that all platoon members take on the command of execution, “MARCH” are listed in the table below: From Quick Time or Double Time
·
Action Take one more step, 30-inch or 36-inch as appropriate.
·
Marking Time Double Time in Place
As your right foot comes forward to the next step, place the toe near the left heel and step out again with the left foot. This changes the cadence count, but not the rhythm. Lift and lower the left foot twice in succession. Hop twice on the left foot and continue to double time in place. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-25
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Marching the Platoon, Continued
Change Direction
The procedures to change the direction of a column while marching are listed in the table below: Who Platoon Commander
·
Action Commands, “COLUMN RIGHT (left, half right, half left), MARCH.
·
Pivot Marine
Gives the preparatory command and the command of execution so that they end on the foot in the direction of the turn. On the command of execution, “MARCH” ·
Faces to the right (left) as in marching and steps out one full step with his right (left) foot in the direction of the turn
·
Half steps
· Other Marines of the Leading Rank
Resumes the full step when the other Marines of his rank are abreast On the command of execution, “MARCH” ·
Twice oblique to the right (left) without changing interval ·
Execute the first oblique at the command of execution.
·
Execute the second oblique when opposite their new line of march. When the oblique is completed, they will be marching the new front with proper interval.
·
Ranks in the Rear of the Leading Rank
Come abreast of the pivot Marine and conform to his or her step. On the command of execution, “MARCH,” execute the movement on the same ground and in the same way as the leading rank.
Note: The base element during the turn is the squad on the flank in the direction of the turn. The pivot Marine is the first Marine in the base squad, excluding the PC and the guide. Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
4-26
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Marching the Platoon, Continued
Platoon Commander and Guide
During column movements, the PC and guide
March to the Flank
The purpose of march to the flank is to march a platoon to either flank. The command is “BY THE RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK, MARCH.” This movement may be executed while marching forward at quick time. The command of execution will come as the foot in the direction of travel strikes the deck. Do not give this command when a platoon is halted. On the command of execution, “MARCH,” all platoon members
· · ·
· · ·
Execute smartly oblique in the direction of the turn. Half step. Resume full step in a manner that places them in their proper positions.
Take one more step. Pivot 90 degrees to the right (left) as in marching. Step out with their right (left) foot in the new direction.
When this movement is executed from a column at close interval, the squad to the rear of the squad that becomes the leading squad after making the turn takes up the half step after turning until a 40-inch distance is obtained between the squads. After such a movement, the platoon maintains normal interval until ordered otherwise. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-27
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Marching the Platoon, Continued
March to the Rear
The purpose of march to the rear is to march a platoon to the opposite direction of travel. The command, “TO THE REAR, MARCH” is given so the command of execution will come as the right foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, “MARCH,” all platoon members · · ·
Take one more step with the left foot in the direction of march. Pivot 180 degrees on both feet. Step off with the left foot in the new direction of march.
Note: Use this movement to march to the rear for a short distance. Do not give the platoon column movements while marching to the rear. March in the Oblique
To march a platoon in the oblique, the PC gives the command, “RIGHT (LEFT) OBLIQUE, MARCH.” On the command of execution, “MARCH,” all platoon members · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Take one more step forward. Pivot 45 degrees to the right (left). Step off in the oblique with their right (left) foot.
4-28
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Commands Given in the Oblique
Only Commands
The only commands you can give while marching in the oblique are · · · · ·
“FORWARD, MARCH”
Give the command, “FORWARD, MARCH” to resume the original direction of march. Give the command of execution, “MARCH” as the foot toward the original direction of march strikes the deck. On the command of execution, “MARCH,” all members of the platoon will · ·
“PLATOON, HALT”
“FORWARD, MARCH.” “PLATOON, HALT.” “IN PLACE, HALT.” “MARK TIME, MARCH.” “RESUME, MARCH.”
Pivot 45 degrees to their left (right) on their right (left) foot. Step off with their left (right foot in the original direction of march.
Give this command, “PLATOON, HALT” to halt the platoon in the original direction of march. Give the command of execution, “HALT” as the left (right) foot strikes the deck when halting from the right (left) oblique. On the command of execution, “HALT,” all members of the platoon will · · ·
Take one more step in the oblique direction. Pivot to the original direction of march on their right (left) foot. Assume the position of attention by placing their left (right) foot against their right (left) foot. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-29
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Commands Given in the Oblique, Continued
“IN PLACE, HALT”
Give the command, “IN PLACE, HALT” to temporarily halt the platoon in the oblique to correct errors. The command of execution, “HALT” is given as either foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution “HALT,” all members of the platoon will · ·
Take one more step in the oblique. Assume the position of attention by placing the right (left) foot against the left (right) foot.
“MARK TIME, The command, “MARK TIME, MARCH” is executed the same as while on MARCH” the march. To resume marching in the oblique after marking time, give the
command “RESUME, MARCH.” “RESUME, MARCH”
The only command you can give after halting in place is “RESUME, MARCH.” On the command of execution, “MARCH,” all members of the platoon will · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Step off with the left foot. Continue to march in the oblique direction.
4-30
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Pass in Review
Purpose
Pass in review is conducted to give honors to a reviewing officer. March the platoon past the reviewing officer and render the appropriate salute as you pass. Conduct a pass in review with the platoon in column at either close or normal interval with weapons at right shoulder arms.
Procedure
The steps to pass the platoon in review are listed in the table below: Step 1 2
Action The PC marches the platoon to a position where they will pass in front of the reviewing stand. · The PC gives the command, “EYES, RIGHT.” ·
3
4
The command of execution, “RIGHT” is given as the right foot strikes the deck about six paces before coming on line with the reviewing stand. On the command of execution, “RIGHT” ·
The base squad maintains the position of attention.
·
All other members of the platoon snap their head 45 degrees to the right as they march. When the end of the platoon is about six paces past the reviewing stand, the PC gives the command, “READY, FRONT.”
·
·
5
MCI Course 8013A
The command of execution, “FRONT” is given as the left foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, “FRONT,” the members of the platoon with their head to the right snap their head back to the original front and continue to march.
4-31
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Dismiss the Platoon
Armed Platoon
Dismiss a platoon from line formation with the Marines at attention. To dismiss a platoon when the troops are armed, give the following commands: · · ·
Unarmed Platoon
MCI Course 8013A
“INSPECTION, ARMS.” “PORT, ARMS.” “DISMISSED.”
To dismiss a platoon of unarmed troops, give the command, “DISMISSED.” The platoon sergeant usually dismisses the platoon.
4-32
Study Unit 4, Lesson 1
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete exercise items 1 through 5 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
How many steps per minute is quick time cadence? a. b. c. d.
Item 2
What is the correct order to form a platoon of armed Marines? a. b. c. d.
Item 3
60 100 120 180
Fall in, order arms, report, port arms, and give the report. Fall in, report, inspection arms, port arms, and order arms. Fall in, inspection arms, report, port arms, and order arms. Fall in, port arms, order arms, report, and inspection arms.
In which cadence (steps per minute) are all facing movements executed when in a halted position? a. b. c. d.
60 100 120 180 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-33
Study Unit 4 Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 4
What is the only command that may be given after halting in place in the oblique? a. b. c. d.
Item 5
“FORWARD” “TO THE REAR” “MARK TIME” “RESUME MARCH”
What is the correct command to dismiss a platoon of unarmed Marines? a. b. c. d.
“INSPECTION ARMS, PORT ARMS, AND DISMISSED.” “PORT ARMS, DISMISSED.” “DISMISSED.” “FALL OUT.” Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-34
Study Unit 4 Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5
MCI Course 8013A
Answer c b c d c
4-35
Reference 4-8 4-11 4-17 4-30 4-32
Study Unit 4 Lesson 1 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
4-36
Study Unit 4 Lesson 1 Exercise
LESSON 2 SWORD MANUAL Introduction
Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope
This lesson includes the commands and movements of platoon drill using the sword.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to ·
Identify the scabbard nomenclature.
·
Identify the sword nomenclature.
·
Describe how to properly size the sword.
·
Describe how to properly wear the sword.
·
Describe how to properly carry the sword.
·
Identify common rules for sword manual. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-39
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Introduction, Continued
Learning Objectives, continued
In This Lesson
·
Identify the procedures to draw sword.
·
Identify the procedures to order sword.
·
Identify the procedures to carry sword.
·
Identify the procedures to present sword.
·
Identify the procedures to execute eyes right with the sword.
·
Identify the procedures to return sword.
·
Identify the procedures to parade rest with the sword.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction General Information Common Rules Draw Sword Order Sword Carry Sword Present Sword Eyes Right (Left) Return Sword Parade Rest Lesson 2 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
4-40
See Page 4-39 4-41 4-43 4-45 4-46 4-47 4-48 4-50 4-51 4-52 4-53
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
General Information
Marine NCO Honor
Of all the active duty services in our country, the only NCOs authorized to carry a sword are Marine NCOs. In recognition of their leadership and contributions, Marine NCOs have been entrusted with this proud symbol of authority and leadership. With this trust comes the responsibility of properly executing the Marine NCO sword manual.
History
The Marine NCO sword is almost identical to the Army officer’s sword of 1850. In the mid-1800’s, Marine officers used this sword. When the Mameluke hilt sword was reintroduced for Marine officers in 1875, the Army officer’s sword of 1850 was prescribed for Marine NCOs.
Scabbard Nomenclature
The scabbard nomenclature is identified in the diagram below:
Sword Nomenclature
The sword nomenclature is identified in the diagram below:
Sizing the Sword
The sword comes in various lengths in increments of 2 inches (28, 30, 32, etc. inches). Determine the proper size of the sword while at the position of carry sword. The tip of the blade should be on line with the center of the opening of your ear. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-41
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
General Information, Continued
Wearing the Sword
MCI Course 8013A
Wear the sword on the left side of the body with the knuckle bow to the front. The frog will ensure the scabbard and sword remain in place.
4-42
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Common Rules
Draw and Return Sword
Draw your sword whenever you are with armed troops or in command of a unit. Draw and return sword is done without command. Unless you are members of the commander’s staff, all other movements of the sword manual are executed at the commander’s command to the unit. The commander and his staff execute all other movements of the sword manual at the commander’s separate command to his staff, given either before or after his command to the unit.
Carry Sword
Assume carry sword when · · · · ·
Giving commands Changing position in formation at quick time Addressing of being addressed by a senior Receiving the preparatory command for and while marching at quick time Any manual of arms movement has been ordered, except · Parade rest · At ease · Rest · Present arms · Order arms · Eyes right (left)
When in formations with personnel to your front at normal distance (organizational staff included), remain at carry sword except during rest or at ease. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-43
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Common Rules, Continued
Present Sword
Assume present sword when · · · · ·
Saluting with the sword The unit is presented to colors The National Anthem, To the Colors, Retreat, or Hail to the Chief is being played Executing eyes right (left) Marching past a reviewing officer
Note: Remain at the carry in the interior of a formation. Marching With the Sword
When marching with the sword at the carry, swing your arms naturally. Do not hold the scabbard with your left hand. When you march at double time, hold the sword diagonally across your chest with the sharp edge towards the front. Hold the scabbard with your left hand just below the frog.
Reading Documents
When you call roll, read documents, or publish orders to a formation · · · ·
Out of Formation
MCI Course 8013A
Slip the fingers of your left hand between the sword grip and the guard. Allow the sword to hang across your knuckles with the grip to the front. Keep your left elbow against your side. Hold the document with both hands.
When not in formation, keep your sword in your scabbard. Salute by executing a hand salute.
4-44
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Draw Sword
Three-Count Movement
When at attention with the sword in the scabbard, draw your sword when you hear the command, “DRAW SWORD.” Draw sword is a three-count movement. Draw sword only when halted and at attention.
Procedures
The procedures for each count of draw sword is listed in the table below: Count 1
Action On the preparatory command, “DRAW” ·
Grip the scabbard just below the frog with your left hand. Tilt the scabbard forward to form an angle of 45 degrees with the deck.
·
2
Take the grip in your right hand and raise it about 10 inches from the scabbard. Your right forearm is parallel to the deck with your left hand holding the scabbard against your side. On the command of execution, “SWORD” ·
3
Draw the sword smartly from the scabbard, raising your right arm to its full extent and directly to the front at an angle of 45 degrees. Your arm and the sword, with the true edge down, form a straight line.
· At the same time, drop your left hand to your side. Then ·
Bring the back of the blade against the shoulder seam of your coat or shirt with the blade vertical and the knuckle bow to the front. When you make this movement, your right arm remains straight and the sword is rotated into position by manipulating your wrist and fingers.
·
Your arm is vertical and nearly extended, but may contain a slight bend at the elbow to hold the sword in position.
·
Your thumb and first two fingers embrace the lower part of the grip with the thumb against the trouser seam.
·
Your remaining fingers are joined behind the end of the hilt.
This is the position of carry sword.
MCI Course 8013A
4-45
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Order Sword
Position
In the order sword position · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
The sword slants down to the front with the point 3 inches from the deck. The true edge of the blade is turned down. Your right arm hangs naturally to the side with the thumb along the trouser seam.
4-46
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Carry Sword
Carry Sword to Order Sword
To move from carry sword to order sword position, rotate the sword down into position using your wrist and fingers.
Order Sword to Carry Sword
To move from order sword to carry sword position · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Pivot the sword about the fulcrum the thumb and index finger forms. Push your palm down on the pommel. Snap your wrist to start the movement of the blade. Lock the sword into position when the blade reaches your shoulder seam.
4-47
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Present Sword
Two-Count Movement
To present the sword from carry or order sword, the command is “PRESENT, SWORD” or “PRESENT, ARMS.” Give these commands only when halted at order or carry sword. Present sword is a two-count movement.
Procedures
The procedures for each count of present sword are listed in the table below: Count 1
Action On the preparatory command, “PRESENT” ·
While rotating the sword so the knuckle bow faces your left, raise your right hand to the level of and 6 inches in front of your neck.
·
As your hand is raised from the seam of the trousers, keep it close to the body, moving it in a straight line.
·
When your hand is in the upper position, your arm is bent at the elbow with your elbow against your body.
·
Keep your thumb on the left side of the grip and keep your wrist straight.
·
2
The blade is inclined forward and up at an angle of 30 degrees from the vertical and the true edge is to the left. On the command of execution, “SWORD (ARMS)” ·
Move the point down smartly to a position of 3 inches above the deck and slightly right of your right foot.
·
Move your arm in a straight line on the downward movement so that it ends up hanging vertically with the knuckle bow of the sword against your trouser seam.
·
Your thumb remains on the left side of the grip, pointing toward the center of the guard.
·
The blade is inclined down and forward with the true edge to the left.
You are now at the position of present sword. Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
4-48
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Present Sword, Continued
Order Sword from Present Sword
To move to order sword from present sword, the command is “ORDER SWORD (ARMS).” Order sword is a one-count movement. On the command of execution, “SWORD (ARMS),” turn the true edge down by rotating the sword with your fingers to the position prescribed for order sword.
MCI Course 8013A
4-49
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Eyes Right (Left)
Two-Count Movement
Execute eyes right (left) only when halted at order sword or marching at carry sword. Eyes right (left) is a two-count movement. The command is “EYES, RIGHT (LEFT).” When marching, give both commands on the right (left) foot.
Procedures
The procedures for each count of eyes right (left) are listed in the table below: Count 1 2
Returning to the Front
Action On the preparatory command, “EYES,” execute the first count of present sword. On the command of execution, “RIGHT (LEFT)” ·
Execute the second count of present sword.
·
At the same time turn your head 45 degrees to the right (left).
The procedures to return to the front are listed in the table below: While Halted
· ·
Marching
MCI Course 8013A
·
Action Follow the reviewing officer with your head and eyes until he is in front of you. When the reviewing officer has passed by, execute order sword by turning the true edge down. Give the command, “READY, FRONT” when you are six paces passed the reviewing officer.
·
On the preparatory command, “READY,” turn the true edge down.
·
On the command of execution, “FRONT,” smartly turn your head and eyes to the front and execute carry sword from the order.
4-50
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Return Sword
Three-Count Movement
To return the sword to the scabbard, the command is “RETURN, SWORD.” Return sword is a three-count movement and is executed from order or carry sword.
Procedures
The procedures for each count of return sword are listed in the table below: Count 1
Action On the preparatory command, “RETURN” ·
Execute the first count of present sword.
·
2
3
MCI Course 8013A
At the same time, grasp the scabbard with your left hand just below the frog and tilt it forward at an angle of 30 degrees. Then ·
Look down at the opening of the scabbard.
·
Turn the sword down and guide the point into the opening until the hilt is 10 inches above the throat of the scabbard.
·
Your right forearm is parallel to the deck with your left hand holding the scabbard against your body.
· Raise your head back up to the position of attention On the command of execution, “SWORD” ·
Push smartly down on the sword so it slides all the way into the scabbard and release it.
·
In the same motion, bring your right hand back to your right side, release the scabbard with your left hand, and assume the position of attention.
4-51
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Parade Rest
Command
Execute parade rest from order sword. The command is “PARADE, REST.” If you are at carry sword when the command is given, come to order sword on the preparatory command “PARADE.”
Command of Execution
On the command of execution, “REST” · ·
Order Sword from Parade Rest
The command to return to the position of order sword from parade rest is “ATTENTION.” On this command, simultaneously · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Move the left foot and arm the same as when armed with a rifle. At the same time, lower the point of the sword to the deck.
Raise the point of the sword 3 inches off the deck. Move your left arm and foot back to the position of attention.
4-52
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete exercise items 1 through 11 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Items 1 Through 4
Identify the nomenclature for the sword as indicated in the diagram below:
(1) ___________________________________________________________ (2) ___________________________________________________________ (3) ___________________________________________________________ (4) ___________________________________________________________
Item 5
What position determines the proper size for the NCO sword? a. b. c. d.
Parade rest Order sword Present sword Carry sword Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-53
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 6
Draw sword is a ____________ movement. a. b. c. d.
Item 7
After the third count of draw sword, what position are you in? a. b. c. d.
Item 8
Down Up Inboard Outboard
Present sword or present arms may only be given from what positions? a. b. c. d.
Item 10
Carry sword Order sword Raised sword Present sword
In the order sword position, which direction is the true edge of the sword turned in? a. b. c. d.
Item 9
one-count two-count three-count four-count
Carry and parade rest Carry and order Order and eyes right Order and parade rest
On the first count of return sword, raise the sword up as in the first count of present sword and a. b. c. d.
look down at the opening of the scabbard. raise your head back to the position of attention. grasp the scabbard and tilt it forward. parallel your right forearm to the deck. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-54
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 11
Where is the sword tip during parade rest? a. b. c. d.
Resting on the deck 2 inches above the deck 3 inches above the deck 4 inches above the deck Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-55
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MCI Course 8013A
Answer Hilt Ricasso True edge Fuller d c a a b c a
4-56
Reference 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-45 4-45 4-46 4-48 4-51 4-52
Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise
LESSON 3 FLAGS AND GUIDONS Introduction
Estimated Study Time
40 minutes
Lesson Scope
This lesson mainly deals with a guidon—usually rectangular, of distinctive color and design, and used as a symbol, a standard, a signal, or an emblem. This lesson will cover the common definitions, history, and etiquette of the flags used in the United States Marine Corps.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to ·
Identify the flag types used in the Marine Corps.
·
Identify common flag terminology.
·
Describe the history of the national ensign.
·
Identify how to properly display the colors.
·
Identify proper protocols for the national ensign.
·
Describe organizational flag history.
·
Describe the Marine Corps organizational flags.
·
Identify Marine Corps standard protocols.
·
Identify the three classes of organizational standards.
·
Identify proper usage for guidons.
·
Identify select movements with the guidon. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-57
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Introduction, Continued In This Lesson
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Flag Terminology National Ensign History National Ensign Sizes Displaying the National Ensign National Ensign Protocols Organizational Flag History Standard Protocols Types of Organizational Standards Guidon Protocols Guidon Movements Lesson 3 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
4-58
See Page 4-57 4-59 4-60 4-61 4-62 4-63 4-66 4-68 4-70 4-71 4-73 4-78
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Flag Terminology
Two Basic Types
The two flags commonly used by the Marine Corps today are known by many different names. However, they still represent either the · ·
Definitions
Nation (national flag) Organization (organizational flag)
The different flag related terms are defined in the table below: Term Battle Standard (Battle Color) Cased Colors
Ensign
Guidon Mast Pennant Staff Standards Streamer
Definition The distinguishing organizational flag authorized for and bearing the title of a designated unit of the Fleet Marine Force. Colors covered with a canvas or leather type shell. Flags are colors when ·
Mounted on a staff (pike) and carried by an individual on foot
· ·
Displayed or cased in a fixed location The national flag flown on a naval vessel or aboard a Navy or Marine Corps installation ashore.
· Also called national ensign. A small flag or pennant that a military unit carries as a standard. A vertical pole used to hoist the national ensign. A flag or emblem similar in shape to a ship's pennant. · A pole on which a flag is displayed · A flagstaff Flags mounted on a vehicle · A long narrow flag, banner, or pennant ·
MCI Course 8013A
Commonly used to decorate organizational standards with unit awards
4-59
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
National Ensign History
Nicknames
The national flag is a representation of our country. Our flag is a symbol around which we all unite. Old Glory and Stars and Stripes are just a couple of nicknames used to reference our national flag.
Initial Adoption The Continental Congress adopted the American flag, according to tradition
made by Betsy Ross, on 14 June 1777. Representing the 13 original colonies, the flag was adorned with a circle of 13 white stars on a blue background (known as the union) and 13 red and white stripes. Inspiration for National Anthem
As the American frontier expanded, two new states were added to the Union and were incorporated into the flag. Two stars and two stripes were added to the design—making a total of 15 each. This flag withstood enemy bombardment at Fort McHenry, Maryland from 13 to 14 September 1814, which inspired Francis Scott Key to write the Star Spangled Banner.
Law About Stars and Stripes
Captain Samuel C. Reid, U.S. Navy, suggested to Congress that the stripes remain 13 in number to represent the 13 original colonies and that a star be added to the blue field for each new state coming into the Union. The resulting law of 4 April 1818 requires that a star be added for each new state on the 4th of July after its admission. Today’s American flag remains virtually unchanged with the exception of the number of stars in the union. Now 50 states are represented in the union.
MCI Course 8013A
4-60
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
National Ensign Sizes
Dimension Measurements
The flag’s dimensions are measured on the · ·
Storm
The national ensign comes in three sizes. The smallest size measures 5 feet by 9½ feet. This flag is · ·
Post
Flown under normal conditions Flown daily between the hours of 0800 and sunset
The garrison flag is the largest, measuring 20 feet by 38 feet. The garrison flag is · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Flown during inclement weather conditions Called the storm flag
The post flag measures 10 feet by 19 feet. The post flag is · ·
Garrison
Hoist—the length that rides along the mast. Fly—the length that blows in the wind.
Flown on Sundays and holidays Not flown from a mast of less than 65 feet
4-61
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Displaying the National Ensign
Always Right
The national flag represents the living country and is considered a living thing. The union is the honor point. The right arm is the sword arm and therefore the point of danger. Hence, the right is the place of honor. The edge of the flag that is toward the staff is the heraldic dexter or right edge. The union of the flag and the flag itself, when in company with other flags, is always given the honor point. That means the national flag is always given the marching right, the flag's own right, or an observer's left.
Customary Display
The universal custom is to display the flag from sunrise to sunset. However, when a patriotic effect is desired for special occasions, the flag may be displayed 24 hours a day if properly illuminated during the hours of darkness.
Hoisting and Lowering
Colors, also known as the ceremonial hoisting and lowering of the national ensign, is performed daily. Hoisting the colors (morning colors) is performed at 0800. Lowering the colors (evening colors) occurs at sunset.
Half Mast
Colors will be flown from the peak or truck of the mast, except when directed to be flown at half-mast. Colors at half-mast means it is flown at the middle point of the mast. The middle point of a ·
Guyed mast is midway between the truck of the mast and the point of attachment of the guys.
·
Mast with a yardarm is midway between the truck of the mast and the yardarm.
Technically, an ensign flown at any position other than the truck of the mast is considered to be half-masted.
MCI Course 8013A
4-62
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
National Ensign Protocols
Executive Order
Never permit any form of disrespect to the national flag. Obey the cautions set forth in the Executive order by President Taft, dated 29 October 1912:
Cautions To Be Obeyed
As set forth in the Executive order, do not ·
Dip the national flag to any person or thing. The organizational colors, state flag, or institutional flag will render this honor.
·
Display the national flag with the union down, except as a distress signal.
·
Place any other flag or pennant above, on the same level, or to the right of the national flag.
·
Let the national flag touch the ground or the floor or trail in the water.
·
Place any object or emblem of any kind on or above the national flag.
·
Use the national flag as drapery in any form.
·
Fasten the national flag in any manner that will permit it to be easily torn.
·
Drape the national flag over the hood, top, sides, or back of a vehicle, train, or boat. Fix the national flag firmly to the vehicle.
·
Display the national flag on a float in a parade except from a staff.
·
Use the national flag as a covering for a ceiling.
·
Carry the national flag flat or horizontally, but always aloft and free.
·
Put lettering on the national flag.
·
Use the national flag in any form of advertising or fasten advertising signs to a pole from which you fly the national flag.
·
Display, use, or store the national flag so that it can be easily soiled or damaged.
Note: During divine services on board a ship out to sea, the church pennant is flown above the national ensign. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-63
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
National Ensign Protocols, Continued
Folding
The procedures for folding the national ensign are identified in the table below. Step 1
Action Fold the flag in half lengthwise, so the crease parallels the red and white stripes.
2
Fold the flag in half again, so the new crease also parallels the red and white stripes and the union is to the outside.
3
Fold the fly end (the end away from the union) of the flag to the top, so the single edge lies perpendicularly across the stripes.
4
Continue to fold the triangle formed in step 3 until you have folded the entire flag into a triangle.
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-64
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
National Ensign Protocols, Continued
Funerals
On the Casket
The national flag is used to cover the casket at the military funeral of any ·
Member of the military forces in active service
·
Member of the Marine Corps Reserve
·
Persons on the retired list of the Marine Corps and the Marine Corps Reserve
·
Members of recognized military organizations
·
Former members of the military service who have been discharged therefrom under honorable conditions
Place the national flag on the casket the reverse of that prescribed for displaying it vertically against a wall. The flag shall be placed · ·
Lengthwise on the casket Union at the head and over the left shoulder of the deceased
However, the flag will not be · · · Present the Flag
MCI Course 8013A
Lowered into the grave Allowed to touch the ground Committed to the deep for a burial at sea
The interment flag is furnished at government expense for the nearest kin at the conclusion of the interment. When presented, the flag is ·
Folded in the prescribed manner
·
Presented to the next of kin in a dignified manner with a short statement such as, "This flag is offered by a grateful nation in memory of the faithful service performed by your (relationship)."
4-65
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Organizational Flag History
Precursors to the Standard
Very little information is available regarding the flags carried by early American Marines, although indications are the Grand Union flag was carried ashore by the battalion led by Captain Samuel Nicholas on New Providence Island, 3 March 1776. It is quite possible the Rattlesnake flag was also carried on this expedition. During the 1830s and 1840s, the standard consisted of a white field with gold fringe and bore an elaborate design of an anchor and eagle in the center. Before the Mexican War, this flag bore the legend, To the Shores of Tripoli across the top. Later it was revised to read, From Tripoli to the Halls of the Montezumas.
Standards of Early Battles
During the Mexican and Civil Wars, Marines in the field carried a flag similar to the national flag, comprised of red and white stripes and a union. The union, however, contained an eagle perched on a shield of the United States and a half-wreath beneath the shield, with 29 stars encircling the entire design. Beginning in 1876, Marines carried the national colors (the Stars and Stripes) with U.S. Marine Corps embroidered in yellow on the middle red stripe. At the time of the Vera Cruz landing in 1914, Marines carried a more distinctive standard. The design consisted of a blue field with a laurel wreath encircling the Marine Corps emblem in the center. A scarlet ribbon above the emblem carried the words U.S. Marine Corps while another scarlet ribbon below the emblem carried the motto Semper Fidelis.
Orders
Orders were issued on 2 April 1921, which directed all national colors be manufactured without the · ·
Yellow fringe Words U.S. Marine Corps embroidered on the red stripe
An order dated 14 March 1922 retired all national colors still in use with yellow fringe or wording on the flag. Following World War I, the Army practice of attaching silver bands carrying inscriptions enumerating specific decorations and battles was adopted. This practice was discontinued on 23 January 1961. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-66
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Organizational Flag History, Continued
Modern Standard
MCI Course 8013A
Marine Corps Order No. 4 of 18 April 1925 designated gold and scarlet as the official colors of the U.S. Marine Corps. These colors, however, were not reflected in the official Marine Corps standard until 18 January 1939 when a new design incorporating the new colors was approved. The design was essentially that of today's Marine Corps standard.
4-67
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Standard Protocols
General Description
The Marine Corps organizational flag shall be · ·
Marine Corps Insignia
On the outer side of each ply will be appliqued machine embroidered components of the Marine Corps insignia, consisting of ·
· · Fringe
Spread eagle with a flowing · Motto ribbon containing the words Semper Fidelis in the eagle’s beak · Scroll, 3½ inches tall, underneath the eagle that contains 2½-inch lettering citing the name of the organization, United States Marine Corps or United States Marine Corps Reserve. Globe Fouled anchor
The fringe shall be · · · ·
Cord
Nylon, 52 inches on the hoist by 66 inches on the fly, excluding the headings and fringe Made of either one or two plies of lightweight nylon scarlet cloth
Hand knotted 2½ inches wide Golden-yellow color Trimmed on three sides of the standard
Except when streamers are authorized, each standard shall have attached below the spearhead of the staff a cord of scarlet and yellow threads approximately · ·
3/8 inch in diameter 8 feet and 6 inches in length with a tassel at each end Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-68
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Standard Protocols, Continued
Authority
Marine Corps colors or standards will be carried by the organization to which issue is authorized on the same occasions as the national colors. Except when specifically authorized by the Commandant of the Marine Corps, Marine Corps colors or standards will not be issued to temporary or provisional units or organizations.
Colors
MCI Course 8013A
Gold and scarlet are the official colors of the Marine Corps. All guidons, banners, athletic ribbons, pennants, and other articles ordinarily designed to represent the Marine Corps will use these colors. The gold will conform as nearly as possible to that in the dress chevrons for enlisted personnel.
4-69
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Types of Organizational Standards
Three Classes
A joint service specification designates Marine Corps flags as Type III flags. The three classes of organizational standards are identified as · · ·
Type III Class 1
Class 1 Class 2 Class 3
Type III Class 1 standards are the command battle and organizational standards authorized for · · ·
Designated units of the Fleet Marine Force Major non-Fleet Marine Force commands The Marine Corps Junior Reserve Officer Training Corps (USMCJROTC)
These distinguishing flags require the organization embroidered on the scroll. The command designation on the scroll is spelled out unless the unit designation is too long for the 36 spaces contained on the scroll. Then, standard Marine Corps abbreviations, with numbers and letters will be used. The letters, FMF will be included last on the scroll for all Fleet Marine Force battle standards. Type III Class 2
Type III Class 2 organizational standards are authorized for ·
Active non-Fleet Marine Force activities are not authorized the Type III Class 1 standard · The words, United States Marine Corps are on the scroll. Type III Class 3
Type III Class 3 organizational standards are authorized for · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
General officers of the Marine Corps Reserve in an active status Reserve units that are not authorized the battle standard The words, United States Marine Corps Reserve are on the scroll.
4-70
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Guidon Protocols
Definition
An organization guidon is a company, battery, squadron, or designated detachment marker bearing the Marine Corps emblem and the abbreviated designation of the unit to which authorized.
Guidons Description
The guidon shall be made of red wool bunting upon which insignia, letters, and numbers, as required, of gold wool bunting shall be sewn on each side. This guidon shall measuring 1.83 feet on the hoist and 2.33 feet on the fly. Guidons will always have regimental letters and numbers and will be consistent in size: · · · ·
Marine Corps Emblem
A Marine Corps emblem (eagle, globe, and anchor) is placed in the center of each side of the guidon. The emblem shall measure approximately · · ·
Display and Carrying
One number or letter 6 inches Two to three letters or numbers 4½ inches Four or more letters or numbers 1¾ inches Numerals preceding letters will be 4½ inches
8½ inches from tip to tip of the eagle's wings Globe 5½ inches in diameter Anchor 11 inches overall
In garrison, the guidon may be displayed at company headquarters between morning and evening colors, except during inclement weather and when carried in formation. The guidon is carried at ceremonies and any other time the commander prescribes. The guidon bearer is considered under arms and will not carry a weapon. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-71
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Guidon Protocols, Continued
Types
There are three types of organization guidons. The requirement for each organizational guidon is listed in the table below: Type I
MCI Course 8013A
Unit Fleet Marine Force
II
Non-Fleet Marine Force
III
Reserve
4-72
Lettering The letters, FMF shall be centered above the Marine Corps emblem on an arc. The letters, USMC shall be placed centrally above the Marine Corps emblem on an arc. Same as for Types I and II, except the letters, USMCR shall be centered above the emblem.
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Guidon Movements
Seven Positions
There are seven positions of the guidon: · · · · · · ·
Order Guidon
Order guidon Carry guidon Present guidon Ready guidon Guidon salute Parade rest with the guidon Fall out with the guidon
At the order, the · · · · · · ·
Ferrule rests on the deck touching the right shoe to the right of the toe. Staff is held in the “V” formed by the thumb and fingers. Thumb and fingers should be straight with fingers touching. Right arm is kept behind the staff and slightly bent. Upper staff rests in the hollow of the right shoulder. Staff points straight up with the flat side of the spearhead facing front. Guidon bearer is at the position of attention with the exception of the right hand. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-73
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Guidon Movements, Continued
Carry Guidon
Carry guidon, the normal position of the guidon while marching, is the same position as order guidon except the ferrule is 6 inches above the deck. The steps to carry guidon are listed in the table below: Step 1 2 3
4
Action Executed on a preparatory command, such as “FORWARD,” which requires moving to a new position. Place the left hand on the staff 2 inches above the right hand. · Loosen the grip of the right hand. · Pull the staff up with the left hand until the ferrule is 6 inches above the deck. · Hold the staff straight with the right hand. Move the left hand smartly back to the side.
To return to the order guidon position, on “ARMS,” allow the staff to slip through the right hand until the ferrule touches the deck. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-74
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Guidon Movements, Continued Present Guidon
Present guidon can be reached from three different positions. The commands to present and return are listed in the table below: From Position Order guidon at the halt Carry guidon on the march At officers center
Command “PRESENT, ARMS” and “ORDER, ARMS.” “EYES, RIGHT” and “READY, FRONT.” Note: Eyes right is executed in the same manner except the head turns to the right as the staff is lowered. Executed at a halt, from carry, without command.
Present guidon is executed in one count. On the command, “ARMS” ·
Lower the guidon straight to the front until the staff is horizontal and rests in the pit of the right arm.
·
Turn the staff to the right so the sharp edge of the spearhead faces down.
·
Hold your right elbow firmly against the body.
The commands to return to order or carry are listed in the table below: Command Preparatory “ORDER or READY” Execution “ARMS or FRONT”
Action Smartly and audibly grasp the staff with the left hand with the palm up at a point forward of the right hand. With the left hand, carry the guidon up and back to the position of carry guidon. At the same time, return to ·
·
Order ·
Let the staff slide straight downward through the right hand until the ferrule rests on the deck, the left hand will steady the staff as it slides downward.
·
Once the staff is returned to the deck, cut the left hand smartly back to its normal position at the left side.
Carry ·
Return your head and eyes to the front
·
Once the staff is back into the shoulder, cut the left hand smartly away. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-75
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Guidon Movements, Continued
Ready Guidon
Ready guidon is used as a signal for aiding troops in the execution of commands where hearing verbal commands is difficult. The guidon is brought to ready guidon on the preparatory command and is smartly lowered to order or carry on the command of execution. Ready guidon may be used as a signal for the execution of any command except present arms and eyes right (left), at which times the guidon also renders honors.
Guidon Salute
The purpose of guidon salute is to render honors as in hand salute. “GUIDON, SALUTE” is executed in two counts. Count 1
Action On the command of execution “SALUTE” ·
2
Move your left hand, palm down, smartly to a position approximately 18 inches above the right hand. · Keep the thumb and fingers straight and together. · Touch the staff with the first joint of your forefinger. · Turn your head and eyes toward the person being saluted. After your salute is returned, move your left hand smartly back to your side and look to the front. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-76
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Guidon Movements, Continued
Parade Rest
Fall Out
“PARADE, REST” is executed in one count and may be given only when halted at the position of attention. On the command, “REST” ·
Move your left foot smartly 12 inches to the left.
·
Place your left hand behind you, just below the belt.
·
Keep your fingers straight and touching with your palm flat and facing to the rear.
·
Straighten your right arm forward and grasp the staff so the guidon tilts forward at 30 degrees.
·
The ferrule and the spearhead remain in the same position as order guidon.
Fall out is only given from order guidon. On the command, “FALL OUT” · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Leave your position in ranks with the guidon. Remain near the formation area.
4-77
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3
Lesson 3 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
15 minutes
Directions
Complete exercise items 1 through 11 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
The two flags commonly used by the Marine Corps today are a. b. c. d.
Item 2
When mounted on a staff and carried by an individual on foot, the national and organizational flags are called a. b. c. d.
Item 3
colors and standards. guidons and pennants. class III and type 3s. national and organizational.
colors. standards. ensigns. ceremonial markers.
The Continental Congress adopted the American flag on a. b. c. d.
4 July 1776. 14 June 1777. 14 September 1814. 4 April 1818. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-78
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 4
When in the company of other flags, the national flag is always given point of honor. The point of honor is the a. b. c. d.
Item 5
The Executive order outlining cautions pertaining to the flag of the United States of America was drafted by President a. b. c. d.
Item 6
Truman. Washington. Eisenhower. Taft.
Marine Corps Order No. 4 of 18 April 1925 designated the official colors of the U.S. Marine Corps as a. b. c. d.
Item 7
marching right, the flag’s own left, or an observer’s right. high point, an observer’s right, or the marching right. marching right, the flag’s own right, or an observer’s left. observer’s right, the flag’s own right, or the marching right.
gold and scarlet. red and gold. red and yellow. scarlet and yellow.
The Marine Corps organizational flag shall measure ______ inches on the hoist by ______ inches on the fly. a. b. c. d.
50; 60 52; 66 54; 68 60; 74 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-79
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 8
The distinguishing organizational flags authorized for and bearing the title of a designated unit of the Fleet Marine Force are a. b. c. d.
Item 9
The three types of organizational standards are a. b. c. d.
Item 10
Type II Class 1, 2, and 3. Type II Class A, B, and C. Type III Class 1, 2, and 3. Type III Class A, B, and C.
A flag used to identify a company is called a a. b. c. d.
Item 11
guidons. streamers. battle standards. colors.
guidon. marker. pennant. streamer.
Parade rest with the guidon is a(n) ______-count movement. a. b. c. d.
one two three four Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
4-80
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MCI Course 8013A
Answer d a b c d a b c c a a
4-81
Reference 4-59 4-59 4-60 4-62 4-63 4-67 4-68 4-70 4-70 4-71 4-77
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
4-82
Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise
STUDY UNIT 5 UNIFORMS AND INSPECTIONS Overview
Estimated Study Time
1 hour, 55 minutes
Unit Scope
Marines have long been known for their military appearance, smartness, and distinctive uniforms. What has maintained that reputation has been an unceasing emphasis on the correct wearing of the uniform, careful supervision (by noncommissioned officers especially), and the pride of individual Marines. It is up to you as a noncommissioned officer, 24 hours a day, on duty and off, to help uphold the Marine Corps reputation. Marine NCOs are often called on to inspect their troops. Before formations, the squad or section leader inspects the troops to make sure they present a professional military appearance. When preparing for formal inspections, NCOs are usually the first level inspectors for the unit. Therefore, you must know how to conduct an inspection and be familiar with uniform regulations.
Learning Objectives
Unit Content
After completing this study unit, you should be able to ·
Instruct Marines about basic information on uniforms.
·
Specify an estimated time line for your inspection.
·
Conduct an inspection.
This study unit contains the following lessons: Topic Lesson 1 Basic Information Lesson 2 Establish a Time Lesson 3 Conduct a Preliminary Inspection
MCI Course 8013A
5-1
See Page 5-3 5-13 5-21
Study Unit 5
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
5-2
Study Unit 5
LESSON 1 BASIC INFORMATION Introduction
Estimated Study Time
25 minutes
Lesson Scope
MCO P1020.34F Marine Corps Uniform Regulations is the bible on uniforms, insignia, and grooming. Uniform regulations list the articles of uniform that every enlisted Marine must maintain at all times. This lesson describes the two basic types of inspections that the regulation covers and the guidelines for conducting each type.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to
In This Lesson
·
Identify the uniform reference.
·
Identify the two types of inspections by purpose.
·
List the basic guidelines for clothing and equipment inspections.
·
Identify the sequence and items to inspect for personnel inspections.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Types of Inspections Clothing and Equipment Inspection Guidelines Personnel Inspection Guidelines Lesson 1 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
5-3
See Page 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-8
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1
Types of Inspections
Purpose
The purpose of an inspection is to determine the appearance and condition of a Marine or object, such as a piece of equipment or weapon. Marines are subjected to two types of inspections: · ·
Clothing and Equipment
Clothing and equipment Personnel
Clothing and equipment inspections are conducted to make sure each Marine has all the prescribed clothing and equipment, his or her own gear, and all gear is clean and serviceable. Additionally, the barracks are inspected to make sure they are clean and well maintained.
Personnel
A personnel inspection is the most efficient inspection where time is concerned. The purpose of a personnel inspection is to make sure your Marines · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Present a professional military appearance. Appear in good health. Communicate intelligently in military subjects.
5-4
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1
Clothing and Equipment Inspection Guidelines
Detail and Sequence
A clothing and equipment inspection takes much more time than personnel inspections. You must inspect in detail and in sequence for · · · ·
Proper display Serviceability Cleanliness Irish pennants
Bunks
When inspecting bunks, start in sequence at the head of the bunk and work down.
Wall Lockers
When inspecting a uniform display in a wall locker, inspect from left to right and top to bottom for · · · · ·
Treatment
MCI Course 8013A
Proper display Serviceability Cleanliness Proper name marking Fit (have the Marine try on one or two items)
When conducting clothing and equipment inspections, ·
Respect the display. Do not tear up the display. Replace each item as you inspect it. The Marine has worked long and hard on the display. Treat it with the same respect that you would want yours to be shown.
·
Behave professionally toward the person being inspected. Take notes of discrepancies and show them to the Marine. Be sure to praise the Marine, if praise is due.
5-5
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1
Personnel Inspection Guidelines
Sequence
When conducting a personnel inspection, inspect in sequence starting from the top of the cover and working down to the shoes.
Cover and Head Area
For covers, inspect for · · · · ·
Personal Hygiene
Inspect the overall personal hygiene and grooming standards of the Marine: · · · · · ·
Blouse and Coat Area
Serviceability Cleanliness Fit Condition of emblem (bent, shiny, etc.) Proper marking
Haircut Mustache Nose hair Shave Breath odor Fingernails (including nail polish and length)
Inspect the upper uniform appearance for the following items: · · · · · · · · · · ·
Tie or necktab Collar stays Lapel Ribbons Badges Buttons Fit of blouse or shirt Tie clasp Rank insignia Emblems Service stripes Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-6
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1
Personnel Inspection Guidelines, Continued
Trouser and Shoe Area
Inspect the lower uniform for the following items: · · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Belt and buckle Fit and length of trousers or skirt Brass and leather items (shiny with no marks or scratches) Serviceability and cleanliness of shoes or boots Proper press (double creases)
5-7
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1
Lesson 1 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete the exercise items 1 through 9 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
What is the governing regulation for conducting inspections? a. b. c. d.
Item 2
MCO P1020.34F MCO P1000.00 MCO 1500.01 MCO 3000.01
The purpose of an inspection is to a. make sure all your Marines are present. b. determine the appearance and condition of your Marines or object. c. determine if your Marines’ uniforms are serviceable and if their equipment works. d. punish your Marines for unsatisfactory performance or behavior.
Item 3
The purpose of a clothing and equipment inspection is to a. make sure each Marine has all the prescribed clothing and equipment, his or her own gear, and all gear is clean and serviceable. b. develop discipline and attention to detail in your Marines by having them spend many hours preparing uniforms and equipment. c. support requisitions for additional equipment by showing how much is missing or inoperable. d. establish teamwork and responsibility in the unit by having NCOs supervise Marines in their preparations. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-8
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 4
The purpose of a personnel inspection is to a. identify Marines who need extra supervision and those who are ready for additional responsibilities. b. make sure your Marines are present and meet personal appearance standards. c. make sure your Marines present a professional military appearance, appear in good health, and communicate intelligently in military subjects. d. establish standard procedures in a unit for formations, dress, and organization.
Items 5 Through 7
Matching: For items 5 through 7, match the letter of the guideline for clothing and equipment inspections in column 2 to the inspection statement in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used only once. Column 1
Column 2
Inspection Statement
Inspection Guideline
___ 5.
a. b. c. d.
___ 6. ___ 7.
Inspect from left to right for serviceability, marking, proper fit, cleanliness, and display. Do not tear up the display. Start at the head and work down.
Detail and sequence Bunks Wall lockers and wardrobes Treatment
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-9
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Item 8
List four of the six personal hygiene and grooming standards in a personnel inspection. (1) ___________________________________________________________ (2) ___________________________________________________________ (3) ___________________________________________________________ (4) ___________________________________________________________
Item 9
List three of the five items to inspect on the lower uniform. (1) ___________________________________________________________ (2) ___________________________________________________________ (3) ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-10
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 Exercise
Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
· · · · · · · · · ·
·
MCI Course 8013A
5-11
Answer a b a c c d b Haircut Mustache Nose hair Shave Breath odor Fingernails (including nail polish and length) Belt and buckle Fit and length of trousers or skirt Serviceability and cleanliness of shoes or boots Brass and leather items (shiny with no marks or scratches) Proper press (double creases)
Reference 5-3 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-6
5-7
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
5-12
Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 Exercise
LESSON 2 ESTABLISH A TIME Introduction
Estimated Study Time
25 minutes
Lesson Scope
To establish a time for an inspection, the inspector must be given the requirements and commander’s intent. The commander’s guidance should include · · · · ·
Type of inspection Time of inspection Location for inspection List of uniforms and equipment to be inspected Format or diagram of how items are to be displayed
From this information, you can use reverse planning and conduct a preliminary inspection. Learning Objectives
In This Lesson
After completing this lesson, you should be able to ·
Define reverse planning.
·
Identify guidelines for reverse planning.
·
Identify the purpose of a preliminary inspection.
·
Identify guidelines for a preliminary inspection.
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Reverse Planning Preliminary Inspection Lesson 2 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
5-13
See Page 5-13 5-14 5-16 5-18
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2
Reverse Planning
Definition
Guidelines
The reverse planning process begins long before the actual inspection. Reverse planning starts with the inspector who formulates the plans from the top to the lowest level of the organization. Regardless of the type of inspection, reverse planning is a procedure designed to ·
Keep all key players in the chain of command informed so they can plan accordingly.
·
Give the inspector an opportunity to plan for an inspection from the highest to the lowest level in his or her chain of command.
When using reverse planning, follow the guidelines listed in the table below: Guideline Receive the Commander’s Intent
Plan and Prepare
·
Action Identify the type of inspection to be conducted.
·
Check the time, date, and location.
· Notify key personnel in your chain of command. · Determine the amount of time needed for the inspection. ·
Make sure the Marines set aside enough money for uniforms that may have to be purchased (due to being unserviceable or missing) as provided for by the clothing maintenance allowance.
·
Inform every individual of time, location, type of inspection, uniform, and equipment required.
·
Identify an alternate location in case of inclement weather. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-14
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2
Reverse Planning, Continued
Guidelines, continued
Guideline Inspect
Correct Deficiencies
MCI Course 8013A
Action · Wear the same uniform as the Marines being inspected. ·
Make sure your appearance exceeds the requirements you place on your personnel.
·
Look the Marine in the eye when you make comments.
· ·
Keep your remarks impersonal and pertinent. Note all deficiencies.
·
Take measures to correct them immediately.
·
Conduct more inspections to ensure corrections were made.
5-15
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2
Preliminary Inspection
Purpose
The purpose of a preliminary inspection is to conduct it far enough in advance so your Marines will have time to correct discrepancies before the scheduled inspection.
Guidelines
You must know the time, location, type of inspection, uniform, and equipment requirements. With that information, you should adapt the guidelines to the specific circumstances of the inspection and develop your own style of inspecting based on the guidelines listed in the table below: Guideline Preparation
Action · Allow sufficient time for the unit to prepare for the inspection. ·
Permit NCOs and smaller unit leaders a chance to inspect their troops before you inspect.
· Balance
Review the uniform regulations before conducting a uniform inspection, especially when inspecting members of the opposite sex. · Stay firm and consistent during the inspection. ·
Commend the effort put forth and call attention to discrepancies.
· Comments and Questions
Note discrepancies as well as things that are done well. · Look the Marine in the eye. ·
Keep your remarks impersonal and pertinent.
·
Never ridicule or unnecessarily embarrass a Marine.
·
Question Marines on general military knowledge to accustom them to answering questions while in the ranks. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-16
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2
Preliminary Inspection, Continued
Guidelines, continued
Guideline Details
·
Actions Pay close attention to detail.
· Post-inspection
Do not become lost in detail. Maintain the inspection time schedule. · Conduct a critique and correct discrepancies soon after the inspection. ·
Indicate good and bad points.
· Pass the praise from the inspecting officer on to the Marines.
MCI Course 8013A
·
Follow-up on the discrepancies. Be sure all Marines correct their discrepancies.
·
Keep your notes for future reference.
5-17
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2
Lesson 2 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
10 minutes
Directions
Complete exercise items 1 through 8 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
Reverse planning is used to a. give the inspector an opportunity to plan for an inspection from the highest to the lowest level in his or her chain of command. b. determine the appearance and condition of a Marine or object. c. determine if a Marine's equipment and uniforms are serviceable. d. punish your Marines for unsatisfactory performance.
Items 2 Through 4
Matching: For items 2 through 4, match the letter of the guideline for reverse planning in column 2 to the action listed in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used only once. Column 1
Column 2
Action
Guideline
___ 2. Wear the same uniform as the Marines being inspected. ___ 3. Conduct more inspections. ___ 4. Determine the amount of time needed for inspection.
a. b. c. d.
Receive the commander’s intent Plan and prepare Inspect Correct deficiencies Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-18
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Item 5
The purpose of a preliminary inspection is to a. see that each Marine has all the prescribed clothing and equipment, his or her own gear, and all their gear is clean and serviceable. b. develop discipline and attention to detail in your Marines by having them spend many hours preparing their uniforms and equipment. c. support requisitions for additional equipment by showing how much is missing. d. conduct it far enough in advance so your Marines will have time to correct discrepancies before the scheduled inspection.
Items 6 Through 8
Matching: For items 6 through 8, match the letter of the guideline for preliminary inspection in column 2 to the action listed in column 1. Place your response in the spaces provided. The answers in column 2 may be used only once. Column 1
Column 2
Action
Guideline
___ 6. ___ 7. ___ 8.
Stay firm and consistent during the inspection. Pay close attention to detail. Do not become lost in detail. Look the Marine in the eye.
a. b. c. d. e.
Preparation Balance Comments and questions Details Post-inspection
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-19
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise
Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MCI Course 8013A
Answer a c d b d b d c
5-20
Reference 5-14 5-15 5-15 5-14 5-16 5-16 5-17 5-16
Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise
LESSON 3 CONDUCT A PRELIMINARY INSPECTION Introduction Estimated Study Time
30 minutes
Lesson Scope
The purpose of conducting a preliminary inspection is to identify the proper fit, wearing of uniforms, and grooming standards far in advance to allow enough time to correct discrepancies before the scheduled inspection. Wearing the uniform is a matter of personal pride for all Marines. Your uniform must be properly fitted according to the TM 10120-15/1, Marine Corps Fitting and Alterations Manul, and the MCO P1020.34F Marine Corps Uniform Regulations to set an example of professional appearance and strict conformity. Every sergeant must know the proper fit of uniforms to ensure the traditions and standards of the Marine Corps are properly displayed.
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to ·
Identify the proper fit of uniforms for females and males Marines
·
Identify the proper wearing of the different uniforms
·
Identify the proper grooming standards females and males Marines
· Identify a proper wall locker and junk on the bunk equipment display In This Lesson
This lesson contains the following topics: Topic Introduction Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males Proper Fit of Uniforms for Females Proper Wearing of Uniforms Proper Grooming Standards Proper Grooming Standards for Males Proper Grooming Standards for Females Clothing and Equipment Displays Lesson 3 Exercise
MCI Course 8013A
5-21
See Page 5-21 5-22 5-32 5-38 5-43 5-44 5-45 5-47 5-50
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males
Shirts
If the shirt is manufactured from polyester cotton, it will probably show a maximum shrinkage of 2 percent in the collar, chest, back length, and sleeve length.
Shirt Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of shirts are listed in the table below: Fit Overall
· ·
Short (Quarter) Sleeve Shirt
· ·
Long Sleeve Shirt
·
Guideline Allow ample room around the chest and shoulders to permit free use of the arms without binding. Shoulder and arm seams should reach the point of the outer edge of the shoulder joint. Chest size determines the fit. Fits over an undershirt with all front buttons fastened. Neck size and sleeve length determine the fit.
·
Fits over an undershirt with the collar and sleeves buttoned.
·
Collar
·
·
Fits smoothly around the neck
·
Allow ½ to 1 inch of ease
Cuff (buttoned) ·
Bottom edge should cover the wrist bone to a point 2 inches above the second joint from the end of the thumb.
·
Allow a plus or minus tolerance of ½ inch to account for the shrinkage factor. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-22
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Trousers
Trousers have a numeric sizing system and are labeled according to waist and inseam measurements. Waist measurement is secondary to proper seat fit, since the waist can be altered. Fit trousers over undergarments while wearing a dress shirt, dress shoes, and web belt. Trousers are worn so the lower edge of the waistband is placed squarely on top of the hipbones. Trousers are furnished with unfinished leg bottoms, but with the intended 3-inch hem that is included in the inseam measurement. Measuring the waist is the final consideration. If the seat fits well, the waist can be altered accordingly.
Trouser Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of trousers are listed in the table below: Fit Overall
Guideline Trousers are sized numerically according to the waist measurement and are supplied in waist sizes 26, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 38, 40, 42, and 44. They are designed to fit smoothly, but not tightly around the hips, seat, and waist with a slight fullness for comfort: ·
Loose enough around the hip and buttocks to avoid ·
Gaping of the pockets
·
Visible horizontal wrinkles in the front near the pelvis
·
Rise
Fly must hang in a vertical line without gaping when zipped The measurement from the crotch to the bottom of the waistband is called the rise. ·
Too short a rise results in tightness and discomfort
·
Too long a rise results in drooping of the seat and crotch of the trousers that exhibits an unsightly appearance
The rise of the trousers shall allow ½ inch to 1-inch looseness to assure comfort and stride in normal movements such as sitting, ascending steps, and marching. Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
5-23
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Trouser Guidelines, continued
Fit Length (After Hemming)
Guideline ·
Hem should have a 2½- to 3-inch turn up.
·
Legs of trousers must hang straight from the seat ·
Fronts rest on top of the shoes with a slight break in the lower front crease
·
Front length finishes ¾ to 1 inch shorter than the back
·
Waist
· ·
Ornamental Stripes · (Blood Stripe) Placement
Back length hits at the welt of the shoe. No breaks in back crease. There shall be ½ inch to 1 inch looseness for proper fit and comfort. No horizontal wrinkles across the rear of the trousers below the waistline Positioned on the front panel with the back edge of the stripe aligned with the outseam and the edge of the pocket.
·
The stitching is to continue to the back panel of the trouser.
·
The top of stripe is to finish at or in the waist seam and the bottom end of the stripe is to be turned up in the hem Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-24
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Service and Dress Coat Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of the service and dress coat are listed in the table below: Note: Unless otherwise indicated below, all fitting checks and tolerances for the dress coat are the same as those for the service coat. Fit Overall
Collar
Shoulders and Arms
·
Service Coat Fits over the shirt and trousers with the coat fastened and belt secured
·
·
Loose enough so material can be pinched ·
·
2 inches in the chest
·
1½ inches in the waist
·
Belted loosely enough for a smooth appearance ·
·
Fit smoothly at the back
·
·
Lapels have smooth appearance
·
·
Padding should extend about ½ inch beyond the outer edge of the shoulder joint.
Dress Coat Fits over an undershirt and trousers with the web belt buckled on either side of the fly. Loose enough so material can be pinched ·
1 inch in the chest
·
½ inch in the waist
Belted loosely enough for a smooth appearance (may have slight wrinkles at the belt line) The collar shall have ½ inch to 1 inch ease
Front opening meets without gaps Same as service coat
· Sleeves
Armhole should not have any constrictive binding. Extend to a point of 1 inch above the second joint from the end of the thumb, plus or minus ¼ inch.
Same as service coat
Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
5-25
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Service and Dress Coat Guidelines, continued
Fit Chest
· ·
Length
·
Service Coat Rest easily on the chest without bulges. Front closure is offset ¾ inch to the wearer’s right of the crotch. Even horizontal edges of the front and rear panels to within a plus or minus of ¼ inch.
·
Back of the coat hangs smoothly (rear vent and back seam form a straight vertical line).
·
Proper – waist seam fits directly on top of the belt.
·
Excessive – rear vent flares open.
·
Insufficient – creates an excessive front overlap.
Dress Coat Same as service coat
Same as service coat
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-26
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Service and Dress Coat Guidelines, continued
Fit Flare
·
Service Coat Dress Coat Same as service coat The design of the service coat calls for a flared skirt to permit ease of movement
·
Back Vent
A gathering of up to 1 inch of material on both of the side seams of the flare is allowable The left side of the back vent shall overlap the right side approximately 3 to 4 inches. In some cases, the profile of the individual precludes obtaining the minimum overlap. In those cases, a minimum of 1½ inch overlap is permissible, provided the vertical edge of the vent closure is straight.
Same as service coat
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-27
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
All-Weather Coat
The all-weather coat (AWC) is provided in a numeric size including length. The AWC fits over the service coat with the liner zipped in the coat.
AWC Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of the AWC are listed in the table below: Fit
Guideline Sleeves Extend beyond the undergarment sleeve by ½ inch, plus or minus ¼ inch. Length Extend midway between the knee and the mid-calf. Chest and Shoulders Fit smoothly across the chest and shoulder blades Waist · Noticeably full on the back waist to provide a pleated effect of the material under the belt. ·
Belts loose enough to appear smooth at the center of the front and back.
·
Tapered end of belt must ·
Pass through the buckle to the wearer's left.
·
Collar
Extend not less than 1 ½ inch beyond the belt keeper and not more than ½ inch beyond the left belt loop of the coat. The back of the collars shall cover all subgarment collars. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-28
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Utility Uniform Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of the utility uniform are listed in the table below: Fit Coat
Trousers
·
Guidelines Size for camouflage coat is based on the neck and sleeve measurements
·
Fits over an undershirt loosely enough to allow ease of movement
· ·
Sleeve must be long enough to cover the wrist bone Size based on the waist and inseam measurements
·
Fits loosely enough to prevent binding or restricting effects
·
May be oversized up to 2 inches to allow for shrinkage
·
Trouser legs must reach at least the ankle bone to allow for blousing over the boot
·
No prescribed maximum length Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-29
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Caps, Frame, Garrison, and Utility
The frame and garrison caps, provided in numeric sizing, are best fitted using the try on method. The size of the garrison cap should be the same as that of the frame cap. The utility cap is provided in five alpha sizes—extra-small through extra-large. All caps should ·
Fit snugly and comfortable around the largest part of the head
·
Have lower band of the frame rest high enough on the head to preclude the top of the head from forcing the cover above its natural tautness
·
Have bottom of the visor slightly above (½ inch) the eye level of the wearer
The garrison cap should fit around the head so that neither the top, front, or rear contour of the cap breaks. Footwear
The foot is held securely in the shoe from the lacing at the instep to the heel, but with sufficient room in the toe for the foot to be free from restriction. Fitted over the appropriate socks, the wearer should experience maximum comfort.
Footwear Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of shoes or boots are listed in the table below: Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Action Place the heels well into the back. Lace dress shoes completely. Tie at least five eyelets on boots. Check the widest part of the footwear, the widest point (ball joint) of the foot. Foot fills the footwear without excessive tightness. Length is sufficient to allow at least ½ inch between the end of the longest toe and the end of the footwear Do a full knee bend with the heel off the deck. Recheck the ball joint, width, and length: · ·
Ball joint should be snug, but not too tight Footwear should have ½ inch clearance for the toes Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-30
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males, Continued
Footwear Guidelines, continued
Step 8 9
MCI Course 8013A
Action Walk around as a final check for comfort. The wearer has the final approval of the proper fit of the footwear. Check the overall appearance: ·
Any damage that will effect the serviceability and appearance of leather
·
Each item for loose stitching
5-31
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Females
Shirts
Shirt Guidelines
The shirt is designed as a semi-formfitting (can be tailored) garment meant to remain untucked. There are two types: ·
Long sleeve—Lengths come in short, regular, or long to allow for the natural waist of the garment to fit around the natural waist of the Marine.
·
Short sleeve—Colors come in khaki and white. The white is worn with no rank insignia and never worn without the blue coat.
The guidelines for the proper fit of shirts are listed in the table below: Fit Bust Measurement Shoulders Long Sleeves Collar
Waist
Necktabs
Guideline Fits smoothly over the bust without strain. Seam should not extend beyond natural shoulder line. Bottom edge of cuff covers wrist bone and extends to a point of 2 inches above the second joint from the end of the thumb. · Fits smoothly and closely to the neck · Allow insertion of one finger between neck and collar with collar closed. · Fits smoothly over the hips · Does not ride up
Necktabs come in one size and three colors: ·
Green—will be worn when long sleeve khaki shirts are worn with the service “A” and “B” uniforms and when the short sleeve shirt is worn with the service “A” uniform.
·
Black—will be worn by enlisted Marines with the blue dress “A”, “B”, and “C” or blue-white dress “A” and “B” uniforms.
·
Scarlet—will be worn with the blue dress blue-white “A” and “B” uniform.
No necktab will be worn with service “C” uniform or when the service sweater is worn. Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
5-32
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Females, Continued
Skirts
The service green and dress blue skirts are designed from the same basic pattern. The fitting and alteration requirements are the same for both skirts. Skirts must be fitted over the appropriate undergarments according to · ·
Skirt Length
An individual’s height determines the length of the skirts: · · ·
Skirt Guidelines
Hip measurement Waist measurement
63 inches or less wear short length 64 to 66 inches wear regular length 67 inches or more wear long length
The guidelines for the proper fit of the skirt are listed in the table below: Fit Hip Waist
· ·
Guideline Fits smoothly over the hips Fits easily, not tightly
·
Length
Center side seams at the sides so seam hangs straight from the waistline to the hem. Knee length within 1 inch above or below the kneecap Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-33
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Females, Continued
Service and Dress Slacks
The service green and dress blue slacks are designed from the same basic pattern and share the same fitting requirements. They are furnished with unfinished leg bottoms with the intended 3-inch hem included in the inseam measurement. Slacks must be fitted over the appropriate undergarment according to · ·
Service and Dress Slack Guidelines
Blood Stripe Placement
Service and Dress Coats
Hip measurement Waist measurement
The guidelines for the proper fit of the service and dress slacks are listed below: ·
Must fit smoothly around hips and waist
·
Authorized hem is 2 to 3 inches
·
Legs must be long enough to reach the juncture of the welt of the shoe in the rear
·
After hemming, the front should be ¾ inch to 1 inch shorter than the back.
·
Slight break in front.
Corporals and above have blood stripes on their slacks. The blood stripe ·
Positioned on the front panel with the back edge of the stripe aligned with the outseam and the edge of the pocket.
·
The stitching is to continue to the back panel of the trouser.
·
The top of stripe is to finish at or in the waist seam and the bottom end of the stripe is to be turned up in the hem
Both the service and dress coats are formed fitted, available in a range of sizes, and come in three lengths—short, regular, and long. Bust, shoulder, and sleeve fit are the same for both coats. However, the dress coat is designed to be slightly longer then the service coat. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-34
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Females, Continued
Service and Dress Coat Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of the service and dress coats are listed in the table below: Fit Bust
·
Shoulders
· ·
Back Waist
Sleeves
Front should lie smoothly over the bust, without strain. Shoulder edge of coat does not extend beyond the natural shoulder edge.
· Seam should rest directly on top of the shoulders. Should mold smoothly over the individual’s back from the neck to hem edge, with no wrinkles in the waist area. · If waist of coat in the back is too high above the natural waistline, try the same size coat in a longer length. ·
If coat blouses at the waist, try a short coat of the same size.
·
Fits easily through the waist, extending to a smooth flare over the hips.
·
Allow a 2-inch overlap in the center front to hang evenly. Fit smoothly when arms hang straight at the side.
· ·
Length
Guideline Use the fit that most closely corresponds to bust measurement.
·
Approximately 1 inch above the second joint from the end of the thumb and long enough to cover the long sleeve shirt. Long enough to cover the skirt zipper.
·
Collar
One-fourth inch below the skirt zipper or 7 inches below the natural waistline. Fit smoothly and closely at the back of neck. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-35
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Females, Continued
Caps
Caps are available in a range of sizes that correspond to the head size, measured in inches around the head midway on the forehead above the ears. There are three types of caps: · · ·
Cap Guidelines
The guidelines for the proper fit of caps are listed below: · · ·
Footwear
Garrison service Dress and service Utility
Put on over the hairstyle the Marine usually wears Must be snug without puckers or wrinkles across the top Wear the visor straight with its tip in line with the eyebrows.
Choice of appropriate footwear for females depends on the uniform being worn. There are four types of footwear authorized for females: · · · ·
Boots Oxford shoes Pumps Flats
Oxford Shoe Guidelines
Guidelines for the female’s oxford shoes are similar as for males. Oxfords can only be purchased from a Marine Corps authorized source (Marine Corps Exchange, clothing sales facility, or approved commercial source). Oxfords should fit to ensure maximum comfort when fitted over hosiery.
Pump Guidelines
The guidelines for pumps are listed below: ·
Heels must measure between 1 and 2½ inches in height
·
Base of the heel must measure between ⅜ inch by ⅜ inch and 1½ inch by 1⅞ inch. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-36
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Fit of Uniforms for Females, Continued
Fit
The fit for pumps is the same as for oxfords. When trying on shoes or boots, be sure to follow the same guidelines presented in Proper Fit of Uniforms for Males in this lesson. In addition, check the fit when the foot is · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Flat on the deck Bent
5-37
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Wearing of Uniforms
Types
The three types of authorized uniforms for enlisted Marines are · · ·
Dress Service Utility
The evening dress uniform is authorized for wear by staff noncommissioned officers as an optional uniform. Special Dress Uniforms
The blue-white dress “A” and “B” uniforms are the same as the blue dress “A” and “B” uniforms, except the trousers, skirt, or slacks are white. This uniform can only be worn by SNCO’s during the summer. It can be prescribed for NCO’s and below by the Commanding Officer for official parades, ceremonies, and reviews.
Dress Uniforms
The types of blue dress uniforms and their description are listed in the table below: Type Dress “A”
Dress “B”
Description Blue dress coat with · large medals, ribbons for which medals · have not been struck ·
Blue dress coat with ribbons worn in lieu of medals
Occasions Parades Ceremonies Reviews
·
Solemnities
·
Entertainment when the commander desires to pay special honors to the occasion
· ·
Not authorized for leave or liberty Prescribed for the same occasions as the blue dress “A” uniform
·
Authorized for leave and liberty Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-38
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Wearing of Uniforms, Continued Dress Uniforms, continued
Type Dress “C”
Dress “D”
Description Long sleeve khaki shirt · without coat ·
Authorized for leave and liberty
·
Blue dress sweater can be worn at the option of the individual except when the coat is more appropriate Uniform of the day for specified occasions or duties
Short sleeve khaki shirt · without coat ·
Service Uniforms
Occasions Uniform of the day for specified occasions or duties
Authorized for leave and liberty.
The types of service uniform and their description are listed in table below: Type Service “A”
·
Description Service coat
·
Ribbons and badges
·
Women can wear either the long or short sleeve khaki shirt and green necktab.
·
·
Occasion Almost all official occasions, such as when a member of a court-martial, official visits, and reporting to a new duty station Authorized for leave and liberty
Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-39
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Wearing of Uniforms, Continued
Service Uniforms, continued
Type Service “B”
·
Description Same as the service · “A” uniform, except the coat is · not worn
·
Service “C”
Occasion Uniform of the day Authorized for leave and liberty
Ribbons and · badges as directed or optional long sleeve shirt necktie. Short sleeve khaki shirt · with appropriate service trousers ·
Not worn for formal or semiformal social events
·
Not worn for formal or semiformal social events
Uniform of the day Authorized for leave and liberty
Note: The service sweater can be worn at the individual's option as part of the service “B” or “C” uniform. Camouflage Utility Uniform
The camouflage utility uniform is only authorized for wear in · · ·
The field Field type exercises Working conditions where the service uniform is not practical
The utility uniform is not authorized for leave or liberty. Marines can wear the utility uniform to and from their domicile, unless their commander prohibits doing so. Commanders can authorize the wear of the utility uniform for brief and appropriate stops off base during duty hours or while commuting. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-40
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Wearing of Uniforms, Continued
Maternity Uniform
When the local commander determines that a pregnant woman can no longer wear the service uniform, she must wear the maternity uniform as the uniform of the day. The maternity uniform consists of ·
Slacks or skirts
·
Long or short sleeve maternity shirts with or without the tunic top
· Maternity Uniform Guidelines
·
The tunic top must be worn when the service coat is prescribed for wear.
·
Always wear the green necktab when the tunic top or the long sleeve maternity shirt is worn.
·
Wear the short sleeve maternity shirt with an open collar and no necktab when it is worn without the tunic.
Maternity utilities
Guidelines for proper wearing of the maternity uniform are listed below: ·
Place and wear the insignia of grade on the maternity shirts as you would on regular khaki shirts.
·
Wear either pumps or oxfords when wearing the skirt.
·
Always wear oxfords when wearing slacks.
·
Wear all other uniform items of the maternity uniform the same as for the service uniform.
·
Wear the AWC unbuttoned in the latter stages of pregnancy.
·
Do not wear the sweater with the maternity uniform. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-41
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Wearing of Uniforms, Continued
Female Accessories
Hosiery and handbags are two specific uniform items for females. Wear fulllength nylon hose with the service and dress uniforms when wearing a skirt. Hosiery must harmonize with the natural skin tone of the individual. The black handbag is issued or sold through the Marine Corps Supply System and Marine Corps Exchange. It can be carried with the service and dress uniforms, except when in formation, over the left shoulder and arm.
MCI Course 8013A
5-42
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Grooming Standards
General Guidelines
Articles of religious apparel that are not visible or apparent when worn with the uniform are authorized.
Grooming Regulations
Grooming regulations do not allow eccentric and faddish styles: · · ·
Unauthorized Items
Unless authorized by CMC or higher authority, the items listed below may not be exposed with the uniform: · · · · · · · · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Hair Jewelry Eyeglasses
Pencils Pens Watch chains Pins Handkerchiefs Combs Cigarettes Pipes Barrettes Hair ribbons Flowers
5-43
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Grooming Standards for Males
Hair
Grooming regulations for the male’s hair will be · ·
Neat and closely trimmed Evenly graduated from zero length at the hairline in the lower portion of the head to a maximum of 3 inches in length on the upper portion of the head · Sideburns will not extend below the top of the orifice of the ear. Face
The face will be clean, unless the male Marine chooses to wear a mustache. However, the mustache must be · · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Neatly trimmed Between the margin of the upper lip and bottom of the nose Within the corners of the mouth Hair cannot exceed ½ inch fully extended
5-44
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Grooming Standards for Females
Hair
The female’s hair can touch the collar, but cannot fall below the collar's edge.
Hair Regulations
Grooming regulations for the female’s hair: · · ·
Unauthorized Hair Regulations
Neatly shaped Attractive feminine style No interference with the proper wear of the uniform headgear—should be appropriately based on the appearance of the hair when headgear is worn.
Grooming regulations do not allow · · · ·
Eccentric hairstyles Conspicuous pins Hairnets, unless authorized for specific duties Conspicuous color changes
Any artificial coloring must harmonize with the individual’s complexion tone and eye color. Wigs must look natural and conform to all the above listed regulations. Cosmetics
Apply cosmetics conservatively. Do not wear exaggerated or faddish cosmetic styles. The aim is to achieve a natural, finished look. ·
Lipstick must harmonize with the scarlet shade used in that uniform: · Worn with the service, dress, or maternity uniform · Can wear red or pink shades with the utility uniform · Nail polish must either harmonize with lipstick or be colorless. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-45
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Proper Grooming Standards for Females, Continued
Jewelry
Inconspicuous wristwatches, watchbands, and rings are permitted in uniform. You can wear earrings (only one earring on each earlobe) with the service and blue dress uniform.
Authorized Earrings
The regulations for earrings are listed below: · · ·
No Earrings Allowed
Grooming regulations do not allow earrings: · · ·
MCI Course 8013A
Must be small, polished, yellow-gold color ball or round stud type Cannot exceed ¼ inch in diameter Cannot extend below the earlobe
With the utility uniform While in formation In certain (or similar) military functions · Parade · Review · Ceremony
5-46
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Clothing and Equipment Displays
Purpose
Clothing and equipment displays are the usual method of inspecting an individual’s clothing and combat equipment (782 gear). Displayed in the appropriate area, an inspector will inspect the required items for the · · ·
Types
Number Marking Condition
There are two types of clothing and equipment displays: · ·
Wall locker Junk on the bunk (JOB)
The Marine must stand a wall locker and JOB inspection to meet the requirements of the commander’s guidance that initiated the inspection. A commander may require a combination of bunk and wall locker displays to achieve his or her inspection purposes. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-47
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Clothing and Equipment Displays, Continued
Wall Locker Display
Wall locker displays should follow the model illustrated in the diagram below to promote uniformity throughout the Marine Corps. Though the commander may prescribe displays that vary from this model, the commander’s guidance is the key to the display.
Diagram
The wardrobe display and instructions are identified in the diagram below:
Continued on next page MCI Course 8013A
5-48
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Clothing and Equipment Displays, Continued
Junk On The Bunk Display
Junk on the bunk (JOB) displays should follow the model illustrated in the diagram below to promote uniformity throughout the Marine Corps. Though the commander may prescribe displays that vary from this model, the commander’s guidance is the key to the display.
Diagram
The JOB inspection display is identified in the diagram below:
MCI Course 8013A
5-49
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3
Lesson 3 Exercise
Estimated Study Time
15 minutes
Directions
Complete exercise items 1 through 12 by performing the action required. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.
Item 1
Where can you find instructions for the proper fit of uniform clothing? a. b. c. d.
Item 2
How long is the sleeve on the male’s long sleeve shirt? a. b. c. d.
Item 3
To the wrist bone To the thumb 3 inches above the first joint on the thumb 2 inches above the second joint from the end of the thumb
After hemming, what is the length of the hem on the trouser legs? a. b. c. d.
Item 4
TM 10120-15/1, Marine Corps Uniform Fitting and Alterations Manual Naval And Marine Corps Uniform Regulations On the clothing tag Marine Battle Skills Training Handbook
1 to 2 inches 1½ to 2½ inches 2½ to 3 inches 3½ inches
The male’s service coat should be loose enough to pinch _____ of material in the chest. a. b. c. d.
1 inch 2 inches 3 inches 4 inches Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-50
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 5
What is the proper length of the AWC? a. b. c. d.
Item 6
What is the priority of fitting for the female’s long sleeve shirt? a. b. c. d.
Item 7
Shoulders, waist, and sleeve Bust measurement, shoulders, and sleeve Bust measurement, waist, and shoulders Overlap, shoulders, and sleeve
What is the proper length of the skirt? a. b. c. d.
Item 8
Midway between the thigh and the knee At the knee Midway between the knee and the mid-calf At the ankle
Midway down the thigh, 1 inch below the knee cap Knee length, plus or minus 1 inch above or below the knee cap 2 inches above or below the knee cap 4 inches above or below the knee cap
What is the maximum authorized hem for the service and dress slacks? a. b. c. d.
1 inch 2 inches 3 inches 4 inches Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-51
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Item 9
What is the proper length of the sleeves on the female’s service coat? a. b. c. d.
Item 10
What are the four types of authorized uniforms for enlisted Marines? a. b. c. d.
Item 11
Blue dress, service, utility, and mess white Service, utility, formal blue, and semi-formal blue Alphas, bravos, charlies, and deltas Blue dress, blue-white dress, service, and utility
What is the maximum authorized length of hair on the upper portion of a male Marine's head? a. b. c. d.
Item 12
To the wrist bone 1 inch below the wrist bone 1 inch above the second joint from the end of the thumb 2 inches above the second joint from the end of the thumb
2 inches 3 inches 4 inches 5 inches
How long can the female Marine’s hair hang? a. b. c. d.
Cannot touch the collar Can touch the collar, but can not fall below the collar's edge 2 inches beyond the collar Must be pinned up so that it does not fall at all Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
5-52
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise
Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
MCI Course 8013A
Answer a d c b c b b c c d b b
5-53
Reference 5-21 5-22 5-24 5-25 5-28 5-32 5-33 5-34 5-35 5-38 5-44 5-45
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise
(This page intentionally left blank.)
MCI Course 8013A
5-54
Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise
MILITARY STUDIES REVIEW LESSON EXAMINATION Review Lesson
Estimated Study Time
1 hour and 15 minutes
Introduction
The purpose of the review lesson examination is to prepare you for the final examination. We recommend that you try to complete your review lesson examination without referring to the text, but for those items (questions) you are unsure of, restudy the text. When you finish your review lesson and are satisfied with your responses, check your responses against the answers provided at the end of this review lesson examination.
Directions
Select the ONE answer that BEST completes the statement or that answers the item. For multiple choice items, circle your response. For matching items, place the letter of your response in the space provided.
Item 1
The primary references for non-judicial punishment are the a. Constitution of the United States of America, the Manual for CourtsMartial, the Declaration of Independence, and Article 31. b. Bill of Rights, Article 31, Manual of the Judge Advocate General, and the Constitution of the United States of America. c. Manual of the Judge Advocate General, the Fifth Amendment, Article 31, and the Uniform Code of Military Justice. d. Constitution of the United States of America, the Uniform Code of Military Justice, Manual for Courts-Martial, and the Manual of the Judge Advocate General. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-1
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 2
Protection against self-incrimination is granted by a. the Bill of Rights through direct application of the Fifth Amendment. b. the Fifth Amendment of the Constitution of the United States of America through direct application of Article 31 of the UCMJ. c. the Commandant of the Marine Corps through direct application of Article 31 of the UCMJ. d. Article 31 of the Bill of Rights through direct application of the UCMJ.
Item 3
No person subject to the chapter may interrogate or request any statement from an accused or a person suspected of an offense without first informing him of the accusation and advising him that he does not have to make any statement regarding the offense of which he is accused or suspected. He is also informed that any statement made by him may be used as evidence against him in a trial by court-martial composes the contents of paragraph ______ of Article 31 of the UCMJ. a. b. c. d.
Item 4
1 2 3 4
No person subject to this chapter may compel any person to incriminate himself, or to answer any question that may tend to incriminate him composes the contents of paragraph ______ of Article 31 of the UCMJ. a. b. c. d.
1 2 3 4 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-2
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 5
No person subject to this chapter may compel any person to make a statement or to produce evidence before any military tribunal if the statement or evidence is not material to the issue and may tend to degrade him composes the contents of paragraph ______ of Article 31 of the UCMJ. a. b. c. d.
Item 6
1 2 3 4
The two basic elements of Article 31 rights are the a. b. c. d.
beginning and end. warning and waiver. Rocks and Shoals revisions of 1950. Manual of Courts-Martial and Manual of Judge Advocate General. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-3
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 7
The recommended procedures to advise a suspect of his or her Article 31 rights are listed below in scrambled order: (1) Instruct the suspect to read and sign the Suspects Rights and Acknowledgement/Statement Form. (2) Identify yourself to the suspect. (3) Ask the suspect three questions: · Do you want a lawyer? · Do you understand that if you should decide to answer questions, you may stop answering questions at any time? · Do you want to answer questions and make a statement? (4) Read the Article 31 Warning Card verbatim without error to the suspect. (5) Document the suspect’s Article 31 advisement on the Suspects Rights and Acknowledgement/Statement Form. (6) Terminate the reading if the suspect: · Does not understand his or her rights · Declines to answer questions or make a statement · Requests a lawyer. What is the correct sequence of procedures to advise a suspect of his or her Article 31 rights? a. b. c. d.
Item 8
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 2, 3, 4, 6, 5, 1 2, 4, 3, 6, 5, 1 3, 5, 2, 6, 1, 4
Who can administer the Article 31 advisement? a. Officer in charge, platoon commander, or commanding officer as deemed necessary by the scope of the military investigation b. Any person acting as an agent of the military authorities for the purpose of furthering a military investigation c. First sergeant in lieu of the officer in charge, platoon commander, or commanding officer for the purpose of furthering a military investigation d. Platoon sergeant or first sergeant prior to anyone to establish the need for furthering a military investigation Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-4
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 9
When should the suspect be advised of Article 31? a. Daily to ensure that if something happens you are covered b. During an illegal act c. After it has been determined by the first sergeant that there has been a substantial violation of the UCMJ d. Before any interrogation begins or whenever an act constitutes a statement of admission
Item 10
It is important to properly issue the Article 31 advisement to an accused suspect for the admissibility of a. b. c. d.
Item 11
a confession or admission of guilt at a trial. evidence at a trial. any information at a performance evaluation board. character references during court proceedings.
A suspect is required to submit to fingerprinting for a security clearance. a. Article 31 warning is required b. Article 31 warning is not required
Item 12
A suspect is requested to give a handwriting sample for the purpose of identification. a. Article 31 warning is required b. Article 31 warning is not required Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-5
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 13
An individual is required to submit a photograph for the purpose of identification at a promotion board. a. Article 31 warning is required b. Article 31 warning is not required
Item 14
An individual under the influence of alcohol, but understanding his or her rights, is requested to identify his or her personal effects at a crime scene. a. Article 31 warning is required b. Article 31 warning is not required
Item 15
An individual is required to submit a photograph for identification in connection with an investigation. a. Article 31 warning is required b. Article 31 warning is not required
Item 16
The punitive articles are found in the ______ and are listed from a. b. c. d.
Manual of Judge Advocate General, Appendix 2; 1 through 134. Manual for Courts-Martial (MCM), Appendix 2; 1 through 134. Manual of Judge Advocate General, Appendix 2; 77 through 134. Manual for Courts-Martial (MCM), Appendix 2; 77 through 134. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-6
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 17
The punitive articles are composed of a. b. c. d.
Item 18
charges and specifications. offenses and elements. offenses and defenses. charges and arguments.
The components of the punitive articles that lead to charging a suspect of an offense are listed below in scrambled order: (1) Determine the article violated. (2) Check the list of offenses that fit the facts. (3) Determine the essential elements of the offense, which cover the essential conditions that must exist to convict the accused. (4) Sight the specification. (5) Narrow the charge. (6) Get all the facts about the incident. (7) Prepare and submit the charge sheet. What is the correct sequence of responses listed below to charge a suspect of an offense? a. b. c. d.
Item 19
6, 1, 2, 4, 3, 5, 7 6, 1, 5, 2, 4, 3, 7 1, 6, 2, 3, 5, 4, 7 1, 5, 2, 4, 3, 6, 7
Who is authorized to submit a charge sheet? a. b. c. d.
First sergeant Platoon commander Squad leader Any Marine Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-7
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 20
What is the basic information on a charge sheet? a. Charge(s) and specification(s) b. Charge(s), specification(s), and maximum punishment c. Charge(s), specification(s), witnesses, and maximum punishment
Item 21
What are the two primary sources for the laws of war? a. b. c. d.
Item 22
Destroying the enemy’s will to resist or change their will until it agrees with the objective set forth by higher authorities is defined as the a. b. c. d.
Item 23
The customary international law and ratified treaties The international conferences and customary international law The ratified treaties and international summits for peace The customary international law and Sun Tsu’s Art of War
purpose of theatre tactics. objective of infantry missions. Department of Defense’s objective for high intensity conflict. objective of war.
The three purposes for laws of war are identified in the list below: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Prevent unnecessary suffering of combatants and non-combatants. Strengthen international coalitions. Ensure free and democratic elections are held and enforced. Safeguard certain fundamental human rights of persons. Encourage the restoration of peace. Establish free markets and open trade with other sovereign countries. Allow United Nations to set up peacekeeping forces.
Select the correct purposes for laws of war from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
7, 2, 3 4, 2, 6 1, 4, 5 1, 3, 5 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-8
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 24
What are the four basic concepts underlying the laws of war? a. Military necessity, proportionality, unnecessary suffering, and discrimination b. Proportionality, fire and maneuver, discrimination, and fire superiority c. Fire and maneuver, amphibious doctrine, air superiority, and combined arms d. Military necessity, proportionality, combined arms, and amphibious doctrine
Item 25
The nine Marine principles of war are identified in the list below: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
Marines utilize the MAGTF concept. Marines do not steal. Marines fight only enemy combatants. Marines do not kill or torture prisoners. Marines locate close with and destroy the enemy. Marines collect and care for the wounded whether friend or foe. Marines should do their best to prevent violations of the law of war. Marines destroy no more than the mission requires. Marines provide relief organizations with support. Marines do not harm enemies who surrender. Marines treat all civilians humanely. Marines do not attack medical personnel, facilities, or equipment. Marines should maximize fire support.
Select the correct principles of war from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 12, 13 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-9
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 26
A war crime is defined as the intentional a. misuse of materiel and military personnel for purposes that are inconsistent with theatre policies to include rules of engagement. b. harming of civilians not taking part in the hostilities, enemy prisoners of war, medical personnel, or other non-combatants. c. disobedience of any orders issued on the battlefield whether or not it involves prisoners of war, non-combatants, or medical personnel. d. harming of non-combatants, personnel not taking part in the exchange of fire, enemy prisoners of war, or other civilians not taking part in the hostilities.
Item 27
The most effective methods of preventing war crimes are to a. keep your Marines informed, maintain a high state of readiness, and prevent degradation of personal weapons readiness. b. make the enemy nameless and faceless, maintain a high state of readiness, and keep your Marines prepared for any situation. c. maintain high military standards, keep your Marines informed, and prevent personal wars or vendettas. d. maintain a high military standards, prevent personal relationships, and keep your Marines prepared for any situation. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-10
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 28
The three steps required to report an illegal order are identified in the list below: (1) Clarify the order. (2) Execute the order. (3) Report the order using the chain of command, but bypassing the superior who issued the order. (4) Report the order to the closest U.N. observer. (5) Refuse the order. (6) Apprehend the order issuer and turn them in to the commanding officer. Select the correct sequence of steps listed below to report an illegal order. a. b. c. d.
Item 29
1, 2, 6 1, 5, 3 3, 4, 5 4, 5, 6
Directives issued by competent military authority which delineate the circumstances and limitations under which United States forces will initiate and/or continue combat engagement with other forces encountered are defined as a. b. c. d.
battle orders. combat directives. operations orders. rules of engagement. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-11
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 30
The three purposes for rules of engagement (ROE) are identified in the list below: (1) Provides direct interface between application of the Geneva Convention and self-defense force members on international contingency deployments (2) Provides implementation guidance for the application of force for mission accomplishment and for the exercise of the inherent right and obligation of self-defense (3) Implements silence is consent defense for fire control during indirect fire planning and application (4) Serves as a fire control method of military operations by the civilian and military chain of command (5) Implements the inherent right of self-defense (6) Provides a safe back blast area when engaging targets with antiarmor weapons Select the correct purposes for ROE from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
Item 31
1, 3, 6 2, 4, 3 2, 4, 5 3, 5, 6
What are the classes of persons that are entitled to self-defense? a. b. c. d.
U.S. forces, U.S. Marines, U.S. Postal Service Individuals and self, units, and national interests U.S. citizens, multinational coalitions, medical personnel Missionaries, medical personnel, and third party nationals Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-12
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 32
What are the three types of actions that will justify self-defense? a. A hostile act, threat or hostile intent, or presence of a force deemed hostile b. Unruly crowds in imminent danger zones, verbal exchanges with negative connotations from host county personnel, or unauthorized entry into secure areas by third party persons c. Multinational training operations in imminent danger zones, counter drug operations in support of the ATF, or joint staffs assigned to imminent danger zones d. Direct and indirect fire, security patrols in imminent danger zones, or joint operations with national and internal forces
Item 33
The origins of the noncommissioned officer are identified in the list below: (1) Battle Drill Guide for Marines (2) Regulations for the Order and Discipline of the Troops of the United States (3) Uniform Code of Military Justice (4) Non-Commissioned Officers’ Handbook (5) Regulations for the Troops of the Foreign Legion and American Legion (6) United States Constitution and Bill of Rights (7) The Blue Book and Condottieri Units (8) Regulations for Good Order and Discipline Select the correct origins of the noncommissioned officer from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
1 and 8 2 and 7 5 and 3 6 and 4 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-13
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 34
The responsibilities of the NCO are identified in the list below: (1) (2)
Discipline Marines as directed by the UCMJ. Provide links between commanders (as well as officers in general) and the troops. (3) Recognize and reward outstanding technical and military skills. (4) Prepare rosters and ensure that personnel action requests are submitted for all administrative action. (5) Muster formations as often as possible to improve accountability. (6) Organize a professional library at every command level. (7) Afford avenues for advancement whereby enlisted men and women may realize their full potential as leaders. (8) Ensure that the Marines apply for special duty. (9) Decentralize command authority in an orderly structure down to the smallest element in an organization. (10) Provide a senior enlisted adviser, a platoon sergeant, a first sergeant, or a sergeant major for each commander. Select the correct responsibilities of the NCO from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
1, 3, 5, 7, 9 2, 3, 7, 9, 10 2, 4, 5, 6, 8 3, 4, 6, 9, 10 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-14
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 35
The NCO’s obligations for self and to the unit are identified in the list below: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
Win on the battlefield and accomplish all assigned tasks. Develop delegation skills to eliminate overextending your responsibility. Develop subordinates to ensure a lighter workload yourself. Enjoy the burden of your leadership position. Focus on shortcomings of others to improve morale and readiness. Build and foster unit cohesion. Provide training and set meaningful standards. Provide assistance only to Marine under your supervision. Providing your unit with positive leadership. Hold yourself and your Marines accountable to high standards. Ensure that you are nominated for personal awards and recognition.
Select the NCO’s correct obligations for self and to the unit from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d. Item 36
1, 2, 4, 7, 8, 9 1, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10 2, 4, 5, 6 10, 11 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11
The major roles the NCO fulfills are identified in the list below: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
Cursory observer and protagonist Unit leader and disciplinarian Sergeant of the guard Trainer and guardian of standards Tactical planner and developer Training NCO and squad leader Backbone of the Corps Duty NCO at company commands
Select the correct roles the NCO fulfills from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
2, 6, 8 3, 4, 7 1, 3, 5 2, 4, 7 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-15
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 37
The purpose of the Medal of Honor (MOH) is to a. posthumously recognize armed forces personnel for performance above and beyond the line of duty. b. recognize deeds of gallantry and heroism in times of war and of peace. c. provide an opportunity for goal setting and a command support program for gallantry volunteers. d. recognize heroic achievement in combat zones after there is a declaration of war.
Item 38
The MOH criteria are identified in the list below: (1) The deed must be the type that if not done, it will not subject the individual to any justified criticism. (2) The deed must be in support of a unit involved in combat operations. (3) The deed must be without detriment to the mission of the command or to the command to which attached. (4) The valor must include hand-to-hand combat and there must be at least one enemy casualty using an entrenching tool. (5) The unit must suffer high combat casualties, and with at least one of the key personnel being replaced by the MOH recipient. (6) No margin of doubt or possibility of error in awarding this honor. (7) Service is rendered conspicuous above their comrades by an act so outstanding that it clearly distinguishes their gallantry beyond the call of duty from lesser forms of bravery. (8) The deed must be executed while assigned to a combat arms unit or during the execution phase of an expeditionary operation. Select the correct criteria of the MOH from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
1, 2, 5, 7 1, 3, 6, 7 2, 3, 4, 8 3, 4, 5, 8 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-16
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 39
The first Marine NCO awarded the MOH was a. b. c. d.
Item 40
Corporal John F. Mackie while serving aboard USS Calena. Sergeant Henry J. Denigt while serving aboard USS Brooklyn. Sergeant Richard Binder while serving aboard USS Tichonderoga. Sergeant James Martin while serving aboard USS Richmond.
The historical NCO duties are identified in the list below: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
NCO education (1981 to present) Color guard details (American Revolution to present) Junior leaders, decentralized control (Vietnam to present) Burial details (American Revolution to present) Weapons and daytime maneuvers (World War I to present) Basic training (World War II to present) Sea duty (American Revolution to present) Marine Security Guard duty (Boxer Rebellion to present) Battle leaders, integrated squads (Korean War to present) Neatness and sanitation (American Revolution to present)
Select the historical NCO duties from the responses listed below. a. b. c. d.
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8 1, 3, 5, 6, 9, 10 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-17
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 41
The first paragraph of the NCO creed is cited below: I am an NCO dedicated to training new Marines and influencing the old. I am forever conscious of each Marine under my charge, and by example I will inspire him (or her) to the highest standards possible. I will strive to be patient, understanding, just and firm. I will commend the deserving and encourage the wayward. Select the correct second paragraph of the NCO creed from the responses listed below. a. I will remember that I am responsible to the SNCO and NCO corps for the discipline, focus, and combat effectiveness of my men. b. I will never forget that I am responsible to my commanding officer for the morale, discipline, and the efficiency of my men and their performance will reflect an image of me. c. I am responsible to the SgtMaj and SNCO’s for the management of my Marines, their professional and personal discipline, combat effectiveness, and attention to detail. Their performance reflects directly on my personal performance standards and me. d. I will never forget that I am responsible to my platoon commander and platoon sergeant for the combat efficiency, morale, and good order of my men and their overall performance.
Item 42
In 1983 following the assassination of the Prime Minister and the overthrow of the government of Grenada, the Marines participated in an operation. It was a joint military operation in response to a request from neighboring Caribbean nations. The Marines’ rapid response secured the island and safeguarded hundreds of American citizens living on the island. What is the correct name of this descriptive deployment? a. b. c. d.
Operation Sharp Edge Operation Just Cause Operation Urgent Fury Operation Restore Hope Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-18
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 43
During 1989 in response to increasing unrest in Panama, the President ordered a joint military operation. United States forces, including the Marines, overthrew the military government of General Manuel Noriega and installed a civilian government. What is the correct name of this descriptive deployment? a. b. c. d.
Item 44
This military operation was designed to halt the advance of Iraqi forces and to position multinational forces assembled for possible offensive action to dispel the invading force. This operation validated the Marine Corps’ maritime prepositioning force (MPF) concept and enacted the plan of tailoring units to accomplish a mission as part of a Marine air-ground task force (MAGTF). What is the correct name of this descriptive deployment? a. b. c. d.
Item 45
Operation Just Cause Operation Uphold Democracy Operation Ernest Will Operation Urgent Fury
Operation Desert Storm Operation Rolling Thunder Operation Ernest Will Operation Desert Shield
During 1991, an operation was launched after the Iraqi government refused to comply with the United Nations’ resolutions. Marine aviation conducted combat operations when the air phase commenced in January 1991. After massive bombing, Marine ground forces participated in the sweep into Kuwait to help liberate the country and damage the Iraqi military capability. What is the correct name of this descriptive deployment? a. b. c. d.
Operation Desert Shield Operation Desert Calm Operation Desert Storm Operation Peace Vector IV Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-19
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 46
In 1992 as part of a joint military operation, Marine forces landed in war-torn Somalia. United States forces provided security for the distribution of humanitarian aid. The U.S. forces were later incorporated in the United Nations’ peacekeeping forces and were sent to stabilize the situation in the country. What is the correct name of this descriptive deployment? a. b. c. d.
Item 47
During 1994, a joint military operation was ordered by the President to restore the civilian government in Haiti. Marines landed in northern Haiti to stabilize the situation and provide security for the orderly transfer of power from the military to the democratically elected government of President Jean Bertrand Aristide. What is the correct name of this descriptive deployment? a. b. c. d.
Item 48
Operation Freedom Banner Operation Restore Hope Operation Urgent Fury Operation Fiery Vigil
Operation Just Cause Operation Restore Hope Operation Urgent Fury Operation Uphold Democracy
A column of men or line of vehicles is identified as a. b. c. d.
column. file. rank. element. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-20
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued Directions for Items 49 Through 52
Choose the answer that correctly describes the term identified by the corresponding number in the platoon diagram below:
Item 49
a. b. c. d.
Footstep Ground distance Distance Right guide
Item 50
a. b. c. d.
Second squad Middle Center Alignment
Item 51
a. b. c. d.
Baseline Depth Front Line
Item 52
a. b. c. d.
Front Row Squad File Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-21
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 53
An arrangement of elements of a unit in line, in column, or any other prescribed manner is described as a. b. c. d.
Item 54
The individual upon whom a formation or elements thereof regulates its march is identified as the a. b. c. d.
Item 55
platoon commander. squad leader. guide. platoon sergeant.
The lateral space between elements on the same line is defined as a. b. c. d.
Item 56
an extended mass formation. a squad. a platoon. a formation.
interval. a pace. distance. a step.
Cadence of 120 steps per minute is referred to as ___________ time. a. b. c. d.
double slow normal quick Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-22
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued Item 57
Select the correct procedures that a platoon sergeant must execute to form an unarmed platoon. Choice a
b
c
d
Step (1) Post himself or herself three paces in front of the point where the center of the platoon will be and face that point. (2) Command, “FALL IN” or “AT CLOSE INTERVAL, FALL IN.” (3) Command, “REPORT.” (4) Receive the report. (5) Salute and report, “SIR, ALL PRESENT AND ACCOUNTED FOR” or “SIR, (Number) MARINES ABSENT.” (1) Post himself or herself six paces in front of the point where the center of the platoon will be and face that point. (2) Command, “FALL IN” or “AT CLOSE INTERVAL, FALL IN.” (3) Command, “REPORT.” (4) Receive the report. (5) Salute and report, “SIR, ALL PRESENT AND ACCOUNTED FOR” or “SIR, (Number) MARINES ABSENT.” (1) Post himself or herself three paces in front of the point where the center of the platoon will be and face that point. (2) Draw sword. (3) Command, “FALL IN” or “AT CLOSE INTERVAL, FALL IN.” (4) Command, “REPORT.” (5) Receive the report. (6) Command, “INSPECTION, ARMS.” “PORT, ARMS.” “ORDER, ARMS (7) Salute and report, “SIR, ALL PRESENT AND ACCOUNTED FOR” or “SIR, (Number) MARINES ABSENT.” (1) Post himself or herself six paces in front of the point where the center of the platoon will be and face that point. (2) Command, “FALL IN” or “AT CLOSE INTERVAL, FALL IN.” (3) Command, “REPORT.” (4) Receive the report. (5) Command, “INSPECTION, ARMS.” “PORT, ARMS.” “RIGHT SHOULDER, ARMS.” “ORDER, ARMS.” (6) Salute and report, “SIR, ALL PRESENT AND ACCOUNTED FOR” or “SIR, (Number) MARINES ABSENT.” Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-23
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 58
Facing movements, side step, ______________________ are different halted movements of a platoon drill. a. b. c. d.
Item 59
Mark time, half step, change direction on the march, and march to the oblique are common marching movements. What are the other three most common marching movements? a. b. c. d.
Item 60
back step, and hand salute reverse step, and hand salute change step, and hand salute dismissed, and back step
Change step, march to open ranks, and march to the tactical column Change step, march to the flank, and march to the rear Change step, march to route step, and march to the rear Chain step, march to the flank, and march to the rear
Select the correct procedures to dismiss an armed platoon at attention in line formation. a. “INSPECTION, ARMS.” “PORT, ARMS.” “ORDER, ARMS.” “DISMISSED.” b. “INSPECTION, ARMS.” “RIGHT SHOULDER, ARMS.” “PORT, ARMS.” “DISMISSED.” c. “DISMISSED.” d. “INSPECTION, ARMS.” “PORT, ARMS.” “DISMISSED.” Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-24
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Directions for Items 61 Through 64
Using the diagram below, identify items 61 through 64 on the scabbard.
Item 61
a. b. c. d.
Upper end Orifice Throat Hand grip
Item 62
a. b. c. d.
Diamond stud Frog stud Frog catch Rhombic catch
Item 63
a. b. c. d.
Tip Striking end Lower end Blade cover
Item 64
a. b. c. d.
Drag Foible Casement tip False edge Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-25
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Directions for Items 65 Through 68
Using the diagram below, identify items 65 through 68 on the sword.
Item 65
a. b. c. d.
Stud Hilt Grip Pommel
Item 66
a. b. c. d.
Hand shield Brass knuckle Knuckle bow Brass guard
Item 67
a. b. c. d.
Hand grip Hilt Carrying handle Cutlass
Item 68
a. b. c. d.
Picasso Test approval star Ricasso Neck Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-26
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Directions for Items 69 Through 72
Using the diagram below, identify items 69 through 72 on the sword.
Item 69
a. b. c. d.
Foible Blade edge True edge Wilkinson edge
Item 70
a. b. c. d.
Foible Cutting edge Blade Percussion point
Item 71
a. b. c. d.
Percussion point Fuller Foible False edge
Item 72
a. b. c. d.
False edge Foible Fuller Percussion point Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-27
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued Directions for Items 73 Through 77
Using the diagram below, identify items 73 through 77 on the sword.
Item 73
a. b. c. d.
Wilkinson edge False edge Percussion point Foible
Item 74
a. b. c. d.
False edge Wilkinson edge Foible Percussion point
Item 75
a. b. c. d.
Quillion Forte Ricasso Blade
Item 76
a. b. c. d.
Upper blade Ricasso Forte Quillion
Item 77
a. b. c. d.
Hilt Grips Handle Knuckle bow Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-28
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 78
The sword is the correct size when the tip of the sword is a. b. c. d.
Item 79
eye level at carry sword. 3 inches above the ground at present sword. on line with the center of your ear opening. 6 inches above the ground at the scabbard carry.
The sword is worn a. on the left side of the body in the scabbard placed inside the frog. b. on the right side of the body at carry sword at all times. c. on the left side of the body if the carrier is right-handed and opposite for left handed carriers. d. as dictated by local drill and ceremony regulations.
Item 80
The sword is drawn whenever you are with armed troops or you a. b. c. d.
are ready to move from one location to another. approach an officer. are in command of a unit. think there is a good reason. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-29
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 81
A Marine should assume carry sword when any manual of arms movement has been ordered except: parade rest, at ease, rest, present arms, order arms, eyes right (left), and changing position in formation at quick time. What are the other two exceptions? a. Giving commands and returning the weapon to the armory b. Addressing and being addressed by a senior and giving commands c. Receiving the preparatory command for and while marching at quick time and after the platoon has been dismissed d. After executing return sword and while receiving the command of execution from at ease or parade rest
Item 82
When marching with the sword at the carry, you should swing your arms naturally and a. hold the scabbard with your left hand. b. hold your left elbow stiff to make it symmetrical with your right arm. c. switch your sword carriage to your left arm when your right arm gets tired. d. do not hold the scabbard with your left hand.
Item 83
Hold the sword ____________________ when you march at double time and a. forward of the chest remembering to swing the arm; rotate the drag of the scabbard forward. b. diagonally across the chest with the sharp edge towards the front; hold the scabbard with your left hand just below the frog. c. both hands across the body at the port; have to be aware of the bouncing scabbard. d. by the grip under the right arm remembering to pinch the elbow to the body; grasp the scabbard by the upper end. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-30
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 84
Draw sword is a a. b. c. d.
Item 85
When the sword slants down to the front with the point 3 inches from the deck and the true edge of the blade turned down best describes a. b. c. d.
Item 86
three-count movement when halted and at attention. two-count movement when halted or marching manual. static movement at the beginnings of formation. one-count movement at the commander’s discretion.
present arms. order sword. parade rest when armed with a sword. at ease when armed with a sword.
When moving from order sword to carry sword, the sword should be a. at a 45-degree angle across the chest and ready for double time. b. ready for return sword at the bearer’s own unspoken command. c. locked into the wrist when bringing it and in front of the face to give the appropriate salutation or greeting. d. locked into a vertical position when the blade reaches your shoulder seam.
Item 87
On the preparatory command of present arms, the sword will be a. straight out at a 45-degree angle, dropping it down and vertically with the thumb along the shoulder seam. b. raised up to the level of and 6 inches in front of your neck with the blade at a 30-degree angle. c. pulled from the scabbard when walking, brought out at a 45-degree angle and up in front of the body. d. retained in the scabbard and a hand salute will be rendered. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-31
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 88
When executing eyes right (left), when is the command “READY, FRONT” given? a. After the true edge of the sword is turned down in preparation for the command of execution. b. When the last man of the platoon passes by the reviewing officer. c. When you are six paces passed the reviewing officer. d. As you pass the second flag set up in the parade reviewing area.
Item 89
Return sword is executed as a a. two-count command on your own and returning to the position of attention. b. self-executed command after being directed to do so by the staff commander and returning to the position of attention thereafter. c. three-count command ending with snapping the sword into the scabbard and coming to the position of attention simultaneously on the third count. d. self-inflicted command when drilling alone, which should be heard by the evaluator.
Item 90
When executing parade rest with a sword, you may a. b. c. d.
Item 91
lower the point of the sword to the deck. return sword and assume the normal parade rest position as if unarmed. keep the sword at the carry position if you wish. let the blade fall across your body and into your left hand and hold the sword across your body.
What are the two types of flags used by the Marine Corps? a. b. c. d.
Organizational and guidons Guidons and national Streamers and guidons Organizational and national Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-32
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 92
Which is the distinguishing organizational flag authorized for and bearing the title of a designated unit of the Fleet Marine Force? a. b. c. d.
Item 93
Colors covered with a canvas or leather type of shell defines the term a. b. c. d.
Item 94
standards. streamer. guidon. national ensign.
When did the Continental Congress adopt the American flag? a. b. c. d.
Item 96
covered. retired. cased. stowed.
A flag mounted on a vehicle is called a. b. c. d.
Item 95
Organizational colors Battle standard Guidon Battle pennant
4 July 1776 14 June 1777 4 July 1777 14 June 1776
Where is the national ensign displayed when in the company of other colors? a. b. c. d.
On the left or honor position Separated by one lateral pace to the right In the center of the group as long as it is on the tallest staff Always given the marching right or the honor point Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-33
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 97
The universal custom to display the national ensign is a. b. c. d.
Item 98
from 0800 to sunset. from 0800 to 1830. from sunrise to sunset. 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
The national flag is dipped in respect to heads of state and at war memorials. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 99
As a universal distress signal, the national flag can be displayed with the union down. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 100
It is not appropriate to carry the national flag flat or horizontally, but always aloft and free. Neither is it to be used as a covering for a ceiling. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 101
The national flag can be displayed where it can be easily soiled or damaged, as long as you have a replacement. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 102
For storage after use, the national flag is folded into a rectangle and stowed. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-34
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 103
The national flag is used to cover the casket at a military funeral for any member of the military forces on active service, in the Marine Corps Reserve, on the retired lists of USMC and USMCR, or a former member of the military service discharged under any kind of condition. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 104
The national flag is placed lengthwise with the union at the head and over the left shoulder of the deceased, which is the reverse of that prescribed for displaying it vertically against a wall. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 105
The flag may be lowered into the grave and committed to the deep for a burial at sea. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 106
The interment flag is furnished at government expense for the nearest kin at the conclusion of the interment. a. Stated correctly b. Stated incorrectly
Item 107
In 1876, Marines carried the national colors (the Stars and Stripes) with ________________ embroidered in yellow on the middle red stripe. a. b. c. d.
Don’t Tread on Me U.S. Marine Corps To the Shores of Tripoli From Tripoli to the Halls of Montezuma Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-35
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 108
At the time of the Vera Cruz landing in 1914, Marines carried a design of ____________ with a laurel wreath encircling the Marine Corps emblem in the center. A ______ ribbon above the emblem carried the words U.S. Marine Corps while another scarlet ribbon below the emblem carried the motto, a. b. c. d.
Item 109
Marine Corps Order No. 4 of ____________ designated gold and scarlet as the official colors of the U.S. Marine Corps, but was not incorporated until _____________. This new design reflected what was essentially that of a. b. c. d.
Item 110
scarlet and gold; blue; The First Team. gold field; scarlet; First to Fight. blue field; scarlet; Semper Fidelis. scarlet field; blue; From the Shores of Tripoli.
18 Nov 1775; 23 July 1876; the Stars and Stripes. 2 April 1921; 23 January 1961; the Viet Nam era Marine Corps standard. 23 May 1914; 14 March 1922; the World War II Marine Corps standard. 18 April 1925, 18 January 1939; today’s Marine Corps standard.
The Marine Corps organizational flag shall be constructed of one or two plies of lightweight scarlet ________________, excluding the headings and fringe. a. b. c. d.
cotton duct, 56 inches top to bottom, 76 inches long gortex, 56 inches on the fly, 42 inches on the hoist nylon, 52 inches on the hoist by 66 inches on the fly resilient material, 56 inches long, 42 inches vertically Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-36
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 111
The Marine Corps standard shall contain a. 2½ inches of golden-yellow fringe, embroidered components of the Marine Corps insignia, and staff a cord. b. embroidered unit identification; eagle, globe, anchor, golden-yellow fringe, and battle streamers. c. gold silk fringe, battle streamers, Marine Corps insignia, and unit identification. d. staff a cord, 2½ inches of ivory fringe, Marine Corps insignia, and embroidered unit awards.
Item 112
A joint service specification designates Marine Corps flags as Type III flags. The three types of organizational standards are a. b. c. d.
Item 113
Where will guidons be displayed and when? a. b. c. d.
Item 114
Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3. colors, standards, and guidons. garrison, post, and storm. national, Marine Corps, and unit battle colors.
The battalion headquarters for holidays and parades only The company headquarters between morning and evening colors The battalion commander’s office when the company is not in the field The company commander’s office when the commander is present
There are _________ positions of the guidon. a. b. c. d.
four five six seven Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-37
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 115
At present guidon, the guidon is carried a. across the chest of the bearer and slightly forward with the edge of the spearhead facing down. b. vertically with the left across the bearer’s chest and horizontal to the deck. c. horizontal to the deck and resting in the pit of the right arm so the sharp edge of the spearhead is face down. d. at a 45-degree angle to the front and under the bearer’s right arm pit with the spearhead down.
Item 116
The Marine Corps Uniform Regulations gives instructions on how to a. b. c. d.
Item 117
The two types of inspections conducted are clothing and equipment and a. b. c. d.
Item 118
buy new uniforms. dry-clean your uniforms. wear your the uniform. preserve your uniform once you get out of the Marine Corps.
vehicles. service record book. hygiene. personnel.
What are the basic guidelines for the clothing and equipment inspections? a. Make sure each Marine has all of their prescribed clothing and equipment, his or her own gear, and all their gear is clean and serviceable. b. Establish a routine on inspections and all the gear is displayed in the same order. c. Fill out a missing gear statement in a timely manner so supply can order the prescribed gear. d. Let Marines get a lesson on time lines in regards to how long it takes to clean his or her gear and check for serviceable gear. Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-38
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 119
When conducting a personnel inspection, what is the main guideline to follow? a. b. c. d.
Item 120
Spend 5 minutes on each Marine. Look at each Marine differently because you are trying to find trends. Look at each Marine the same, top to bottom, same order of sequence. Look only at the new Marines to see if their section leaders prepared them for the inspection.
What is reverse planning? a. Letting the plan start at the lowest level in the chain of command for the inspection b. Giving the inspector an opportunity to plan for an inspection from the top to bottom of the chain of command c. Having small inspections before the big inspection d. Letting the inspector see all the Marines and their gear
Item 121
What are the guidelines for reverse planning when determining the time needed for an inspection? a. b. c. d.
Item 122
Pre-inspections Commanders involvement Planning and preparation Inspections
What is the purpose of a preliminary inspection? a. b. c. d.
Gives the junior Marines a chance to inspect Tells the NCO what to look for during an inspection Lets the unit know what to inspect for in the inspection Allows sufficient time for the unit to correct discrepancies before the scheduled inspection Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-39
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Item 123
When conducting a preliminary inspection, what is the main guideline to follow? a. b. c. d.
Item 124
Where can you find proper fitting and authorized alterations for uniform items? a. b. c. d.
Item 125
Marine Corps Uniform Fitting and Alterations Manual Marine Battle Drill Handbook Naval Uniform Regulations NCO Leadership Handbook
Grooming standards for both male and female hair a. b. c. d.
Item 126
Spend 5 minutes on each Marine. Look at each Marine differently because you are trying to find trends. Look at each Marine the same. Look only at the new Marines to see if their section leaders prepared them for the inspection.
must be neatly in shaped, evenly graduated, and non-eccentric. follow the local trends. depend on your nationality. must be put up if it gets in your way.
What are the two types of equipment displays? a. b. c. d.
Wall locker and junk on the bunk Wall locker and personnel Junk on the bunk and personnel Personnel and equipment display Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-40
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Answers
The table below lists the answers to the review lesson items. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item. Item Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Answer d b b a c b c b d a b b b a b d b c d a a d c a c b c b d c b a
Reference Page 1-4 and 1-5 1-6 1-11 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-15 1-15 1-15 1-16 1-17 1-17 1-17 1-17 1-17 1-24 1-24 1-25 through 1-30 1-30 1-30 2-5 2-7 2-7 2-9 2-10 and 2-11 2-12 2-14 2-15 2-22 2-22 2-24 2-25 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-41
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Answers, continued
Item Number 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65
Answer b b b d b b a d b c a d c b d b c c b a d c a d a a b d c b a a d
Reference Page 3-4 and 3-5 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-16 3-16 3-17 3-22 and 3-23 3-24 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-33 3-33 3-33 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-10 4-12 and 4-13 4-19 4-25 4-34 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-42
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Answers, continued
Item Number 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
Answer c b c c c b a d d a c b c a c c d b a b d b c c a d b c a b
Reference Page 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-42 4-43 4-43 4-44 4-44 4-45 4-46 4-47 4-48 4-50 4-51 4-52 4-59 4-59 4-59 4-59 4-60 Continued on next page
MCI Course 8013A
R-43
Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued
Answers, continued
Item Number 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126
MCI Course 8013A
Answer d c b a a b b b a b a b c d c a a b d c c d a c b c d c a a a
R-44
Reference Page 4-62 4-62 4-63 4-63 4-63 4-63 4-64 4-65 4-65 4-65 4-65 4-66 4-66 4-67 4-68 4-68 4-70 4-71 4-73 4-75 5-3 5-4 5-4 5-14 5-14 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-21 5-45 and 5-46 5-48
Review Lesson Examination
Related Documents
Military Studies
June 2020 12
Military Studies
June 2020 10
Military Studies
June 2020 16
Military
December 2019 36
Military
July 2020 18
Military
December 2019 42More Documents from "NCGA Project User 1"
Principles Of Instruction For The Marine Nco
June 2020 1
Us Navy Seal Patrol Leader's Handbook
June 2020 2
Marine Rifleman Weapons
June 2020 3
Antiarmor Operations
June 2020 5